Yamaha HTR-6280 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: HTR-6280

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

Printed in Malaysia WR37660

HTR-6280

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

00_HTR-6280_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 31, 2009 10:52 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)

that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with

one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two

blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the

third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug

does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,

or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold

with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing

is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any

way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid

has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the

apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not

operate normally, or has been dropped.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications

not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,

granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2 IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the users

manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other

electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Caution-ii En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to

set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet in the main room.

The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

21 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the

same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are

incorrectly replaced.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.

In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very

small quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

1 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Features.................................................................... 2

About this manual................................................... 3

Supplied accessories................................................ 3

Part names and functions....................................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Rear panel .................................................................. 5

Front panel display..................................................... 6

Remote control........................................................... 7

Quick start guide..................................................... 8

Preparing remote control ....................................... 9

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 9

Using the remote control............................................ 9

Connections ........................................................... 10

Placing speakers....................................................... 10

Connecting speakers ................................................ 11

Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13

Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14

Connecting other components ................................. 15

Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 17

Connecting a USB storage device ........................... 18

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks.................................. 18

Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18

Connecting the power cable..................................... 19

Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 19

Optimizing the speaker setting for your

listening room (YPAO) ..................................... 20

Using Auto Setup..................................................... 20

When an error message is displayed during

measurement ........................................................ 22

When a warning message is displayed after

measurement ........................................................ 22

Playback................................................................. 23

Basic procedure........................................................ 23

Using the SCENE function ...................................... 23

Selecting a source on the GUI screen ...................... 24

Muting audio output................................................. 24

Adjusting high/low frequency sounds

(tone control) ....................................................... 24

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 24

Using your headphones............................................ 25

Displaying input signal information ........................ 25

Changing information on the front panel display .... 25

Enjoying the sound field programs ..................... 26

Selecting sound field programs................................ 26

Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decode mode)........................................ 29

Enjoying sound field programs without surround

speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 29

Enjoy sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 29

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 29

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 30

Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station

(Frequency tuning) .............................................. 30

Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset

tuning).................................................................. 30

Using HD Radio™ features

(U.S.A. model only) ........................................... 32

Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 32

Using the iTunes Tagging feature............................ 32

Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 33

Satellite Radio tuning

(U.S.A. model only) ........................................... 34

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 34

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 34

XM Satellite Radio

operations ............................. 35

Registering XM Satellite Radio channels ................ 36

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™

information .......................................................... 37

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

(U.S.A. model only)........................................... 38

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 38

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

subscription.......................................................... 38

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations...................... 38

Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels...... 40

Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 41

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

information .......................................................... 42

Using iPod™.......................................................... 43

Controlling iPod™................................................... 43

Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 45

Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver

and your Bluetooth component............................ 45

Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 45

Using USB storage devices................................... 46

Playback of the USB storage device........................ 46

Other functions ..................................................... 47

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 47

Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 47

Setting the option menu for each input source

(Option menu)................................................... 48

Option menu items................................................... 48

Selecting a video signal to be output during an

audio reproduction............................................... 50

Editing surround decoders/sound field

programs ........................................................... 51

Setting sound field parameters................................. 51

Sound field parameters ............................................ 51

Operating various settings for this unit

(Setup menu) ..................................................... 55

Basic operation of the Setup menu .......................... 56

Speaker Setup .......................................................... 56

Sound Setup ............................................................. 58

Function Setup ......................................................... 59

DSP Parameter ......................................................... 61

Memory Guard......................................................... 61

Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 62

Connecting Zone2.................................................... 62

Controlling Zone2.................................................... 63

Controlling other components with the remote

control................................................................ 64

Setting remote control codes.................................... 64

Resetting all remote control codes........................... 64

Advanced setup..................................................... 65

Troubleshooting .................................................... 67

Glossary ................................................................. 78

Sound field program information ....................... 81

Information on HDMI™...................................... 82

Specifications......................................................... 83

Index ...................................................................... 84

(at the end of this manual)

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

APPENDIX

List of remote control codes.................................... i

Information about software................................... x

2 En

INTRODUCTION

■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

• Minimum RMS Output Power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω)

• FRONT L/R: 120 W + 120 W

• CENTER: 120 W

• SURROUND L/R: 120 W + 120 W

• SURROUND BACK L/R: 120 W + 120 W

■ Speaker/Preout outputs

• Speaker terminals (7-channel), extra speaker terminals

(2-channel for presence or Zone2), preout jacks (7.1-

channel)

■ Input/Output terminals

Input terminals

• HDMI input x 4

• Audio/Visual input

[Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input

(optical) x 2, analog input x 2

[Video] Component video x 2, Video x 4

• Audio input (analog) x 2

• Phono input (analog) x 1

• Multi-channel audio input (7.1-channel)

• V-AUX input

[Audio] Analog x 1

[Video] Video x 1

• DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately)

• USB port to connect a USB storage device

Output terminals

• Monitor output

[Audio/Video] HDMI x 1

[Video] Component video x 1, Video x 1

• Audio/Visual output

[Audio] Analog x 1

[Video] Video x 1

• Audio output

Analog x 1

• Zone2 output

Analog x 1

Other terminals

Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1

Trigger output x 1

■ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the

creation of sound fields

• CINEMA DSP 3D

• Compressed Music Enhancer mode

• Virtual CINEMA DSP

• SILENT CINEMA

■ Digital audio decoders

• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder

• DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution

Audio, DTS Express

• Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

• DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES

Discrete 6.1

• Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx decoder

• DSD decoder

• DTS NEO:6 decoder

• Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. model only)

■ Radio tuners

• FM/AM tuning capability

• HD Radio digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A.

model only)

•

XM Satellite Radio tuning capability, using XM Mini-

Tuner and Home Dock, sold separately (U.S.A. model only)

•

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning capability, using

SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately (U.S.A. model only)

■

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

• HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-

definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio.

– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

information capability

– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission

capability

– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability

– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals

capability

– High definition digital audio format signals capability

• Analog to analog and HDMI digital video up-

conversion (video ↔ component video → HDMI)

capability for monitor out

•

Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video

output 480i(576i) or 480p(576p)

→

720p, 1080i or 1080p

• HDMI control function supported

■ Automatic speaker setup features

• “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker

outputs suitable for listening environments.

■ Other features

• 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

• GUI (graphic user interface) menus to optimize this unit

to suit individual audiovisual system

• iPod and USB file browsing and album art display

capability

• Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

• Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability

• SCENE function for changing input sources and sound

field programs with one key

• Bi-amplification connection capability

• Sleep timer

• Multi-zone function

• iTunes Tagging function (U.S.A. model only)

Features

3 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 &

other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned

by Neural Audio Corporation.

iPod™

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

Bluetooth

™

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by

Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius

available in Alaska and Hawaii.

HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity

Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD

Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Check that you received all of the following parts.

• Remote control (page 7)

• Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (page 9)

• Optimizer microphone (page 20)

• AM loop antenna (page 18)

• Indoor FM antenna (page 18)

About this manual

• Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between

the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of

differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

• For better viewing, we increase the size of characters used in example screen images in this manual. Therefore the size ratio of characters to other

objects (such as icons) may be different from that of the actual display image.

• “KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “dHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the

attached sheet or “Part names and functions” (page 4).for the information about each position of the parts.

• ☞ indicates the page describing the related information.

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

Supplied accessories

4 En

A ZONE2 ON/OFF

Switches the zone function on and off (page 63).

B HDMI THROUGH

Lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby.

• when the HDMI control function is on

• when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently

working

C ZONE2 CONTROL

Enables operation of a receiver set in Zone2, including input

source switching, volume control and tuner operation, with the

main amplifier or remote control after this key is pressed

(page 63).

D INFO

Changes information (input, DSP program, audio decoder, etc)

displayed on the front panel display (page 25).

E MEMORY

Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (page 31) or XM/

SIRIUS channels as preset channels (pages 36 and 40).

F PRESET l / h

Selects an FM/AM preset station (page 31) or an XM/SIRIUS

preset channel (pages 36 and 40).

G FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h)

Change the tuner bands between FM and AM.

Select a channel category for a XM/SIRIUS.

H TUNING/CH l / h

Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.

I Front panel display

Displays information on this unit (page 6).

J VOLUME control

Controls the volume of this unit (page 23).

K MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

Turns this unit on and off (page 19).

L PHONES jack

For plugging headphones (page 25).

M TONE CONTROL

Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers

(page 24).

N PROGRAM selector

Changes sound field programs (page 26).

O STRAIGHT

Toggles between the selected sound field program and straight

decode mode (page 29).

P SCENE

Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field

programs (page 23).

Q PURE DIRECT

Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (page 24). This key lights up

when Pure Direct mode is on.

R INPUT selector

Selects an input source (page 23).

S OPTIMIZER MIC jack

For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting

output characteristics of speakers (page 20).

T VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack

For connecting the video output cable of a camcorder or game

console (page 18).

U AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack

For connecting the audio output cable of a camcorder or game

console (page 18).

V USB port

For connecting a USB memory device or USB portable audio

player (page 18)

Part names and functions

Front panel

MAIN

ZONE

ON/OFF

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

INPUT

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VIDEO

AUDIO

THROUGH

VIDEO

AUX

USB

VOLUME

HDMI

EFFECT

BD/DVD

RADIO

SCENE

ZONE2

ON/OFF

INFO

MEMORY

ZONE2

CONTROL

PRESET

CATEGORY

FM AM

TUNING/CH

KNQMO R

ABC D E F G H I J

SULPTV

5 En

Part names and functions

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

a SIRIUS jack

For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately)

(page 38).

b DOCK terminal

For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-

11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (page 17).

c XM jack

For connecting XM Mini-Tuner in XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

(sold separately) (page 34).

d PHONO jacks

For connecting a turntable (page 15).

e MONITOR OUT jacks

Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as

a TV (page 14).

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting an external component that supports the remote

control function (page 17).

TRIGGER OUT jack

For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal

to operate it linked with operation of this unit. For example,

when an electric screen that supports a trigger input is

connected, it opens and closes linked with operation of an input

source selected in this unit.

f HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 jacks

For connecting an HDMI-compatible video monitor or external

components for HDMI inputs 1-4 (pages 14 and 15).

g ANTENNA terminals

For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (page 18).

h SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting front, center, surround and surround back

speakers (page 11). Connect the presence speakers (page 11) or

the speakers for Zone2 (page 62) to EXTRA SP terminals.

i Power cable

Connect this cable to an AC wall outlet (page 19).

j AV 1-6 jacks

For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6

(page 15).

k AV OUT jacks

Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source

to an external component (page 15).

l AUDIO 1/2 jacks

For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2

(page 15).

m MULTI CH INPUT jacks

For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output

(page 16).

n AUDIO OUT jacks

Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an

external component (page 15).

o ZONE2 OUT jacks

Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a

different zone (page 62).

p PRE OUT jacks

Outputs multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an

external amplifier (page 17).

Rear panel

DOCK

PHONO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 2

COAXIAL

AV 3

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

OUT

AUDIO1

AUDIO2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIO

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

CENTER

SINGLE

VIDEO

GND

HDMI OUT

ANTENNA

UNBAL.

HD Radio

GND

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

VIDEO

OUT

MONITOR OUT

SPEAKERS

TRIGGER OUT

12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

CENTER

SINGLE

CLASS 2 WIRING

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/PRESENCE

CENTER

REMOTE

COMPONENT

VIDEO

SIRIUS

bca

jklmno p

de f g h i

6 En

Part names and functions

a HDMI indicator

Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is

selected as an input source.

b XM indicator

Lights up when an XM tuner is selected as an input source.

c SIRIUS indicator

Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input

source.

d HD indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception

band (page 32).

e TAG indicator

Lights up when the selected HR Radio program (or song being

played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature (page 32).

f CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP

is selected.

g CINEMA DSP 3D indicator

Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated.

h Tuner indicator

Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/

AM station (page 30).

i ZONE2 indicator

Lights up when Zone2 is turned on.

j SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (page 47).

k MUTE indicator

Flashes when audio is muted.

l VOLUME indicator

Displays volume levels.

m Cursor indicators

Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are

available for operations.

n Multi information display

Displays menu items and settings for the current operation.

o Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently

output.

Front panel display

STEREO

SLEEP

TAG

VOL.

TUNED

PL PR

SL SR

SBL SB SBR

MUTE

SIRIUS

ZONE

ab gfdecjlihk

mn om

SL SR

SBL SB SBR

PL PR

Subwoofer

Front L

Surround L

Surround back L

Center

Front R

Surround R

Surround back R

Surround back

Presence L Presence R

7 En

Part names and functions

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

a Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

b MAIN/ZONE2

Switches amplifiers (Main or Zone2) to be operated by the

remote control (page 63).

c SOURCE POWER

Switches an external component on and off.

d Input selection keys

e Tuner keys

f INFO

Changes the information shown on the front panel display

(page 25).

g Sound selection keys

Selects sound field programs (page 26).

h SCENE

Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field

programs (page 23).

i ON SCREEN

Displays the GUI screen (page 24).

k External component operation keys

Operate recording, playback etc. of external components

(page 64).

l Numeric keys

Enter numbers.

m TV control keys

Enables operations of a TV or a projector (page 64).

n TRANSMIT

Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.

o CODE SET

Sets remote control codes for external component operations

(page 64).

p POWER

Switches this unit on and standby (page 19).

q SLEEP

Switches the sleep timer operations (page 47).

r OPTION

Displays the Option menu (page 48).

s VOLUME +/–

Adjust the volume of this unit (page 23).

t DISPLAY

Displays the play information on the video monitor.

When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the

iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (page 43).

u MUTE

Turns the mute function on and off (page 24).

v HD Radio keys

Remote control

HDMI 1-4

Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4.

AV 1-6

Selects AV inputs 1 through 6.

AUDIO 1/2

Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2.

V-AUX

Selects a signal input from the VIDEO AUX jacks.

PHONO

Selects a signal input from the PHONO jacks.

USB

Selects a USB device connected to the USB port.

DOCK

Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK terminal.

TUNER

Selects the FM/AM tuner.

SIRIUS

Selects a SiriusConnect tuner as an input source.

Selects an XM tuner as an input source.

MULTI

Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

MAIN

POWER

1234

1256

1234

7856

1234

POWER

SOURCE

V-AUX

PHONO

USB DOCK

MULTI

SIRIUS

TUNER

MOVIE

DVD

TOP

MUSIC

SCENE

OPTIONON SCREEN

RETURN

REC

ENT

POWER

TV VOL

INPUT

MUTE

TV CH

ENTER

VOLUME

DISPLAY

MUTE

RADIO

STEREO

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO

MEMORY

CATEGORY

PRESET

TUN./CH

SLEEP

HDMI

AUDIO

ZONE2

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

TAG PRG SELECT

FM/AM

Switches a band between FM and AM.

(CATEGORY l / h)

Select a channel category for XM/

SIRIUS.

MEMORY

Presets radio stations.

PRESET k / n

Selects a preset station.

TUN./CH k / n

Changes FM/AM frequencies or

XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.

j Cursors k / n / l / h

Select menu items or change

settings.

ENTER

Confirms a selected item.

RETURN

Returns to the previous screen or

ends the menu display.

TAG

Stores “tag” data to the iPod or internal

memory of this unit (page 32).

PRG SELECT

Selects an HD Radio audio program

(page 32).

8 En

When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on

operations and settings.

Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items

necessary for setup.

For example, prepare the following items for setting up a

7.1-channel sound system.

• Prepare two magnetically shielded speakers (for front). The priority of

the requirement of other speakers is as follows:

1 Two surround speakers

2 One center speaker

3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

• If your video monitor is a CRT, we recommend that you use magnetically

shielded speakers.

• Video and audio cables are unnecessary if you use HDMI cables.

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

• This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer)

that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic

characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions,

and room acoustics, etc.).

You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using

the YPAO technology (☞P. 20).

Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components.

Connect the power cable and turn on this unit.

Select the component connected in step 3 as an input

source and start playback.

• This unit supports the SCENE function (page 23) that changes the input

source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for

different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select

from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key.

Quick start guide

Step 1: Prepare items for setup

Requirements qty.

Speakers Front speaker 2

Center speaker 1

Surround speaker 2

Surround back

speaker

Active subwoofer 1

Speaker cable 7

Subwoofer cable 1

Reproduction component such as DVD player 1

Video monitor such as TV 1

Video cable or HDMI cable 2

Audio cable 2

Front right speaker

Subwoofer

Surround left speaker

Surround right speaker

Front left

speaker

Video monitor

Center

speaker

Components

(such as DVD player)

Surround Back

right speaker

Surround Back

left speaker

Step 2: Set up your speakers

• Placing speakers ☞P. 1 0

• Connecting speakers ☞P. 1 1

Step 3: Connect your components

• Connecting a TV monitor or projector ☞P. 1 4

• Connecting other components ☞P. 1 5

• Connecting a multi-format player or an

external decoder ☞P. 1 6

• Connecting an external amplifier ☞P. 1 7

• Connecting a USB storage device ☞P. 1 8

• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞P. 1 7

• Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 1 8

• Connecting an XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞P. 3 4

• Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner ☞P. 3 8

Step 4: Turn on the power

• Connecting the power cable ☞P. 1 9

• Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 1 9

Step 5: Select the input source and start

playback

• Basic procedure ☞P. 2 3

• Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 2 6

9 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

PREPARATION

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+

and –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

Notes

• Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control narrows

– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries

to leak.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may be

different even though they look the same.

• If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately,

taking care not to touch the leaked material. If the leaked material

comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth,

rinse it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery

compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.

• Dispose of the old batteries correctly in accordance with your local

regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes,

or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents

of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries

and set the remote control code.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be

sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

Notes

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• You can operate external components with this remote control by setting

the remote control code (page 64).

Preparing remote control

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Using the remote control

30 30

Remote control sensor window

within 6 m (20 ft)

10 En

This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommended the following speaker layout in order to obtain the

optimum surround effect.

7.1-channel speaker layout

6.1-channel speaker layout

5.1-channel speaker layout

■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds

(stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at

an equal distance from the ideal listening position. When

using a screen, the appropriate top positions of the

speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom.

■ Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and

right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just

above or just under the center of the TV with the front

surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a

screen, place it just under the center of the screen.

■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the

listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the

5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further

back than in the 7.1-channel speaker layout.

■ Surround back left and right speakers (SBL

and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear

effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the

listening position at least 30 cm (1 ft) away from each

other, ideally at the same distance as that between the

front left and right speakers.

In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel sound signals are mixed down and output

from the single surround back speaker.

In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel sound signals are output from the surround

left and right speakers.

■ Subwoofer (SW)

The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-

frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital

and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in

amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing

Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and

right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections

from a wall.

Connections

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

30 cm (12 in) or more

60˚

30˚

80˚

60˚

30˚

80˚

Speaker channels

11 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the

front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the

sound field programs (page 26). We recommend that you

use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA

DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers,

connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set

“Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 57).

Connect your speakers to the respective terminals as follows, according to your speaker layout.

• Connect optional presence speakers or Zone2 speakers (page 62) to the EXTRA SP terminals.

• You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them.

■ 7.1-channel (with presence speakers)

■ 6.1-channel (with Zone2 speakers)

■ 5.1-channel (with Zone2 speakers)

PRPL

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m

(6 ft)

1.8 m

(6 ft)

Connecting speakers

Speakers Jacks on this unit

a Front speaker L FRONT (L)

b Front speaker R FRONT (R)

c Center speaker CENTER

d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)

e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)

f Surround back speaker L SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP (L)

g Surround back speaker R SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP (R)

h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1

i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2

j Presence speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)

k Presence speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

SINGLE

CLASS 2 WIRING

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/PRESENCE

R.BA

SUBWOOFER

INP

AUDI

OUT

ZONE

R. BA

RE OUT

ENTE

NTENN

UNBAL.

D Rad

HDMI

MAX.

ENTER

g f

h i

e d

b a

k j

Speakers Jacks on this unit

a Front speaker L FRONT (L)

b Front speaker R FRONT (R)

c Center speaker CENTER

d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)

e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)

f Surround back speaker SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE)

h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1

i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2

j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)

k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)

Speakers Jacks on this unit

a Front speaker L FRONT (L)

b Front speaker R FRONT (R)

c Center speaker CENTER

d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)

e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)

h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1

i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2

j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)

k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)

12 En

Connections

■ Connecting speaker cables

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist bare wires of the cable

together so that they will not cause a short

circuits.

2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare

wires into the hole and then tighten the knob.

■ Using bi-amplification connections

You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker

system which supports bi-amplification connection as

shown below. To activate the connections, set “BI-AMP”

to “ON” in the advanced setup menu (page 65).

Note

• You cannot use surround back speakers or extra speakers (presence and

Zone2 speakers) when bi-amplification connections are made.

Caution

• A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently

or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit

and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this

unit and the other end to that of your speaker.

• Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or

speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned

on.

• If images on the monitor (CRT) are distorted, place the speakers away from the video monitor. If it does not work,

use magnetically shielded speakers.

• Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in the advanced setup menu before

connecting the speakers (page 65). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers when you set “SP IMP.” to

“6ΩMIN”.

Connecting the banana plug

Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug into

the end of the terminal.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

Caution

Before making bi-amplification connections, remove

any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for

details.

When not making bi-amplification connections, make

sure that the brackets or cables are connected before

connecting the speaker cables.

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

FRONT

Front speakers

Right Left

This unit

13 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are

connecting.

■ Audio jacks

■ Video jacks

■ Video/audio jacks

• We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI

cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit

to other DVI components.

• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection

(page 49).

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Jack and cables Description

Analog audio jacks To transmit conventional analog

stereo audio signals. Use stereo pin

cables. Connect red plugs to red

jacks (R) and white plugs to white

jacks (L).

COAXIAL jacks To transmit coaxial digital audio

signals. Use pin cables for digital

audio signals.

OPTICAL jacks To transmit optical digital audio

signals. Use optical fiber cables for

optical digital audio signals.

Jack and cables Description

VIDEO jacks To transmit conventional

composite video signals. Use video

pin cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks

To transmit component video

signals that include luminance (Y),

chrominance blue (PB) and

chrominance red (PR) components.

Use component video cables.

(white)

(red)

COAXIAL

(orange)

OPTICAL

VIDEO

(yellow)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

(red)

(blue)

(green)

Jack and cables Description

HDMI jacks To transmit digital video and

digital audio signals. Use HDMI

cables.

This unit automatically converts input video signals and

outputs the signals to the HDMI OUT jack and

MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and

VIDEO) jacks (video conversion).

HDMI

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Input Output

Through Converted

14 En

Connections

According to the types of video input jacks available on your video monitor (such as a TV or projector), choose one of

the connection methods as shown below. When you connect video players such as a DVD player to this unit with an

HDMI connection, connect your video monitor to this unit with an HDMI connection.

Note

• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

■ To connect an HDMI video monitor

• This unit supports the HDMI control function (page 47). If your TV

supports the HDMI control function, you can control this unit with the

remote control of your TV.

■ To connect component video monitor

■ To connect composite video monitor

To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection

between one of the AV 1-6 jacks of this unit and an audio

output jack of the TV.

If the TV supports an optical digital output, we

recommend that you use the AV 1 jack. Connecting to the

AV 1 jack allows you to switch an input source to the AV 1

jack with a just a single key operation using the SCENE

function (page 23).

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

a HDMI input HDMI OUT

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

b Component video output MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO)

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

c Video input (composite) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)

HDMI OUT

VIDEO

NIT

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

PTI

AV 4

V 6

UDIO1

AUDI

UR.B

LTI

H INP

GND

HDMI 1

(

)

HDMI 2

12V

MAX.

HDMI

TV, or projector

Outputting TV sounds from this unit

OPTICAL

(

)

AXIA

V 3

(

)

AXIA

PTI

OUT

AUDIO1

VIDE

GND

Digital output

(optical)

15 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies

from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control.

Note

• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

■ Audio and video player / Set-top box

Connecting other components

Output jacks on the connected external component Input sources/jacks of this unit

External

component

Signal Output jack Input source Input jack

External component

with HDMI output

Audio/Video HDMI output HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1

HDMI 2 HDMI 2

HDMI 3 HDMI 3

HDMI 4 HDMI 4

External component

with component video

output

Audio Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL

Video Component video COMPONENT VIDEO

Audio Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL

Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO

External component

with composite video

output

Audio Coaxial digital output AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Optical digital output AV 4 OPTICAL

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Analog audio output AV 5 Analog audio

Video Composite output VIDEO

Audio Analog audio output AV 6 Analog audio

Video Composite output VIDEO

PHONO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 2

COAXIAL

AV 3

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

OUT

AUDIO1

AUDIO2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

GND

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4

TRIGGER

OUT

CENTER

OCK

DMI

OUT

IDE

MONITOR OU

TRIGGER OUT

.1A MAX

OMPONENT

VIDE

IRIU

Audio / video input

(AV 1-6)

Audio / video output (AV OUT)

Audio input (AUDIO 1/2)

HDMI input

(HDMI 1-4)

Audio output

(AUDIO OUT)

Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH INPUT)

Audio input (PHONO)

16 En

Connections

• Input sources in parentheses are recommended to connect to the respective jacks. If your Yamaha component has the remote in/out terminal, you can

switch the input source to that component with a single key operation using the SCENE function (page 23).

• You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display as necessary (page 61).

• See page 62 on how to use the ZONE2 OUT jacks.

• When you connect an external component with analog audio and component video (or composite) output jacks, connect the analog audio output to the

AUDIO 1 or AUDIO 2 jacks of this unit while making a video connection (component video or composite). Then select the video to be output when

“AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2” is selected as the input source (page 50).

■ Audio player

• We recommend connecting the coaxial digital output terminal of a CD player to the AV3 jack.

• When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.

■ Connecting a multi-format player or an

external decoder

This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (Front

L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R and

Subwoofer) for analog multi-channel input from a multi-

format player, external decoder, etc.

Notes

• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field

processor is automatically disabled.

• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-

channel speaker system when using this feature.

• You can specify a video signal to be output during a multi-channel audio

reproduction (page 50). If your DVD player has analog multi-channel

output jacks, connect them to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks while making

a video connection (component video or composite).

Output jacks on the connected external component Input sources/jacks of this unit

External component Output jack Input source Input jack

External component with optical digital

output

Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL

AV 4 OPTICAL

External component with coaxial digital

output

Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL

AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL

External component with analog audio

output

Analog audio output AV 5 Analog audio

AV 6 Analog audio

AUDIO 1 Analog audio

AUDIO 2 Analog audio

Turntable Analog audio output PHONO Analog audio

About audio/video output terminals

Among the analog audio and analog video signals input to this unit via input terminals, the audio/video signals of the

selected input sources are output from the AV OUT jacks and AUDIO OUT jacks. An HDMI input signal,

COMPONENT VIDEO input signal or digital audio input signal cannot be output.

When using the AV OUT jacks: connect an external component to the VIDEO or analog audio terminal.

When using the AUDIO OUT jacks: connect an external component to the analog audio terminal.

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

CENTER

LRLR RL

Surround

back out

Surround

out

Front out

Subwoofer out

Center out

Multi-format player or external decoder

(7.1-channel output)

17 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Connecting an external amplifier

If you want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack

outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding

speaker terminals.

Note

• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any

connections to the speaker terminals.

a FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel output jacks.

b SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel output jacks.

c SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks

Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one

external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to

the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.

• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set

“Surround Speaker” to any parameter except “None” (page 57).

d CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel output jack.

e SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

■ Transmitting/receiving remote control signals

When the components have the capability of the

transmission of the remote control signals, connect the

REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote

control input and output jack with the monaural analog

mini cable as follows.

• If connecting a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE control

signal reception to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start

playback on the Yamaha component by using the SCENE function

(page 23).

• If connecting a component other than Yamaha products to the REMOTE

OUT jack of this unit, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF” in the advanced setup

menu (page 65).

This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can

connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold

separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-

10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth

component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK

terminal.

Use a dedicated cable for connection between the dock/

receiver and this unit.

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

CENTERSINGLE

abc d

OUT

REMOTE

HDMI 1

DVD

)

HDMI

HDMI 4

VIDE

NIT

NEN

VIDE

Remote

control out

Remote

control in

Infrared signal

receiver or Yamaha

component

IR flasher or Yamaha

component

(CD or DVD player, etc.)

Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal

dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio

receiver

DOCK

OMPONEN

VIDE

GND

DMI OU

IRI

Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

18 En

Connections

Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio

player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For

information about USB storage devices supported by this

unit, see page 46.

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit. Be sure to

turn down the volume of this unit and other components

before making connections.

An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are

supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to

the respective jacks.

• The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good

reception.

• Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit.

• If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor

antenna. For details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or

service center.

• Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is

connected.

Assembling the AM loop antenna

Connecting the AM loop antenna

The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You

can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other

to the GND terminal.

Connecting a USB storage device

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks

TRAI

PURE

DIRE

INPUT

PTIMIZER

MIC

VIDE

UDI

IDE

LUM

EFFE

DVD

ADI

PRE

ATE

UNIN

G/C

USB

USB memory device or

USB portable audio player

VIDEO

AUDIO

IDE

TRAI

PURE

DIRE

INPUT

PTIMIZER

MIC

LUM

FFE

DVD

ADIO

PRE

ATE

UNIN

G/C

AUDIO

VIDEO

Game console or video

camera

Analog audio

output

Video output

Connecting the FM and AM antennas

ANTENNA

UNBAL.

HD Radio

GND

DMI 3

HDMI 4

PEAKER

2 WIRIN

XTRA

ONE2/PRESENCE

Outdoor AM antenna

Connect a 5 to 10 m (16 to

33 ft) vinyl-covered wire,

and extend it outdoors

(use the AM loop antenna

together with this

antenna).

Ground (GND terminal)

The GND terminal is not for earth grounding.

To reduce noises, connect a ground bar or a

vinyl-covered wire with a copper plate at its tip,

and place it in the moist ground.

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop

antenna

Press and hold ReleaseInsert

19 En

Connections

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

After all connections are complete, plug the power cable

of this unit into an AC wall outlet.

1 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front

panel (or pPOWER on the remote control)

to turn on this unit.

2 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or

pPOWER) again to turn off this unit

(standby mode).

• The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back.

• You can also turn on this unit by pressing PSCENE (or hSCENE).

• This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby

mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall

outlet.

Connecting the power cable

Turning this unit on and off

Caution

Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so

may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit

to be saved incorrectly.

2 WIRIN

PRE

To the AC wall outlet

Power cable

20 En

This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the

output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics

of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit.

1 Check the following points.

Before starting the automatic setup, check the

following.

• All speakers and subwoofer are connected

properly.

• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

• The video monitor is connected properly.

• This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

• This unit is selected as the video input source of the

video monitor.

• The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

• The crossover frequency controls of the connected

subwoofer are set to the maximum.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the SOPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

“MIC ON. View GUI MENU” appears on the front panel

display.

The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.

• You can bring up the above menu screen from the Setup menu (page 56).

3 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

• It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when

seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to

the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod.

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

Caution

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not

allow small children to enter the room during the

procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as

quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is

in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the

results may not be satisfactory.

• You can manually adjust the output characteristics of your speakers

with “Manual Setup” in the Setup menu (page 56).

Using Auto Setup

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

INP

IDE

AUDIO

VIDE

OPTIMIZER

MIC

Optimizer microphone

Auto Setup

Extra Speaker Assignment

PresenceZone2 None

FrontFlat Natural

EQ Type

Move focus

Start

Optimizer microphone

21 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 When the speakers are connected to EXTRA

SP terminals, press jCursor k repeatedly

to select “Extra Speaker Assignment” and

then press jCursor l / h to select how to

use EXTRA SP terminals from “Zone2”,

“Presence” or “None”.

If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,

press iON SCREEN once and then operate this

unit.

5 To select sound characteristics for

adjustment, press jCursor n to select “EQ

Type” and then press jCursor l / h.

If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,

press iON SCREEN once and then operate this

unit.

This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the

output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer

is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on

automatically measured speaker characteristics.

In “EQ Type”, you can select the following

parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the

desired sound characteristics.

Natural

This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound.

Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem

too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat”.

Flat

This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same

characteristics. Select this if your speakers have

similar qualities.

Front

This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same

characteristics as the front left and right speakers.

Select this if your front left and right speakers have

significantly better qualities than the other speakers.

6 Press jCursor n to select “Start” and then

press jENTER to start the setup procedure.

A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10

seconds. A loud test tone is output during

measurement.

Notes

• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• Press jCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.

When measurement is successfully completed,

“YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display

and the measurement result appears on the GUI

screen.

Speaker Config

Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in

the following order:

Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround

Back/Subwoofer

Distance (Min / Max)

Displays the speaker distance from the listening position

in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Level (Min / Max)

Displays the speaker output levels in the following order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level

Notes

• If “Error” appears on the GUI screen during “Auto Setup”, measurement

is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an

error message is displayed during measurement” (page 22).

• If problems occur during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” (xx

indicates the number of warnings) appears in red. For details, see “When

a warning message is displayed after measurement” (page 22).

7 Press jENTER to confirm the settings.

The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to

measurement results.

To cancel the operation, press jCursor l / h to

select “Cancel” and press jENTER.

When the following screen appears, remove the

optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now

complete.

• If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel”.

• Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of

speakers.

• If you press jENTER before removing the optimizer microphone,

“Auto Setup” of “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu (page 56) is

displayed.

Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise

results, stay where you will not disturb the

measurement, such as to the side of or behind the

speakers or outside the room.

The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it

in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after

measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be

subjected to high temperatures such on an AV

component.

3 /4 / 0.1

8.0ft / 8.5ft

-3.5dB / +4.5dB

Auto Setup

Speaker Config :

Distance (Min / Max) :

Level (Min / Max) :

Result

Set

Cancel

Finish

Select items

Auto Setup

Please disconnect the micorphone

(Then this screen will automatically disappear)

Return

Auto Setup Completed !

22 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

If an error is detected during measurement, the

measurement is canceled and “Error” appears on the GUI

screen. Check the error and solve the problem. For details

on each error message, see page 76.

Press jCursor n once, press jCursor l / h

to select “Retry” or “Exit” and then press

jENTER.

Retry

Performs “Auto Setup” again.

Exit

Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup”.

• When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To

continue measurement, select “Proceed”. However, we recommend that

you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again.

If a problem occurs during measurement, “Check xx

warning(s)” appears on the GUI screen. Check the

warning and solve the problem. For details on each

warning message, see page 77.

• Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is

displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto

Setup” again.

1 Press jCursor n / k to select “Check xx

warning(s)” and then press jENTER.

Details of the warning message are displayed. If there

are multiple warning messages, you can display the

next message using jCursor h.

2 To return to the top result display, press

jENTER again.

When an error message is displayed

during measurement

When a warning message is displayed

after measurement

Error

FrontL/R channel signals are not detected.

Check wiring and connections of the front L/R speakers.

Move focus

E-1 : No Front Speakers

Retry Exit

3 /4 / 0.1

8.0ft / 8.5ft

-3.5dB / +4.5dB

Auto Setup

Speaker Config :

Distance (Min / Max) :

Level (Min / Max) :

Result

Set Cancel

See details

Select items

Check 2 warnings

23 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

BASIC OPERATION

1 Tur n on external components (TV, DVD

player, etc.) connected to this unit.

2 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dInput selection key) to select an input

source.

The name of the selected input source is displayed for

a few seconds.

• You can also select an input source from the GUI screen (page 24).

• You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel

display or GUI screen as necessary (page 61).

3 Play the external component that you have

selected as the source input, or select a radio

station on the tuner.

Refer to the operating instructions of the external

component for details on playback. For selecting

radio stations or playback of an iPod, Bluetooth

component or USB storage device using this unit, see

the following.

• FM/AM radio tuning (page 30)

• iPod playback (page 43)

• Bluetooth component playback (page 45)

• USB storage device playback (page 46)

4 Turn the JVOLUME control (or press

sVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume.

This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change

input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four

scenes are available for different usages, such as playing

movies or music. The following input sources and sound

field programs are provided as the initial factory settings.

• When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing

PSCENE (or hSCENE).

• If you connect a Yamaha DVD/CD player that has the capability of the

SCENE control signals to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can

start playback on the player by using the SCENE function.

Press PSCENE (or hSCENE).

• You can also select a SCENE from the GUI screen (page 24).

Playback

Basic procedure

VOL.

AV1

Input source name

Note

When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some

conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure

that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is

output, do the following.

1) When only noise is output

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit,

only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this

unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the

condition is not improved, the problem may results from the

playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the

playback component.

2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation

Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu

after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to

“DTS” (page 49).

Using the SCENE function

Keys Input source Sound field program

BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight

TV AV 1 Straight

CD AV 3 Straight

RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer

Selecting a SCENE

VOL.

SL SR

Volume-18.5dB

Volume

24 En

Playback

Select the desired input source/sound field

program and then press and hold PSCENE (or

hSCENE) key to edit until “SET Complete”

appears on the front panel display.

• If you change the input source setting, register the remote control code of

an external component to the input source (page 64).

You can operate an external component with the remote

control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the

external component for each input source. Setting remote

control codes for desired input sources allows you to

switch between external components linked to scene

selections.

1 Register the remote control code of an

external component to the desired input

source (page 64).

Note

• This feature is not available for TUNER, SIRIUS and XM input

sources.

2 While holding down the desired hSCENE

key, press and hold the dInput selection

key to which you registered a remote control

code in step 1.

From now on the external component can be remotely

controllable just by selecting a scene.

1 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.

The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.

2 Use jCursor k / n repeatedly to switch the

page and jCursor l / h repeatedly to

select the desired source.

• If an input source you want to select is available in “Select Scene”, you

can select the desired input source and sound field program at once.

3 Press jENTER.

1 Press uMUTE on the remote control to mute

the audio output.

The MUTE indicator on the front panel display

flashes while audio output is muted.

2 Press uMUTE again to resume audio

output.

You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range

(Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output

from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired

tone.

1 Press MTONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

The current setting is displayed on the front panel

display.

2 Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to adjust

the frequency range.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

The display returns to the previous screen

automatically in few seconds.

Notes

• The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the Pure

Direct mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source.

• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from

other channels well.

Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity

sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is

activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the

least circuitry.

Press QPURE DIRECT (or gPURE DIRECT)

to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.

QPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct

mode on.

Registering input source/sound field

program

Switching remotely controlled external

components linked to scene selections

Selecting a source on the GUI screen

Category Source

Select Scene BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO

Select Media USB, DOCK, SIRIUS, XM,

TUNER, PHONO, V-AUX,

MULTI CH

Select Input HDMI1-4, AV1-6, AUDIO1/2

Select Scene

BD/DVD TV CD RADIO

Muting audio output

Adjusting high/low frequency sounds

(tone control)

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Treble

0.0dB

25 En

Playback

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The following features are disabled in the Pure Direct

mode.

– sound field program, tone control

– display and operation of the Option menu and Setup

– multi-zone function

• The font panel display automatically turns off while this unit in the Pure

Direct mode.

Plug your headphones in the LPHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program while using the

headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT

CINEMA mode.

Notes

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker

terminals.

• When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are

divided to left and right channels. When “MULTI CH” is selected as the

input source, only front L/R sounds are output from the headphones.

When HDMI 1-4 or AV1-4 is selected as the input source,

you can display audio/video signal information.

• Input signal information is displayed on both the GUI screen and front

panel display.

1 Select the desired input source and then

press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for the selected input source is

displayed (page 48).

2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Signal Info”

and then press jENTER.

Information on the input signal is displayed. See

page 49 for details about each information.

Note

• If an HDMI related error occurs, error information is displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

3 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.

Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly.

Available information differs depending on the selected

input source.

For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP

Program”, the following screen appears on the front panel

display.

Note

• Information marked with “*” is not available when analog HD Radio

station is selected.

Using your headphones

Displaying input signal information

Input

DSP

Dolby TrueHD

3 / 2 / 0.1

96kHz

---

HDMI 480p

HDMI 1080p

Signal Info

<Audio>

Format

Channel

Sampling Frequency

Bitrate

<Video>

Video In

Video Out

HDMI 1

Straight

Changing information on the front

panel display

Input source Information

HDMI1-4

AV1-6

AUDIO1/2

V-AUX

PHONO

iPod (DOCK) (simple

remote mode)

BLUETOOTH (DOCK)

Input

DSP Program

Audio Decoder

USB

iPod (DOCK) (menu

browse mode)

(on play information display)

DSP Program, Audio Decoder,

Song, Artist, Album

(on GUI screen)

List

TUNER Frequency, DSP Program,

Audio Decoder

(for HD Radio information)

Call Sign*, Category*, Artist /

Song*, Album*, Tag Info, DSP

Program, Audio Decoder,

Frequency

SIRIUS Channel, Category, Artist /

Song, Composer, Antenna, DSP

Program, Audio Decoder

XM Channel, Category, Artist /

Song, Antenna, DSP Program,

Audio Decoder

MULTI CH Input

Straight

Input source

Sound field program

26 En

This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds

for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders.

■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel

Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select a desired sound field program.

■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control

Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs.

Sound field programs for movies/TV programs ...............................Press gMOVIE repeatedly.

Sound field programs for music........................................................Press gMUSIC repeatedly.

Stereo reproduction ...........................................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly.

Multi-channel stereo reproduction....................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly.

Compressed music enhancer.............................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly.

Surround decoder ..............................................................................Press gSUR.DECODE repeatedly.

For example, if you select “Sci-Fi”, the following screen appears on the front panel display.

Notes

• Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input

source is applied again.

• When you play back the Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS Express, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources or audio

signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (page 29) is automatically selected.

This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select

a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

• You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (page 6).

• Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 51.

• in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP.

Enjoying the sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Sound field program descriptions

For movie/TV program sources (MOVIE)

Program Descriptions

Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic

positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an

ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.

It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent

dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-

featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.

Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.

The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to

the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio

channels and the clarity of the sound.

Sci-Fi

Program name

Sound field program category

27 En

Enjoying the sound field programs

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to

musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones

and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue

the listener even after long hours of viewing.

Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a

good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to

create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.

Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live

feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center

while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence

in the stadium.

Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data

that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling

by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.

Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for

movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during

play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.

For audio music sources (MUSIC)

Program Descriptions

Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the

interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,

creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very

full, rich sound.

Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant

reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field

features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor

can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener

can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals

and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a

big live hall.

For stereo reproduction (STEREO)

Program Descriptions

2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.

Program Descriptions

28 En

Enjoying the sound field programs

Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels.

• An input source is played back in straight decode mode (page 29) when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source.

For multi-channel stereo reproduction (STEREO)

Program Descriptions

7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit

downmixes the source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

Compressed Music Enhancer (ENHANCER)

Program Descriptions

Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel

compression artifacts.

7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

Surround decode mode (SUR. DECODE)

Decoder Descriptions

Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources.

PLIIx Movie /

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

• When the surround back speakers are not connected

• When headphones are connected

PLIIx Music /

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

• When the surround back speakers are not connected

• When headphones are connected

PLIIx Game /

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as

follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.

• When the surround back speakers are not connected

• When headphones are connected

Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music.

Neural Sur.

(U.S.A. model only)

Neural Surround processing for any sources.

The Neural Surround decoder supports PCM (sampling rate of 96 kHz or lower), Dolby Digital, DTS Digital

Surround (except for DTS 96/24), DSD and analog 2-channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible

signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight

into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM

signals are reproduced in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround

program of XM Satellite Radio.

29 En

Enjoying the sound field programs

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In straight decode mode, sounds are reproduced without

sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output

from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel

input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced

without a sound field effect.

1 To enable straight decode mode, press

OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT).

“Straight” appears on the front panel display.

2 To cancel straight decode mode, press

OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT) again.

A sound field program name appears on the front

panel display, and sound is reproduced with that

sound field effect.

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound

field surround effects even without any surround speakers

by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy

Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

When “Surround Speaker” in the Setup menu is set to

“None” (page 57), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA

DSP mode.

Note

• Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if

you set “Surround Speaker” to “None” (page 57).

– headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack.

– 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected.

– Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is used.

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode

is automatically selected when you connect the headphone

plug to the PHONES jack.

Note

• SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions.

– 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected.

– Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is selected.

CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and

accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.

To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence

speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to

the EXTRA SP terminals, perform the following settings

and then select a CINEMA DSP related sound field

program.

• Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack.

• Set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence”

(page 57).

• Set “3D DSP” to “On” (page 51).

When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D

mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel display lights

up.

Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decode mode)

Enjoying sound field programs without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA

DSP)

Enjoy sound field programs with

headphones (SILENT CINEMA™)

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode

30 En

The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two

modes for tuning.

■ Frequency tuning mode

You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching

or specifying its frequency.

■ Preset tuning mode

You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by

registering them to specific numbers, and later just select

those numbers to tune in.

Note

• Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception.

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2 Press GFM (eFM) or GAM (eAM) to select

a band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display

according to the band that you have selected.

3 Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH

k / n) to specify the frequency.

To adjust the frequency to a higher range, press h (or

k). To adjust it to the lower range, press l (or n).

The TUNED indicator on the front panel display

lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The

STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being

broadcasted is in stereo.

The frequency changes in the following manner according

to how you press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./

CH k / n).

When you press the key more than 1 second

The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is

detectable around the current frequency. This is effective

when the tuner can receive strong signals without any

interference. Once the search starts, release the key.

When you keep holding the key, the search continues even

when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to

tune in to a specific station.

When you press and release the key

The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps.

Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong

signals and stations are skipped during the search.

• You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the

Option menu (page 49).

• (U.S.A. model only)

When tuning in to an HD Radio station, the HD indicator lights up. See

page 32 for details about the HD Radio features.

4 To tune in by direct frequency tuning, press

lNumeric keys to enter the frequency of

the station.

Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set

the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889”.

Notes

• When you press lNumeric keys during preset tuning, a

preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to frequency tuning

mode using HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n)

prior to the operation.

• “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you

enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the

entered frequency is correct.

You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset).

The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong

signals and registers up to 40 stations. To register AM

stations, use manual station preset.

(U.S.A. model only)

You can register up to 40 FM HD Radio, AM HD Radio

and analog FM radio stations with strong signals.

Note

• (U.S.A. model only)

If you register an FM HD Radio station with this feature, only the main

audio program of the station (HD1) will be stored. To store other audio

program, preset the station manually.

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed

(page 48).

3 Select “Auto Preset” and then press

jENTER.

Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later

from the lowest frequency upwards.

FM/AM tuning

Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station

(Frequency tuning)

STEREO

TUNED

FM92.5MHz

Registering FM/AM stations and

tuning in (Preset tuning)

Registering stations by automatic station

preset

Auto Preset

31 En

FM/AM tuning

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

• You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by

pressing ePRESET k / n or jCursor k / n while “READY”

is displayed on the front panel display.

• To cancel registration, press jRETURN.

During the automatic station preset, “MEMORY”

appears in the front panel display each time a station

is registered.

When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears

and then the display returns to the Option menu.

To return the display to the original state, press

rOPTION.

You can manually register FM stations with weak signals

or AM stations.

1 Tune in to the desired station (page 30).

• (U.S.A. model only)

To register a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2 to

HD8), press vPRG SELECT to select the desired audio

program.

2 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

“Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display,

followed soon by the preset number to which the

station will be registered.

• By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than

2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically

lastly-registered preset number).

3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

to select the preset number to which the

station will be registered.

When you select a preset number to which no station

is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a

preset number to which any station has been already

registered, the frequency of the station is displayed.

• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric

keys.

4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

When registration is complete, the display returns to

the original state.

• To cancel registration, press jRETURN or leave this unit

without any operations for about 30 seconds.

You can call preset stations registered by automatic station

preset or manual station preset.

Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to

select a preset number.

• Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped.

• “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed if no stations are

registered.

• You can directly select a preset number by pressing lNumeric keys

while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you

enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.”

appears if you enter an invalid number.

• When you press lNumeric keys during normal tuning, a frequency

is entered. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using FPRESET l

/ h (or ePRESET k / n) prior to the operation.

• (U.S.A. model only)

This unit may take a little time to call a sub-audio program of an HD

Radio station.

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed

(page 48).

3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Clear Preset”

and then press jENTER.

• To cancel the operation and return to the Option menu, press

jRETURN.

4 Press jCursor k / n to select a preset

number to reset and then press jENTER.

The preset station registered to the selected preset

number is cleared. To clear the registration of

multiple preset numbers, repeat step 4.

5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.

Registering stations by manual station

preset

01:FM87.5MHz

Preset number Frequency

Status

01:Empty

Flashes

Frequency to be registered

Preset

number

Calling a preset station (Preset tuning)

Clearing preset stations

01:FM92.5MHz

Preset number

32 En

HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally.

Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services.

Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a

single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”.

This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM

stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names,

program types, and comments) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).

Notes

• The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you only tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio

station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 49).

• This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM

station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital FM HD Radio station directly by

using the lNumeric keys (page 30).

The HD indicator lights up in the front panel display when

this unit is tuned into an HD Radio reception band. In this

state, you can select the desired audio program if the

selected FM HD Radio station provides multiple audio

programs (up to 8).

■ When multiple audio programs are provided

Press vPRG SELECT b / a on the remote

control repeatedly to select the desired audio

program.

• You can also select audio program using lNumeric keys(1-8) and

lENT when this unit is in the automatic or manual tuning mode. In

case you select an audio program currently not available, “HDx Off” (“x”

indicates the program number) appears.

Notes

• When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator

disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically

selected after approximately 20 seconds.

• Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the

broadcasting station and the time period.

■ When only one audio program is provided

If this unit is tuned into an FM HD Radio station including

only one audio program or an AM HD Radio station, you

cannot select audio programs.

■ Behavior of the display

This unit automatically shows the HD Radio information

(call sign, etc) on the front panel display after 3 seconds.

You can switch HD Radio information to be displayed

(page 33).

This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that

enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent

preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes

Tagging feature, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”.

1 Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD

Radio audio program (if available).

If the selected HD Radio program (or song being

played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature, the TAG

indicator lights up in the front panel display and

“TAG” appears on the GUI screen.

2 While a song you want to tag is being played

back, press vTAG on the remote control.

If a song is tagged, “StorageSuccess” and the number

of stored iTunes Tagging information files (up to 50)

appear in the front panel display.

Notes

• “Insufficient Data’ appears in the front panel display and GUI

screen if tagging is not available.

• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel

display or the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging” (page 71)

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs

88.9MHz1

Lights up

Audio program

number (relative/total)

Audio program

number (absolute)

87.5MHz

Lights up

Using the iTunes Tagging feature

WXYZ-FM

TAG

TUNED

Lights up

33 En

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

• This unit transmits the “tag” data to the iPod if an iPod that

supports iTunes Tagging feature is stationed in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the “tag” data (up

to 50) in the internal memory and will transmit it next time your

iPod is stationed.

Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in

the front panel display or on the GUI screen.

Note

• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display

or GUI screen, see “HD Radio Reception” (page 70).

■ Front panel display

Press

INFO

(or

INFO

) repeatedly to toggle the

following HD Radio information display modes.

Back to “Call Sign”

Display example (Call Sign)

■ GUI screen

Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.

a Preset number, call sign, audio program number

(relative/total)

b HD Radio icon, TUNED icon

c Program category, artist name, song title, album

title

d STEREO icon

e TAG icon

f Frequency indication gauge

g Band, frequency, audio program

• To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it

is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.

Displaying HD Radio™ information

Call Sign

Call sign, frequency, audio program number (absolute)

Category

Program category, frequency, audio program number

(absolute)

Artist / Song

Artist name, song title, frequency, audio program

number (absolute)

Album

Album title, frequency, audio program number

(absolute)

Tag Info

The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored

in the internal memory, frequency, audio program

number (absolute)

DSP Program

Current sound field program (page 26), frequency, audio

program number (absolute)

Audio Decoder

Current audio decoder (page 28), frequency, audio

program number (absolute)

Frequency

Frequency, audio program number (absolute), audio

program number (relative/total)

WXYZ-FM

Preset no.10:

FM 88.9MHz-1

Ch Name

Category

Artist

Song

Classic Rock

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Made-to-order

Input

DSP

Tuner

Straight Enhancer

Option Menu

Data Hold

WXYZ-FM HD 1/3

STEREO

TAG

TUNED

34 En

Listening to Satellite Radio

To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your

satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii).

Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B,

Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play

games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment,

comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.

Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to

follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a

variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your

XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular

programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at

this time. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for

children.

To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346).

To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US).

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home

Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of

this unit. For details, see the operating instructions

provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.

• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM

Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing

window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors

or outdoors. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or

on the GUI screen (page 37) to check the antenna reception level and

adjust the orientation of the antenna.

Notes

• If “CHECK ANTENNA”, “CHECK XM TUNER” or “NO SIGNAL”

appears on the front panel display, the connection and setting of the

antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be

correct.

• When “UPGRADE XM TUNER” is displayed, it means that the

connected antenna is old. See page 71 for details.

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-

Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio

system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to

subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There

are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:

on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,

and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the

following eight squares for reference.

Note

• The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate

your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://

activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You

will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to

activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15

minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM

Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the

full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.

Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

SIRIUS XM Radio Legal

SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other

separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold

separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to

change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make

available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio

Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

NENT

IDEO

IRI

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

(sold separately)

Activating XM Satellite Radio

35 En

Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dXM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel

number, channel name, category, artist name, or song

title) for the currently selected channel appears on the

front panel display and GUI screen (page 37).

• When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically

recalls the previously selected channel.

Note

• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel

display or on the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71).

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on this page.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on this page.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access” on

this page.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”

(page 36).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front

panel display or on the GUI screen (page 37).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 36).

■ All Channel Search mode

Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k /

n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all

channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by holding down

HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing

GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h).

■ Category Search mode

1 Press GCATEGORY l / h (or

eCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel

category.

“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during

the channel category selection. When you select the

category, the first channel in the category is selected.

Note

• If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode

returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search).

2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel

display, press HTUNING/CH l / h (or

eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a

channel within the selected channel

category.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

Note

• This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel

Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is

not malfunction of this unit):

– the channel is out of service.

– you do not subscribe to the channel.

■ Direct number access

In the All Channel Search mode or Category

search mode, press the lNumeric keys to

enter the desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”.

• To display the Radio ID number displayed on the front panel display,

select channel “0”.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric

keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input

number.

• Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you

can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel

number.

• If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or

two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel

number.

• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.

For details, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71).

XM Satellite Radio

operations

001Preview

Search mode

Channel number Channel name

00880's

Pop

Category

search mode

The first channel in the category

Category name

36 En

Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel

easily by selecting the preset channel as described in

“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this

page.

1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset

channel in one of the XM Satellite Radio

search modes.

For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations”

(page 35).

2 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

The indicator on the front panel display changes as

follows.

• By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than

2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically

lastly-registered preset number).

• To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN.

3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

to select the stored preset station number.

• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric

keys.

• If you select a preset number being used (currently registered

channel number appears next to the preset number), the current

preset channel will be overwritten.

4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM channels. For details, see

“Registering preset channels” on this page.

Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

repeatedly to change the preset channel number

(1 to 40).

• You can directly select a preset number by pressing a lNumeric

keys while calling a preset channel.

You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite

Radio channels.

1 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “XM” is displayed.

2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select

“Clear Preset” and then press jENTER.

3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset

station number that you want to clear.

4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of

the selected preset channel.

To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,

repeat steps 3 and 4. To end the operation, press

rOPTION.

Registering XM Satellite Radio

channels

Registering preset channels

00880's

P01:---<<008

Currently registered channel number

(or “---” if empty)

Channel number to be

registered

Preset number to which new

channel number is registered

Calling a preset channel (Preset Search

mode)

Clearing preset channels

00880's

Preset channel number

008 80's

37 En

Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio information

on the front panel display or on the GUI screen.

Note

• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display

or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71).

■ Front panel display

Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle

the following XM Satellite Radio information

display modes.

Back to “Channel”

Display example (Antenna)

• You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front

Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 60).

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be

recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space.

• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.

■ GUI screen

Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.

a Channel number

b Search mode (page 35)

c Channel name, channel category, artist name,

song title

d Antenna reception level

• To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it

is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™

information

Channel

Channel number, channel name

Category

Channel category, channel number

Artist / Song

Artist name, song title, channel number

Antenna

Antenna reception level, channel number

DSP Program

Current sound field program (page 26), channel number

Audio Decoder

Current audio decoder (page 28), channel number

Antenna

Ch 008

All Channel Search

Ch Name

Category

Artist

Song

80’s

Decades

Sanumemo

Road to India

Input

DSP

Straight Enhancer

Option Menu

Hold Data

38 En

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the

SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see

the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect

tuner.

• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the

antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window

with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for

the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction

manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the

antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “Antenna” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS

Information” screen on the GUI screen (page 42) to check the antenna

reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna.

• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet.

Notes

• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on the front

panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is

incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner

and the antenna.

• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this unit does

not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.

Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need

to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To

activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is

uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is

12-digit number and it appears on the package of the

SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect

tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel “0” (see below).

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input

source.

2 Press l0 and then lENT to display the

Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.

“000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx”

(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of

your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the

front panel display.

Write the Sirius ID below.

ID:________________________________________

3 Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate

your subscription.

• Status messages appear on the front panel display or GUI screen

during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 73). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED”

appears.

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input

source.

The SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel

display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

(such as channel number, channel name, category,

artist name, or song title) for the currently selected

channel appears on the front panel display.

• When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

Notes

• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only

select “184” or “000”.

• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel

display or on the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 73).

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

subscription

IRI

DOCK

NENT

IDE

SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna

(sold separately)

To the AC wall outlet

Displaying the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner

SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information

Contact for activation

URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations

184Weather

SIRIUS

Search mode

Channel number Channel name

39 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

2 Search for a channel by using one of the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on this page.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on this page.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access” on

this page.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”

(page 40).

• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the

front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 42).

• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL

SIRIUS” (on the front panel display) and “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS

TO SUBSCRIBE” (on the GUI screen) appear.

• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (page 40).

■ All Channel Search mode

Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k /

n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all

channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by holding down HTUNING/CH

l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing

GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h).

■ Category Search mode

1 Press GCATEGORY l / h (or

eCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel

category.

“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during

channel category selection. When you select the

category, the first channel in the category is selected.

Note

• If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode

returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search).

2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel

display, press HTUNING/CH l / h (or

eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a

channel within the selected channel

category.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

Note

• This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel

Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is

not malfunction of this unit):

– the channel is locked (page 41).

– the channel is out of service.

– you do not subscribe to the channel.

■ Direct number access

In the All Channel Search mode or Category

search mode, press the lNumeric keys to

enter the desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”.

• To display the Sirius ID number displayed on the front panel display,

select channel “0”.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric

keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input

number.

• Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you

can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel

number.

• If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or

two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel

number.

• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears on the front panel

display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the

lNumeric keys or press lENT to cancel (page 41).

• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.

For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73).

001Hits1

SIRIUS

Pop

SIRIUS

Category

search mode

The first channel in the category

Category name

40 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel

easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as

described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search

mode)” on this page.

1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset

channel in one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

search modes.

For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations”

(page 38).

2 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

The indicator on the front panel display changes as

follows.

• By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than

2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically

lastly-registered preset number).

• To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN.

3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

to select the stored preset station number.

• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric

keys.

• If you select a preset number being used (currently registered

channel number appears next to the preset number), the current

preset channel will be overwritten.

4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see

“Registering preset channels” on this page.

Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

repeatedly to change the preset channel number

(1 to 40).

You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels.

1 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed.

2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select

“Clear Preset” and then press jENTER.

3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset

station number that you want to clear.

4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of

the selected preset channel.

To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,

repeat steps 3 and 4. To end the operation, press

rOPTION.

Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

channels

Registering preset channels

001Hits1

SIRIUS

P01:---<<001

SIRIUS

Currently registered channel number

(or “---” if empty)

Channel number to be

registered

Preset number to which new

channel number is registered

Calling a preset channel (Preset Search

mode)

Clearing preset channels

001Hits1

SIRIUS

001 Hits 1

SIRIUS

41 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access

to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit

automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is

in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode

and you search a channel by pressing HTUNING/CH

l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number

(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.

1 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed.

2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select

“Parental Lock” and then press jENTER.

3 Use jCursor l / h (to select a digit to edit)

and jCursor k / n (to select a number) to

enter the desired 4-digit code number.

If you have entered a code number before, enter the

same code number.

4 Press jENTER.

The confirmation screen appears.

5 Press jENTER again to confirm the code

number.

“OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel

list appears.

Note

• If a code number is already registered and you enter the different

number, “Wrong” appears and the screen returns to step 3. Enter

the correct code number.

• If you forget the Parental lock code or want to change it, reset it

using “SR PIN” (page 65).

6 Press jCursor l / h to select the category

of a channel you want to lock.

7 Press jCursor k / n to select a channel you

want to lock.

Notes

• You can also select a channel by using eCATEGORY l / h or

eTUN./CH k / n.

• While the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen is displayed,

sound of the selected channel is output even the channel is locked.

8 Press jENTER to lock the selected

channel.

A check mark appears next to the locked channel on

the GUI screen. You can toggle channel lock and

unlock as you press jENTER.

9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to lock all the

desired channels.

10 Press jRETURN repeatedly to exit the

“Parental Lock” screen.

This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in

the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked,

this unit is tuned into “184 Weather/Emergency” or

“000 Sirius ID”.

Tune into the channel with direct number access (page 39)

or Preset Search mode (page 40). When you tune into the

locked channel, “LOCKED” appears on the front panel

display and GUI screen, followed by the following

message. Enter the set Parental lock code by using the

lNumeric keys. To cancel this operation, press

lENT.

Note

• If an incorrect number is entered, “Wrong” appears on the front panel

display or the GUI screen and this unit is tuned into the previously

selected channel.

Setting the Parental Lock

Setting the code number and the locking

channels

The entered code number is needed for tuning in the

channel or unlocking the channel. Write it down below.

Code number: ________________________________

0 0 0 0

Input

DSP

Parental Lock

SIRIUS

7ch Enhancer

Edit

Set

Enter New PIN

Tuning into the locked channels

Input

DSP

Channel

001 SIRIUS Hits 1

002 The Blend

003 SIRIUS XM Love

004 40s on 4

005 50s on 5

Parental Lock

Category

Pop

SIRIUS

7ch Enhancer

Select Cat / Ch

Lock / Unlock

Input

DSP

Channel

006 ’60s Vibrations

007 Totally ’70s

008 Big ’80s

009 The Pulse

010 The Bridge

Parental Lock

Category

Pop

SIRIUS

7ch Enhancer

Select Cat / Ch

Lock / Unlock

PIN:

SIRIUS

42 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information on the front panel display or on the GUI

screen.

Note

• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display

or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73).

■ Front panel display

Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle

the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

display modes.

Back to “Channel”

Display example (Antenna)

• You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front

Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 60).

• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a

space.

• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals,

“ACQUIRING” appears on the front panel display.

• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.

■ GUI screen

Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.

a Channel number

b Search mode (page 39)

c Channel name, channel category, artist name,

song title, composer name

d Antenna reception level

• To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it

is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen..

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ information

Channel

Channel number, channel name

Category

Channel category, channel number

Artist/Song

Artist name, song title, channel number

Composer

Composer name, channel number

Antenna

Antenna reception level, channel number

DSP Program

Current sound field program (page 26)

Audio Decoder

Current audio decoder (page 28)

Antenna

SIRIUS

Ch 001

All Channel Search

Ch Name

Category

Artist

Song

Composer

SIRIUS Hits 1

Pop

Sanumemo

Road to India

Frankie Zipper

Input

DSP

SIRIUS

Straight Enhancer

Option Menu

Hold Data

43 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (page 17), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied

remote control or the menu displayed on the GUI screen. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this

unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 28).

Notes

• iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using

the YDS-11.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see the “iPod” section on page 74.

• (U.S.A. model only)

Once the connection between an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature and this unit is complete, this unit transmits iTunes Tagging information to the

iPod (page 32).

You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod

universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The

operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the

video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple

remote mode).

When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform

the following operations with the remote control.

You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip,

etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying

the menu on the GUI screen. You can also directly control

your iPod in this mode.

You can browse song or video files stored on your iPod

using the GUI screen. You cannot directly control your

iPod in this mode.

• “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dDOCK) to select “iPod” (DOCK) as the

input source.

2 Press tDISPLAY on the remote control.

The following screen appears on the GUI screen.

3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Music” or

“Videos” and then press jCursor h.

• Select “Music” to browse music files.

• Select “Videos” to browse video files.

Note

• The “Videos” menu does not appear unless the both your iPod and

Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.

Using iPod™

Controlling iPod™

Key Function

ENTER Subsequent menu

k Menu up

n Menu down

l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu

w Search backward (Press and hold)

f Search forward (Press and hold)

a Skip forward

b Skip backward

s Stop

Pause (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

Play (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

t DISPLAY

Switch between Menu browse mode and

Simple remote mode

Controlling iPod in simple remote mode

Controlling iPod in menu browse mode

Input

DSP

Music

Videos

iPod

DOCK

STRAIGHT

44 En

Using iPod™

4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a

menu item and then press jENTER to start

playback.

Menu items of “Music”

Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

Menu items of “Videos”

Menu items vary depending on the files stored on your

iPod.

■ Play information display

a Shuffle and repeat icons

b (playback), (pausing), (search forward) and

(search backward)

c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)

d Elapsed time, progress bar, remaining time

e Song title, artist name, album title

• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by

pressing DINFO (or fINFO).

• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.

When controlling iPod in simple remote mode, operate the

iPod directly to set the shuffle and repeat playback.

1 Press tDISPLAY to switch to menu browse

mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input

source.

2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “iPod” is displayed (page 48).

3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or

“Repeat” and then press jENTER.

4 Press jCursor l / h to select the desired

playback style.

Shuffle:

• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in

random order.

• Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order.

• Select “Albums” to play back albums in random

order.

Repeat:

• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

repeatedly.

• Select “One” to repeat each song.

• Select “All” to repeat all songs.

To return to the previous screen, press jRETURN.

• When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the GUI screen.

• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the

GUI screen.

Input

DSP

Made-to-order

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Song

Artist

Album

01:04 –02:27

DOCK

Straight

Shuffle/repeat playback

45 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of

this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without

wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “Pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance.

Note

• This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile.

“Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth

component for Bluetooth communications. Pairing must

be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to this unit

for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted.

• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the

Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with

which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary,

refer to the other component’s operating instructions.

■ Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio

receiver and your Bluetooth™ component

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)

as the input source.

2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want

to pair with and set it to pairing mode.

For details on operation of the Bluetooth component,

refer to the manual supplied with it.

3 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “BLUETOOTH” is displayed

(page 48).

4 Press jCursor n to select “Pairing” and

then press jENTER.

“Searching” appears and the pairing operation starts.

• To cancel pairing, press jRETURN.

• You can also start pairing operation by holding down

EMEMORY on the front panel.

5 Make sure the Bluetooth component

recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver.

If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA”

(example) appears in the Bluetooth device list.

6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

in the Bluetooth device list, and enter a pass

key “0000” into the Bluetooth component.

When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on

the front panel display.

• The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to

eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully

with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data

for the least recently used other component is cleared.

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)

as the input source.

2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

3 Press jCursor n to select “Connect” and

then press jENTER.

After you execute “Connect”, communication with

the Bluetooth component is established. When the

connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

recognizes the Bluetooth component, “BT

Connected” appears on the front panel display.

• When you press jENTER on the remote control, the connected

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver searches and connects to the last

connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found”

appears on the front panel display.

• To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the

Bluetooth component, display the Option menu again, select

“Disconnect” and then press jENTER.

4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component.

Using Bluetooth™ components

Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio

receiver and your Bluetooth

component

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for

the pairing operation. You are recommended to read

and fully understand all the instructions before starting.

Input

DSP

Volume Trim

Connect

Pairing

Option Menu

BLUETOOTH

7ch Enhancer

Playback of the Bluetooth™

component

46 En

You can enjoy playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA , MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files stored on your USB

memory device or USB portable player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit supports USB

mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs).

Notes

• You can play back only the files stored in the first partition.

• Some files may not be playable depending on models and types of USB storage devices.

1 Connect your USB storage device to the

VUSB port on the front panel (page 18).

2 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dUSB) to select “USB” as the input source.

The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.

If you have connected the USB storage device to this

unit before, playback of the music file played at the

last time automatically starts.

3 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a

music file to play back.

• To select a file or folder, press jCursor k / n.

• To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or

jENTER.

• To return to the previous menu, press j l.

4 Press jENTER to start play back.

You can also perform the following operations with

remote control.

■ Play information display

a Shuffle and repeat icons

b (playback)

c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)

d Elapsed time

e Song title, artist name, album title

• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.

1 Press rOPTION on the remote control

while “USB” is selected as the input source.

The Option menu for “USB” is displayed (page 48).

2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or

“Repeat” and then press jENTER.

3 Press jCursor l / h to select the desired

playback style.

Shuffle:

• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in

random order.

• Select “On” to play back music files in random

order.

Repeat:

• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

repeatedly.

• Select “One” to repeat each music file.

• Select “All: to repeat all music files in the folder.

• When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the GUI screen.

• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the

GUI screen.

4 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.

Using USB storage devices

Playback of the USB storage device

Key Function

a Skip forward during playback

b Skip backward during playback

s Stop

p Play

Input

DSP

Road to India

Symphony 01

Symphony 02

Symphony 03

Take–Her o

USB

Straight Enhancer

Shuffle/repeat playback

Input

DSP

00:30

Made-to-order

Frankie Zipper

Road to India

Song

Artist

Album

USB

Straight Enhancer

47 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source.

Press qSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of

time.

Each time you press qSLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

When the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the

front panel display lights up.

Press qSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until

“Sleep Off” appears on the front panel display.

You can operate the following functions of this unit with

the remote control of your TV when connecting this unit

and the TV (HDMI control function supported) with

HDMI.

• Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with

TV)

• Adjusting the volume

• Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or

TV)

• The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA

Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player.

• If you connect this unit and your DVD player, Blu-ray player or HD

DVD player (HDMI control function supported) with HDMI, you can

also control the device.

• We suggest that you use products (TV, DVD player, Blu-ray player or

HD DVD player) from the same manufacturer.

1 Turn on all devices connected to this unit

with HDMI.

For details, refer to the manual supplied with your

device.

2 Enable the HDMI control function on each

device.

For this unit, set “HDMI Control” to “On” (page 59).

For external devices, refer to the manual supplied

with each device to enable the HDMI control

function.

• You do not need to perform steps 1 through 2 from the next time.

3 Turn off the TV.

Other HDMI control devices are also turned off in

conjunction with the TV. If not, turn off them

manually.

4 Turn on the TV.

Other HDMI control devices are also turned on in

conjunction with the TV. If not, turn on them

manually.

5 Select this unit as the input source of the TV.

6 Turn on the HDMI control device (DVD player

or Blu-ray player) connected to this unit.

For this unit, check that the DVD player or Blu-ray

player is selected as an input source of this unit. If

not, select it as an input source.

For external devices, check that the TV screen shows

the playback picture of the player.

7 Check if the HDMI control function works

(turn on this unit or adjust the volume level

using the remote control of the TV).

Note

<Note>

• In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the

followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV

may be effective.

– “HDMI Control” is set to “On” on this unit.

– The HDMI control function is enables on the TV.

• This unit automatically selects the TV scene (page 23) when you

select this unit as the device to reproduce TV sounds using the

remote control of your TV. That is, if you connect an audio output

jack of your TV to the AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack of this unit, you can

enjoy TV sounds with the specified sound field program soon.

Other functions

Using the sleep timer

Using the HDMI™ control function

Please refer to the manual supplied with your TV and

check the following.

– The HDMI control function is enabled on your TV.

– This unit is appropriately connected to your TV.

Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.

Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off

48 En

ADVANCED OPERATION

This unit has an Option menu of frequently used menu items for input sources compatible with this unit. The procedure

for setting the Option menu items is described below.

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dInput selection key) to select the

desired input source.

2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for the selected input source is

displayed. For details about the Option menu items of

each input source, see “Option menu items” on this

page.

3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired

menu item and then press jENTER.

Parameters of the selected menu item are displayed.

4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select the

desired setting and then press jENTER

5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.

To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.

Note

• In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after

closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to

select the current input source again.

The following menu items are provided for each input

source.

Details of the menu items are as follows:

• The default settings are marked with “*”.

Volume Trim

Reduces any change in volume when switching input

sources by correcting volume differences between input

sources.

You can set this parameter for each input source.

Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)

Input

DSP

Volume Trim

Decoder Mode

Extended Surround

Signal Info

Option Menu

HDMI 1

Straight

Option menu items

Input

Source

Menu item

HDMI1-4 Volume

Trim

Decoder

Mode

Extended

Surround

Signal Info

AV1-4 Volume

Trim

Decoder

Mode

Extended

Surround

Signal Info

AV 5-6 Volume

Trim

AUDIO1/2 Volume

Trim

Video Out

V-AUX Volume

Trim

PHONO Volume

Trim

USB Volume

Trim

Signal Info Shuffle Repeat

iPod (DOCK) Volume

Trim

Shuffle Repeat

BLUETOOTH

(DOCK)

Vo l u m e

Trim

Connect/

Disconnect

Pairing

TUNER Volume

Trim

Audio

Mode

Auto

Preset

Clear

Preset

SIRIUS Volume

Trim

Clear

Preset

Parental

Lock

XM Volume

Trim

Clear

Preset

MULTI CH Volume

Trim

Video Out

Input source: All

Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0.0dB* to +6.0dB

(in 0.5 dB steps)

49 En

Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Decoder Mode

Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction.

Extended Surround

Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel input signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are

used.

Signal Info

Displays information on audio and video signals on the

GUI screen and front panel display. You can change items

to be displayed using jCursor k / n.

• Audio information

•

Notes

• “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed

when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input.

• The bit rate may vary during playback.

• Video information

•

• HDMI error message

(appears only when an error has occurred)

•

Audio Mode

Sets FM (or HD Radio) broadcasting receiving mode.

Note

• (U.S.A. model only)

Select “Auto” to tune into HD Radio stations. When “Mono” is selected,

you can tune into analog stations only.

Auto Preset

Automatically detects FM radio stations and registers

them as preset stations (page 30).

• (U.S.A. model only)

Automatically detects FM and AM HD Radio stations and analog FM

radio stations and registers them as preset stations.

Clear Preset

Clears preset station (TUNER: page 31, XM: page 36,

SIRIUS: page 40).

Parental Lock

Set the Parental Lock (page 41).

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4

Choices: Auto*, DTS

Auto Automatically selects audio input signals.

DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals

are not reproduced.

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4

Choices: Auto*, PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, Off

Auto Automatically selects the most suitable

decoder according to whether a flag for

reproducing surround back channel is present,

and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-

channel.

PLIIx

Movie

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-

channel using the PLIIxMovie decoder

whether or not surround back channel signals

are contained. You can select this parameter

when two surround back speakers are

connected.

PLIIx

Music

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-

channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether

or not surround back channel signals are

contained. You can select this parameter when

one or two surround back speakers are

connected.

EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable

decoder for input signals whether or not the

flag for reproducing surround back channel is

present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-

channel.

Off Always reproduces original signals whether or

not the flag for reproducing surround back

channel is present.

Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, USB

Format

Format of digital audio signals.

Channel

The number of input signal channels

(front/surround/LFE).

For example, if input signal channels are

3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE,

“3/2/0.1” is displayed.

If a channel that cannot be expressed as

the above, a total number of channels

such as “5.1ch” may be displayed.

Sampling

Frequency

The sampling frequency per second in

analog-to-digital conversion.

Bitrate

The bit rate of input signal per second.

Video In

Format and resolution of video input

signal.

Video Out

Format and resolution of video output

signal.

Message

Error messages about HDMI signals and

HDMI components. See the following for

details of the error messages.

HDCP Error

HDCP authentication failed.

Device Over

The number of HDMI components

connected is over the limit.

Out of Res.

The connected monitor is not compatible

with the video input signal.

Input source: TUNER

Choices: Auto*, Mono

Auto Receives in stereo mode by priority.

Mono Receives in monaural mode. You can get a

better reception in monaural mode.

Input source: TUNER

Input source: TUNER, XM, SIRIUS

Input source: SIRIUS

50 En

Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)

Shuffle

Changes the shuffle playback style.

Repeat

Changes the repeat playback style.

Connect / Disconnect

Connects to or disconnects from a Bluetooth component.

Pairing

Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component

(page 45).

Video Out

Specifies a video signal to be output during an audio

reproduction. For details, see “Selecting a video signal to

be output during an audio reproduction” on this page.

This function enables this unit to output video signals

when “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” is

selected as the input source. Follow the procedure below

to select the video to be output during an audio

reproduction.

1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press

dInput selection key) to select “AUDIO

1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” as the input

source.

2 Press rOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for the selected input source is

displayed.

3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Video Out”

and then press jENTER.

4 Press jCursor l / h to select a video input

jack to be used during an audio

reproduction.

– AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)

– AV3-6 (VIDEO)

– V-AUX (VIDEO)

– Off (no video output)

5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION.

Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB

Choices: iPod (DOCK): Off*, Songs, Albums

USB: Off*, On

Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB

Choices: Off*, One, All

Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK)

Input source: AUDIO 1/2, MULTI CH

Choices: AV1 to AV6, V-AUX, Off*

Selecting a video signal to be output

during an audio reproduction

Video;;;;;;Off

51 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as

they are with the default parameters, you can arrange

sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions

of sources or rooms by setting the parameters.

• You cannot configure the parameters when “Memory Guard” is set to

“On” (page 61).

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.

The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.

3 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then

press jENTER.

4 Press jCursor k / n to select “DSP

Parameter” and then press jENTER.

5 Press jCursor k / n to select “Program

Name” and then press jCursor l / h to

select a sound field program to edit.

6 Press jCursor k / n to select a parameter to

edit and then press jCursor l / h to

change the setting.

For details on functions and adjustable ranges of the

sound field parameters, see “Sound field parameters”

on this page.

• Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other sound field program

parameters.

7 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON

SCREEN.

• The default settings are marked with “*”.

DSP Level

Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect

to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field

effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as

follows.

• The effect sound is too soft.

• There are no differences between effects of the sound

field programs.

→Increase the effect level.

• The sound is dull.

• The sound field effect is added too much.

→Reduce the effect level.

Dialogue Lift

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.

When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest.

The position gets higher as you increase the value.

Notes

• This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to

“Presence” (page 57).

• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue

position.

3D DSP

When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use

sound field programs in 3D mode.

Editing surround decoders/sound field programs

Setting sound field parameters

To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field

program, press jCursor n repeatedly to select

“Initialize” and then press jCursor h. Then, press

jCursor h again to execute the initialization or

jCursor l to cancel it.

Sci-Fi

PLIIx Movie

0dB

16ms

1.0

2ms

1.0

DSP Parameter

Program Name

Decode Type

DSP Level

P. Initial Delay

P. Room Size

Sur. Initial Delay

Sur. Room Size

Sound field parameters Set values

Sound field program

Sound field parameters

CINEMA DSP basic parameters

Adjustable range: –6dB to 0dB* to +3dB

Choices: 0* to 5

Choices: On*, Off

The ideal dialogue

position

Move up to the ideal

dialogue position

52 En

Editing surround decoders/sound field programs

Note

• This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to

“Presence” (page 57).

■ Parameters for adjusting early-reflected

sound

Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay / Sur. Initial Delay /

Sur. Back Initial Delay

Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected

sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high

reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a

dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as

you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field

or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined

by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection

surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the

attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is

created when the attenuation time is long.

• We recommended that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field

when you adjust the delay time.

■ Parameters for specifying room size

Room Size / P. Room Size / Sur. Room Size / Sur.

Back Room Size

Produces different senses of sound expansion according to

room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music

hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until

when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus,

different senses of sound expansion can be created by

changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When

this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is

defined as twice larger than the original room size.

■ Parameters for defining attenuation

characteristics of early-reflected sound

Liveness / P. Liveness / Sur. Liveness / Sur. Back

Liveness

Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create

a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level)

as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a

low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value.

Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in

an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic

absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead

sound field is created when the attenuation time is short

while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation

time is long.

Sound field parameters for advanced

configurations

Adjustable range: 1 to 99ms (Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay), 1 to

49ms (Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial

Delay)

Adjustable range: 0.1 to 2.0

Delay

Time

Level

Delay

Time

Level

Early-reflected

sound

Original source sound

Sound source

Reflecting

Small = 1ms Large = 99ms

Adjustable range: 0 to 10

Time

Level

Time

Early

Source sound

Sound source

Small = 0.1 Large = 2.0

Time

Level

Small = 0 Large = 10

Time

Level

Source sound

Live

Dead

Large reflected

sound

Small reflected

sound

53 En

Editing surround decoders/sound field programs

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound

Reverb Time

Reverb Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the

rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz

reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation.

Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the

value. Reverb Time adjustment allows you to create a

natural reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time

longer for a sound source or room with less echo, or

shorter for a sound source or room with more echo.

Reverb Delay

Reverb Delay parameter adjusts the time difference

between the beginning of the direct sound and the

beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value,

the later the reverberation sound begins. Increasing the

value of Reverb Delay allows you to create a reverberant

sound in a wider area for the same Reverb Time.

Reverb Level

Reverb Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound

level. Increasing the value of Reverb Level makes the

reverbration sound level higher, which allows you to

create more echo.

■ Parameter for MOVIE sound field programs

Decode Type

Selects the decoder type for use with the MOVIE sound

field programs.

Note

• You cannot select a decoder for the following MOVIE sound field

programs.

– Mono Movie

– Sports

– Action Game

– Roleplaying Game

■ Parameter for 2ch Stereo

Direct

Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control

circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the

input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.

■ Parameters for 7ch Stereo

Center Level / Surround L Level / Surround R

Level / Surround Back Level / Presence L Level /

Presence R Level

Adjusts the volume of the center, surround L/R, surround

back and presence L/R channels in the 7ch Stereo

program. The available parameters differ depending on the

setting of the speakers.

Adjustable range: 1.0 to 5.0s

Adjustable range: 0 to 250ms

Time Time

Small = 1.0s Large = 5.0s

Source sound

Rear reverberation

Rear

reverberation

Early reflections

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Sound source

Reverb Time Reverb Time

60dB 60dB

Time

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

(dB)

Reverb Delay Reverb Time

60dB

Adjustable range: 0 to100%

Parameters for certain sound field

programs

Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema

Choices: Auto*, Off

Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and

tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble”

tone controls are both set to 0 dB.

Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control.

Adjustable range: 0 to 100%

Time

Level

Source sound

Reverb Level

(dB)

54 En

Editing surround decoders/sound field programs

■ Parameter for Straight Enhancer and 7ch

Enhancer

Effect Level

Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level.

When the high-frequency signals of the source is

emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low”. To

reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low”.

You can customize decoder effects by setting the

following parameters. For details about the types of

decoders, see “Surround decode mode” (page 28).

■ Parameter for PLIIx Music and PLII Music

Panorama

Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends

stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front

speakers for a wraparound effect.

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound

field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the

difference in level created by the software being played

back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround

sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative

and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value

more positive.

Center Width

You can spread the center sound toward left and right

according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for

outputting the center sound from the center speaker only,

or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker.

■ Parameter for Neo:6 Music

Center Image

Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to

the center channel to make the center channel more or less

dominant as necessary.

Choices: High*, Low

Decoder parameters

Choices: Off*, On

Adjustable range: –3 to STD* to +3

Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7

Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0

55 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can call the Setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus.

For details, read “Basic operation of the Setup menu” first, and see the respective pages.

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Menu/Submenu Function Page

Speaker Setup Sets items for speakers.

Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers.

Manual Setup Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers.

Speaker Configuration Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the

connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening

environment.

Speaker Level Separately adjusts volume of each speaker.

Speaker Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between

speakers and the listening position.

Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics.

Test Tone Generates test tones.

Sound Setup Sets various items for sound outputs.

Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones.

Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals.

HDMI Auto Lipsync Sets on or off of automatic adjustments for delay between output timing between

video signals input from the HDMI jack and audio signals.

Auto Delay Fine adjusts a delay time of HDMI Auto.

Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the delay of audio and visual output.

Function Setup Sets various items for HDMI and display.

HDMI Sets various items for input sources.

HDMI Control Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports

the HDMI control function is connected with this unit.

Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the

HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby.

Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for

reproducing sound signals.

Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input

signals.

Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog

video input signals.

Display Sets items for a video monitor or the front panel display.

Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display.

Front Panel Display Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display.

GUI Position Adjusts top and bottom positions of the GUI screen displayed on the video

monitor.

Volume Sets items for volumes.

Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the

minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level.

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally

increased.

Initial Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on.

Input Rename Changes input source names to be displayed on the GUI screen or the front panel

display.

Zone2 Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2.

Zone2 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally

increased.

Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on.

56 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

The Setup menu screen appears on both the GUI screen

and front panel display.

GUI screen

Front panel display

In this section, procedures of setting menus using the

video monitor are described.

1 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.

The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.

2 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then

press jENTER.

The Setup menu appears on the video monitor.

3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired

menu then press jENTER.

Items of the selected menu are displayed.

Example (Function Setup)

• To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.

4 If necessary, press jCursor k / n to select

the desired submenu then press jENTER.

Example (Volume)

5 Press jCursor k / n to select an item to edit

and then press jCursor l / h to change

the setting.

Some items in “Manual Setup” of “Speaker Setup”

take up a full screen. To display other items in

“Manual Setup”, press jCursor k / n.

Example (Speaker Configuration)

• To configure other items, repeat step 5.

6 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON

SCREEN.

Note

• In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after

closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to

select the current input source again.

You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of

adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup” (YPAO)

for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup”

for manual adjustment.

• The default settings are marked with “*”.

Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to

obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on

positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic

characteristics or the room, which are automatically

measured. For details on operations, see page 20.

Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on

manually set parameters.

After “Auto Setup” (YPAO) is performed, you can check

automatically adjusted parameters in the “Manual Setup”

menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if

necessary.

■ Speaker Configuration

Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of

speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound

reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening

environment.

DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs.

Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration.

Menu/Submenu Function Page

Basic operation of the Setup menu

Speaker Setup

Sound Setup

Function Setup

DSP Parameter

Memory Guard

Setup Menu

;SpeakerSetup

HDMI

Display

Volume

Input Rename

Zone2

Function Setup

Off

+16.5dB

Off

Volume

Adaptive DRC

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Speaker Setup

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Speaker Configuration

Front Speaker

LargeSmall

57 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

• The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size:

“Large” or “Small”. “Large” and “Small” refer to speakers with woofer

diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively.

Extra Speaker Assignment

Selects the application for the EXTRA SP terminals.

Note

•

When setting “Extra SP Assign” to “Zone2” or “Presence”, the surround back

channel signals for main output is separately output from other channels.

LFE / Bass Out

Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency

components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound)

channel or other channels. The output status is as follows.

LFE channel signals

Low-frequency components of other channel signals

Front Speaker

Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers.

Note

• If “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front”, “Front Speaker” automatically

switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small”.

Center Speaker

Sets the size of center speaker.

Surround Speaker

Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers.

• When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Surround Back Speaker

Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers.

• When “Surround Back Speaker” is set to “None”, “PLIIx Movie”,

“PLIIx Music” and “PLIIx Game” of the surround decode mode

(page 28) are not available.

Choices: Zone2*, Presence, None

Zone2 Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the

speakers in the second zone.

Presence Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the

presence speakers.

None Disables the EXTRA SP terminals.

Choices: Subwoofer, Front, Both*

Parameter Subwoofer

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Subwoofer Output Not output Not output

Front Not output Output Not output

Both Output Not output Not output

Parameter Subwoofer

Front

speakers

Other

speakers

Subwoofer [1] [2] [2]

Front Not output [3] [2]

Both [3] [4] [2]

[1] Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker,

the size of which is set to “Small”.

[2] Outputs low-frequency components when the sizes of speakers

are set to “Large”.

[3] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right

channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to

“Small”.

[4] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right

channels.

Choices: Small, Large*

Small Select this when small speakers are

connected. Low-frequency components of the

front left and right channels are output from a

subwoofer.

Large Select this when large speakers are

connected.

Choices: None, Small*, Large

None Select this when no center speaker is

connected. Center channel signals are spread

to front left and right speakers.

Small Select this when a small center speaker is

connected. Low-frequency components of

center channel are output from a subwoofer.

If a subwoofer is not connected they are

output from front speakers.

Large Select this when a large center speaker is

connected.

Choices: None, Small*, Large

None Select this when no surround speakers are

connected. Surround channel signals are

spread to front left and right speakers.

“Surround Back Speaker” automatically

switches to “None” when this is selected.

Small Select this when small surround speakers are

connected. Low-frequency components of

surround channels are output from a

subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected

they are output from front speakers.

Large Select this when large surround speakers are

connected.

Choices: None, Large x 1, Small x 1, Large x 2, Small x 2*

None Select this when no surround back speaker

are connected. Surround back channel signals

are output from the surround L/R speakers

and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled,

they are output from the surround L/R

speakers and front speakers.

Large x 1 Select this when one large surround back

speaker is connected.

Small x 1 Select this when one small surround back

speaker is connected.

Large x 2 Select this when two large surround back

speakers are connected.

Small x 2 Select this when two small surround back

speakers are connected.

58 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Bass Crossover Frequency

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component

output from a speaker with a size set to “Small” (Small x

1, Small x 2) Sound with a frequency below that limit is

output from a subwoofer or front speakers.

If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover

frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover

frequency at the maximum.

Subwoofer Phase

Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are

lacking or unclear.

■ Speaker Level

Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the

sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the

listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending

on the number of speakers connected.

• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears

instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.

• You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test

Tone” to “On” (on this page).

• If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control,

set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum.

■ Speaker Distance

Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so

that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at

the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of

each speaker.

Unit

FR.L / FR.R / CNTR / SUR.L / SUR.R / SBL / SBR /

SWFR / PR.L / PR.R

• Available items differ depending on the “Speaker Configuration” settings

(page 56).

• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears

instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.

■ Equalizer

Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic

equalizer.

EQ Type Select

Selects an equalizer type.

GEQ

Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic

equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust

signal levels in 7 frequency ranges.

To adjust the signal level within each range, press

jCursor l / h to select the desired speaker while

“Channel” is selected, press jCursor k / n to select the

desired frequency band and then press jCursor l / h

to adjust the signal level.

■ Test Tone

Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates

test tones. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the

settings of “Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone.

You can set various items for sound outputs.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for

reproducing bitstream signals.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz,

160Hz, 200Hz

Choices: Normal*, Reverse

Normal Select this not to change the phase of your

subwoofer.

Reverse Select this to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

Adjustable range: –10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5dB step)

Defaults: 0dB (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R)

–1.0dB (CNTR, SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)

Choices: feet (ft)*, meters (m)

feet (ft) Displays the speaker distance in feet.

meters (m) Displays the speaker distance in meters.

Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft)

Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L,

PR.R)

2.60m (8.5ft) (CNTR)

2.40m (8.0ft) (SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)

Choices: Auto PEQ, GEQ*, Off

Auto PEQ Uses a parametric equalizer selected in

“Auto Setup”. Characteristics of the

currently used parametric equalizer are

displayed below “Auto PEQ”.

GEQ Uses a graphic equalizer. Press jENTER

to adjust the characteristics of the graphic

equalizer.

Off Not use a graphic equalizer.

Channels Front Left, Front Right, Center, Surround Left,

Surround Right, Surround Back Left, Surround

Back Right

Choices: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz,

16kHz

Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5dB step)

Choices: Off*, On

Off Not generate test tones.

On Generates test tones.

Sound Setup

Choices: Min/Auto, STD, Max*

Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for

low volume or a quiet environment, such as

at night, for bitstream signals except for

Dolby TrueHD signals.

(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby

TrueHD signals based on input signal

information.

STD Sets the standard dynamic range

recommended for regular home use.

59 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Lipsync

Adjusts delay between video output and audio output.

HDMI Auto Lipsync

Automatically adjusts output timing of audio and video

signals when a TV that supports an automatic lip-sync

function is connected to this unit.

Auto Delay

Fine adjust the correction time when “HDMI Auto

Lipsync” is set to “On”. The actual correction time is

displayed under in “Auto Delay” field and an offset time

set by the user in “Offset” field.

Manual Delay

Manually fine adjusts the correction time. Select this when

the connected TV does not support the automatic lipsync

function or you set “HDMI Auto Lipsync” to “Off”.

You can set various items for HDMI and display.

You can set items for HDMI.

■ HDMI Control

Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a

component that supports the HDMI control function is

connected with this unit. When this parameter is set to

“On”, this unit output signals input from the HDMI 1-4

jacks to the video monitor even when this unit is on

standby.

• The BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up in the following cases

while this unit is on standby.

– when the HDMI control function is on

– when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working

• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, this unit consumes 1 to 3 watts of

power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this

unit.

■ Standby Through

Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the

HDMI 1-4 jacks to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is

on standby. When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit

output signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the video

monitor even when this unit is on standby.

• This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

• To enables HDMI signal standby-through output, any one of the input

sources connected to the HDMI 1-4 jacks must be selected before

switching to standby.

• When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the BHDMI THROUGH

indicator lights up. In this state, this unit consumes up to 3 watts of power

even on standby.

■ Audio Output

Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals input

from the HDMI 1-4 jacks.

Note

• Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the TV

vary depending on specifications of the monitor.

• This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

■ Resolution

Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted

from analog video input signals and output from the

HDMI OUT jack.

Notes

• Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog

video signals cannot be upscaled.

• When a video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit,

this unit automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An

asterisk (*) appears on the left of the detected resolution.

• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set

“MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (page 65) and try

again.

Max Outputs sound without adjusting the

dynamic range of the input signals.

Choices: Off*, On

Off Select this when the connected TV does not

support the automatic lip-sync function or

you do not use the automatic lip-sync

function. Set the correction time in “Manual

Delay”.

On Select this when the connected TV supports

the automatic lip-sync function. Fine adjust

the correction time in “Auto Delay”.

Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)

Function Setup

HDMI

Choices: On, Off*

On Enables the HDMI control function.

Off Disables the HDMI control function.

Choices: On, Off*

On Outputs the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT

jack.

Off Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Choices: Amplifier*, TV, Amplifier + TV

Amplifier Outputs HDMI sound signals form the

speakers connected to this unit.

TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the

speakers of a TV connected to this unit.

Sound output from the speakers connected to

this unit is muted.

Amplifier +

Outputs HDMI sound signals from the

speakers connected to this unit and the

speakers of a TV connected to this unit.

Choices: Through*, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p

60 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

■ Aspect

Sets a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images

reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT

jack when the HDMI signals are converted from analog

video input signals by a video conversion function.

Notes

• You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set

to “Through”.

• This setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3.

• You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are

input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or when 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are

input.

You can set items for a video monitor and the front panel

display.

Dimmer

Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is

lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is

darkened.

Note

• The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode

even if the value is increased.

Front Panel Display Scroll

Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of

characters exceed a display area of the front panel display.

GUI Position

Adjusts the position of the GUI screen displayed on the

video monitor. To move the screen up (or to the right), set

this value larger. To move the screen down (or to the left),

set this value smaller.

You can set items for volumes.

■ Adaptive DRC

Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume

level. This feature is useful when you are listening at

lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled,

the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.

When the volume level is low: narrow the dynamic range

When the volume level is high: widen the dynamic range

• This setting is also effective for headphones.

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will

not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust

the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB (or Mute) when

you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. The volume increases

to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5

dB (default).

■ Initial Volume

Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When

this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used when

this unit was set to standby is applied.

Note

• When you set “Max Volume” and “Initial Volume” the setting of “Max

Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume”

to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is

automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on.

Choices: Through*, 16:9, Smart Zoom

Through Outputs the video signals without changing

the aspect ratio.

16:9 Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3

images on a 16:9 TV with black bands on

the right and left sides of the TV screen.

Smart Zoom Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3

images on a 16:9 TV by stretching right and

left of images to fit on the TV screen.

Display

Adjustable range: –4 to 0*

Choices: Continuous*, Once

Continuous Repeatedly displays all characters by

scrolling.

Once Displays all characters by scrolling once,

halts scrolling and then displays first 14

characters.

Adjustable range: –5 to 0* to +5

Volume

Choices: Auto, Off*

Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off Not adjust the dynamic range automatically.

Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step)

Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)

Volume : highVolume : low

Input levelInput level

Output level

Auto

Off Off

Auto

61 En

Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Changes input source names to be displayed on the front

panel display.

Selecting a name to be displayed from templates

Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to

edit and then press jCursor l / h to select a new

name from the following templates.

Entering an original name

Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to

edit and then press jENTER. Enter up to 9 characters

by selecting one character at a time with the following key

operations.

The following characters are available for input.

A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space

Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level

of Zone2.

• These parameters are available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment”

is set to “Zone2” (page 57).

■ Zone2 Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2, so that the

volume will not be accidentally increased. For example,

you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB

when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”.

■ Zone2 Initial Volume

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2 when the

power of Zone2 unit is turned on. When this parameter is

set to “Off”, the volume level used at the time when the

Zone2 unit was set to standby is applied.

Note

• If you set “Zone2 Max Volume” and “Zone2 Initial Volume”, the setting

of “Zone2 Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, if you set

“Zone2 Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Zone2 Initial Volume” to

“0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time

the Zone2 unit is turned on.

You can set parameters for the sound field programs. For

details, see page 51.

Protects the Setup menu settings against accidental

alteration.

Note

• When this parameter is switched to “On”, “ ” appears at the top left

corner of the Setup menu screen.

Input Rename

– Blu-ray – Satellite

– DVD – VCR

– SetTopBox – Tape

– Game – MD

– TV – PC

– DVR – iPod

– CD – HD DVD

– CD-R – “blank”

jCursor l / h Selects a character to edit.

jCursor k / n Selects a character to enter.

jENTER Enters a selected character.

Zone2

Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step)

Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)

DSP Parameter

Memory Guard

Choices: Off*, On

Off Not protect settings.

On Protects the Setup menu settings (except for

“Decode Type” in “DSP Parameter” and

“Memory Guard”).

62 En

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. This feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate

input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the

supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the

multi-zone functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.

• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter

transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a

CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via

the infrared signal receiver in the second zone.

• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a

multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your

nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2

connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks

of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these

products. Up to 6 components can be connected using monaural analog

mini cables or via an IR flashers. For details about connections, see

“Transmitting/receiving remote control signals” (page 17).

Connect an amplifier/receiver in the second zone and

other components to this unit as follows.

Note

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs

encoded in DTS.

Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA

SP terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to

“Zone2” (page 57).

• You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP terminals as the front

speaker system of another zone.

• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2 speakers, you can

adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume

of the Zone2 speakers (page 61).

Using multi-zone configuration

Only analog signal can be sent to the second zone. If you want to output sounds to Zone2, connect an external

component to the AV5-6, AUDIO1-2 or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (by analog connection). For example, if you

want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player to the second zone, you must connect the HDMI DVD player to this

unit by both HDMI and analog connections.

Connecting Zone2

Using an external amplifier

To the REMOTE IN jack

Infrared signal

emitter

DVD player (etc.)

Amplifier

Remote control

Second zone

(Zone2)

Main zone

This unit

From the ZONE2 OUT jacks

Infrared signal

receiver

From the REMOTE OUT jack

Using the internal amplifier of this unit

Important safety notice

The EXTRA SP terminals of this unit should not be

connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or

more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or

multiple speakers per channel could create an

abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier

damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance

information for all channels must be maintained at all

times. This information is found on the back panel of

your unit.

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/PRESENCE

Second zone

(Zone2)

This unit

Main zone

63 En

Using multi-zone configuration

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can select and control Zone2 by using the control

keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The

available operations are as follows:

• Selecting the input source.

• Tuning into the desired station (when “TUNER” is

selected as the input source)

• Tuning into the desired channel (when “XM” or

“SIRIUS” is selected as the input source) (U.S.A. model

only)

• Adjusting the volume of Zone2 (when Zone2 speakers

are connected to the EXTRA SP terminals).

Before controlling Zone2 by using the control keys on the

front panel or on the remote control, follow the procedure

below to switch this unit to the Zone2 operation mode.

■ To control Zone2 by using the front panel

control keys

Press CZONE2 CONTROL while Zone2 is

turned on.

The ZONE2 indicator flashes on the front panel display

for approximately 10 seconds.

Note

• Complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing on the front

panel display. Otherwise, the Zone2 mode is automatically canceled and

this unit returns to the main zone operation mode.

■ To control Zone2 by using the remote control

Switch bMAIN/ZONE2 to the “ZONE2”

position.

■ Turning on or set Zone2 to standby

Press AZONE2 ON/OFF (or pPOWER).

■ Operating Zone2

Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput

selection key) to select the desired input

source.

• Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, “AUDIO2”, “V-

AUX” or “PHONO” to listen to the input source in

Zone2.

• Select “TUNER” to use the FM/AM radio features

(page 30) in Zone2.

• Select “USB” to use the USB features (page 46) in

Zone2.

• Select “DOCK” to use the iPod features (page 43) or

Bluetooth features (page 45) in Zone2.

• Select “SIRIUS” to use the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

features (page 38) in Zone2.

• Select “XM” to use the XM Satellite Radio features

(page 34) in Zone2.

Controlling Zone2

Switching to the Zone2 operation mode

Operations in the Zone2 operation mode

ZONE

Flashes

64 En

You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for

controlling external components are as follows:

cSOURCE POWER

Turns on and off an external component.

jCursor, ENTER, RETURN

Operates the menus of external components.

kExternal component operation keys

Function as a recording or playback key of an external

component, or a menu display key.

lNumeric keys

Function as numeric keys of an external component.

mTV control keys

tDISPLAY

Switches between the screens of external components.

• You can use mTV control keys only for controls of TV regardless

of selected input sources.

• You need to set the remote control code first to control external

components.

• The remote control keys for controlling external components are

available only when the external components have corresponding control

keys.

The following remote control codes are assigned to input

sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

■ Default remote control code settings

“—” indicates no assignment

• An external component controlled by the remote control is automatically

selected according to selection of the scenes (page 23).

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

You should perform each step within 1 minute after the

previous step.

1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

2 Press the desired dInput selection key.

3 Press lNumeric keys to enter a remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is registered,

nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails,

nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from

step 1.

You can reset all remote control codes to the factory

default settings.

1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as a tip of a

ballpoint pen.

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

2 Press iON SCREEN.

3 Press lNumeric keys to enter “9981”.

Once the initialization is complete, nTRANSMIT

blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six

times. Repeat from step 1.

Controlling other components with the remote control

INPUT Switches visual inputs of TV

MUTE Mutes audio of TV

TV VOL +/– Controls the volume of TV

TV CH +/– Switches channels of TV

POWER Turns on and off TV

Input source Category Manufacturer

Default

code

[HDMI 1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018

[HDMI 2] — — —

[HDMI 3] — — —

[HDMI 4] — — —

[AV 1] ———

[AV 2] ———

[AV 3] CD Yamaha 5013

[AV 4] ———

[AV 5] ———

[AV 6] ———

[AUDIO 1] — — —

[AUDIO 2] — — —

[V-AUX] — — —

[PHONO] — — —

[USB] ———

[DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011

[TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007

[SIRIUS] Tuner Yamaha 5017

[XM] Tuner Yamaha 5009

[MULTI]———

Setting remote control codes

Resetting all remote control codes

Input source Category Manufacturer

Default

code

65 En

English

INTRODUCTION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In the advanced setup menu, you can set basic operations

of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or

initialize user settings.

1 Set this unit to standby.

2 While holding down OSTRAIGHT on the

front panel, press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.

Keep holding down OSTRAIGHT until

“ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel

display.

3 Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select

the parameter you want to change.

The default setting are marked with “*”.

• Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an

actual display screen.

SP IMP. -XXX

Selects output impedance of this unit according to

connected speakers. When you connect 4-ohm

speakers to the FRONT speaker terminals, set “SP

IMP.” to “6ΩMIN.”.

REMOTE ID -XXX

Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple

Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a

single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to

the same setting.

SR PIN -XXX

Resets Parental lock cord when using SIRIUS

Satellite tuner.

BI AMP - XXX

Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main

speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12.

SCENE IR -XXX

Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals

to an external component connected to the REMOTE

OUT jack on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE

function is selected.

MON.CHK - XXXX

Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video

monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT

jack.

INIT-XXXXXXXXX

Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can

select an initialization method from the following.

DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field

programs

VIDEO Video conversion settings (resolution/

aspect) in the Setup menu and the GUI

display position

ALL All

CANCEL Cancellation of initialization

4 Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change

the selected parameter setting.

To change other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this

unit to standby.

The settings you made are reflected next time you

turn on this unit.

You can check the firmware of this unit and update the

firmware using the USB port on the front panel.

Select the following parameter in step 3 above.

FIRM UPDATE

Updates the firmware of this unit. To update the firmware,

select “FIRM UPDATE” and then press OSTRAIGHT.

Notes

• Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware.

• Be sure to read information supplied with updates before updating the

firmware.

VERXXX.XXX.XXX

Displays the firmware of this unit.

Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If

another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a

different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted

operation of the other amplifier.

“ID1” is set for both the main unit and remote control by

default. If you have changed the remote control ID, make

sure that you select the same ID for the main unit in the

the advanced setup menu.

1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a

ballpoint pen.

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

2 Press iON SCREEN.

Advanced setup

Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN*

Choices: ID1*, ID2

Choices: RESET, CANCEL*

Choices: ON, OFF*

Choices: ON*, OFF

Choices: YES*, SKIP

ADVANCEDSETUP

Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL*

Updating the firmware

Setting a remote control ID

66 En

Advanced setup

3 Enter the desired remote control ID code.

To switch to ID1:

Press lNumeric keys to enter “5019”.

To switch to ID2:

Press lNumeric keys to enter “5020”.

Once the remote control code is registered,

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat

from step 1.

• If you initialize the settings of this unit, “REMOTE ID” (remote control

code of this unit) is set to “ID1”.

67 En

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

APPENDIX

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

Troubleshooting

General

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer is frozen due

to an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a drop in power supply voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,

wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.

—

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode

The internal temperature is too high and

the overheat protection circuitry has been

activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 65

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit and play the source again. —

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall

outlet.

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 65

(When this unit is turned back on and

“CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The

protection circuitry has been activated

because this unit was turned on while a

speaker cable was shorted.

Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit

and speakers are connected properly.

This unit cannot be

turned off.

The internal microcomputer is frozen due

to an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a drop in power supply voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,

wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.

—

No picture. An appropriate video input is not selected

on the video monitor.

Select an appropriate video input on the video

monitor.

—

The external video component is

connected to one of the HDMI 1-4 jacks

while your video monitor is connected to

the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT

VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.

Connect the external video component to the video

input jacks other than the HDMI 1-4 jacks or connect

the video monitor to the HDMI OUT jack.

14, 15

This unit outputs the video signals not

supported by the video monitor connected

to the HDMI OUT jack.

Displays the advanced setup menu and select

“VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters.

Displays the advanced setup menu and set

“MON.CHK” to “YES”.

Video signals are input from a game

console while your video monitor is

connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.

68 En

Troubleshooting

The picture is

disturbed.

The video software is copy-protected.

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput

selection key) to select the desired input source.

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11

The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. 23

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Display “Signal Info” in the Option menu and check

the input signal format.

If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback

component is properly connected to this unit (or a

proper input source is selected).

If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format

cannot be reproduced by this unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

“Audio Output” in “HDMI” is set to

“TV”.

Set “Audio Output” (Function Setup → HDMI →

Audio Output) to the other setting.

A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the Option menu and set “Decoder Mode” to

“Auto”.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When a monaural source sound field

program is applied, sound of all channels

are output from the center speaker for

some surround decoders.

Try another sound field program. 26

The playback component or speakers are

not connected properly.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

12, 15

No sound is output

from a specific

speaker.

Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel

display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off,

try the following.

1) Change the input source to another one.

2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not

output from that speaker. Select another sound field

program.

3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on

this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup”

menu and enables output of that speaker.

6, 23, 26,

The volume of that speaker is set to

minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the

“Setup” menu.

Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and

adjust the volume (Manual Setup → Speaker Level).

This unit is in the straight decode mode. Press OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT) to turn

off the straight decode mode.

Sound may not be output from certain

channels depending on input sources or

sound field programs.

Try another sound field program. 26

The speaker is malfunction. Check the speaker indicators on the front panel

display. If the corresponding indicator lights up,

connect another speaker and check if sound is output.

If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

69 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front” and a

Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signals is

being played.

Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Subwoofer” or “Both”. 57

“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Subwoofer” or

“Front” and a 2-channel source is being

played.

Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Both”. 57

The source does not contain low

frequency signals.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“Extended Surround” in the Option menu

is set to “Off”, or an input signal does not

contain a surround back flag with

“Extended Surround” set to “Auto”.

Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto”. 49

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format.

The connected component is not set to

output the desired digital audio signals.

Set the playback component properly referring to its

operating instructions.

—

Noise/hum noise is

heard.

Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this

unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback

component to this unit by digital connection and play

back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,

the problem may results from the playback

component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback

component.

2) When noise is output during playback or skip

operation

Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option

menu after selecting the input source and set

“Decoder Mode” to “DTS”.

15, 49

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

1/2 jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power of the component. 64

“Memory Guard!” is

displayed and the

setting cannot be

changed.

“Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to

“On”.

Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 61

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to other digital or

radio frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment. —

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

70 En

Troubleshooting

HDMI™

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —

The connected HDMI component does not

support high-bandwidth digital copyright

protection (HDCP).

Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 82

Tuner (FM/AM)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

You are too far from the station

transmitter or the input from the

antenna is weak.

Check the antenna connections. 18

Replace the outdoor antenna with a more

sensitive multi-element antenna.

—

Switch to monaural mode. 49

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or

place it in a different location.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

You are in an area far from a station or

an input from the antenna is weak.

Replace an outdoor antenna with more

sensitive multi element antenna.

—

Tune in manually or by direct frequency

tuning.

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 18

Use the manual tuning method. 30

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Supplied AM loop antenna is not

connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even

if you use an outdoor antenna.

The noises may be caused by lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,

but it can be reduced by installing and

properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —

HD Radio™ Reception (U.S.A. model only)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit cannot

receive the HD Radio

signals of the

selected radio station.

The radio station provides analog FM/AM

radio service only.

Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio

service.

The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position. —

Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna. —

“Audio Mode” in the Option menu is set

to “Mono”.

Set “Audio Mode” to “Auto”. 49

71 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen.

In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

This unit cannot

select other audio

programs than the

main program.

The radio station provides one audio

program only.

HD Radio information

does not appear.

The radio station does not provide the

information.

iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Tag data cannot be

transferred to your

iPod when it is station

in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock (YDS-

10).

“YDS-10” does not support tag file

transfer.

Use “YDS-11” to transfer tag data from this unit to

your iPod.

—

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Insufficient Data Tag data is not saved because of invalid

data.

The selected HR Radio program (or song being

played) does not support the iTunes Tagging feature.

—

Tag Already Stored Tag data for the same content has been

already saved.

Tag Storage full Tag data cannot be stored because the

internal memory of this unit is full.

Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock

(YDS-11) connected to the DOCK terminal of this

unit.

—

iPod full

Tags cannot be stored

Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod

because the HDD space of your iPod is

full.

Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make

room and try again.

—

Transferring Failed Tag data cannot be transferred to your

iPod.

Check if the iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock (YDS-11) properly.

—

Storing Tag Tag data is being stored in the internal

memory of this unit.

Transferring Tag data is being transferred to your iPod.

Tag(s)Sent Tag data has been transferred to your

iPod.

XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM

Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected

to this unit.

Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the

dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

cable is connected to this unit.

72 En

Troubleshooting

CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM

antenna cable has become damaged.

Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the

antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if

the cable is damaged.

LOADING XM The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or

program information from the XM

satellite signal. This message can also

occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note

that this unit may not respond to some

operations while this message is

displayed.

This message should disappear in a few seconds in

good signal conditions. If you see this message often,

reposition the XM antenna to get better signal

reception. Use the “Antenna” information on the front

panel display or XM information on the GUI screen

to check the antenna reception level.

NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the

XM satellite signal. Something may be

blocking the XM antenna’s view of the

satellites or the antenna is not properly

aimed.

Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the

XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the

“Antenna” information on the front panel display or

XM information on the GUI screen to check the

antenna reception level. See instructions supplied

with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna

installation information.

CHANNEL OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not

currently broadcasting.

Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select

another channel.

—

CHANNEL NOT

AUTHORIZED

You may be attempting to tune to an XM

channel that is blocked or that you cannot

receive with your XM subscription

package.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of

channels. For information on receiving this channel,

visit http://www.xmradio.com/ or contact XM

Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346.

—

CHANNEL NOT

AVAILABLE

The selected channel is not available. The

channel may have been reassigned to a

different channel number. This message

may occur initially with a new XM Mini-

Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not

received XM’s signal for an extended

period.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of

channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or an

XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for

an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to

receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes

and then try to select the channel again.

—

UPGRADE XM TUNER This unit has detected a XM CNP1000

which is not compatible with this unit.

If you have connected the XM Mini-Tuner

(CNP2000) and see this message, set this unit to

standby, disconnect and reconnect the XM Mini-

Tuner Home Dock and re-install the Mini-Tuner in

the Home Dock and turn on this unit.

If you continue to see this message with the XM

Mini-Tuner, contact XM Satellite Radio at

http://xmradio.com/ or 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-

967-2346).

If you have an incompatible XM CNP1000, contact

XM for information on upgrading to the XM Mini-

Tuner.

—

- - - - No artist name or song title is available for

this selection.

No action required. —

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

73 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen.

In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the

SiriusConnect tuner properly.

Check the connection of the antenna and

SiriusConnect tuner.

SIRIUS LOADING This unit is communicating with the

SiriusConnect tuner.

The message disappears normally within several tens

of seconds.

—

CHECK SIRIUS

TUNER

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.

Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and

this unit.

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to

the AC wall outlet.

NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit

supports,

ACQUIRING SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the

SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “Antenna” information

on the front panel display or SIRIUS information on

the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level.

UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

channel list.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the

subscription.

F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

firmware.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

CALL 888-539-SIRIUS

TO SUBSCRIBE

The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the

selected channel.

URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

Select another channel. 38

SUBSCRIPTION

UPDATED

The subscription information is updated.

INVALID CHANNEL The selected channel is currently out of

service.

Select another channel. 38

Not Available The operation you made is not available.

74 En

Troubleshooting

Note

• In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and GUI screen, check the connection of your iPod

(page 17).

Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees

offaxis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe

light, etc.) is striking the remote control

sensor of this unit.

Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. —

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9

The remote control ID of the remote

control and this unit do not match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit and the

remote control.

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using “List of

remote control codes” at the end of this manual.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,

do the following.

When the key does not work during DVD disc menu

operation: press the dInput selection keys on

the remote control again.

When the key does not work during Option menu or

Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for

the current menu operation again.

—

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

iPod™

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock

and then place it back in the dock.

Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

Use an iPod supported by this unit. —

iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the

Yamaha iPod universal dock.

75 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha

iPod universal dock.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Bluetooth™

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Searching... The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and

the Bluetooth component are in the

middle of the pairing.

The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and

the Bluetooth component are in the

middle of establishing the connection.

Completed The pairing is completed.

Canceled The pairing is canceled.

BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the

Bluetooth component is established.

Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected

from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver.

Not Found No Bluetooth components are found

during a pairing process.

Pairing must be performed on the both this unit and

your Bluetooth component at the same time. Check

whether your Bluetooth component is set to the

paring mode and then try again.

No Bluetooth components are found

during a Bluetooth connection.

Check whether your Bluetooth component is turned

on and then try again.

Locate your Bluetooth component within 10 meters

(33 feet) of this unit and then try again.

USB

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The music files and

folder cannot be

browsed.

The music files and folders are stored the

locations other than the FAT area.

Place the music files and folders in the FAT area. —

You are attempting to browse directory

hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory

with more than 500 files.

Modify the data structure on your USB storage

device.

—

This unit cannot recognize some

characters used in the file name or folder

name.

Edit the file name or folder name using a PC and then

try again.

—

The USB storage

device cannot be

recognized.

The USB storage device is not compatible

with mass storage class (except USB

HDDs).

Use a USB storage device that is compatible with

mass storage class (except USB HDDs).

—

This unit does not recognize the USB

storage device properly.

Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 19

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

76 En

Troubleshooting

Notes

• If the an error or warning message appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again.

• Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal.

• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.

• If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

USB Connected Your USB storage device is connected. —

Disconnected Your USB storage device has been

disconnected from the USB port of this

unit.

Check the connection between this unit and your

USB storage device.

—

This unit recognizes the USB storage

device as an illegal device.

Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 19

Access Error This unit cannot access your USB storage

device.

Try another USB storage device. —

There is a problem with the signal path

from your USB storage device to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage

device to the USB port of this unit.

18, 19

Try resetting your USB storage device. —

Unable to play The data is invalid. Try another USB storage device. —

Auto Setup (YPAO)

Before Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —

Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 61

During Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not

detected.

Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11

E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround

channels are detected.

Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11

E-3:NO PRNS SP Only signals from one of the presence L/

R channels are detected.

Check the presence L/R speaker connections. 11

E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal

is detected.

If you connect only one surround back speaker,

connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.

E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed

accurately due to loud ambient noise.

Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. —

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the optimizer

microphone.

—

E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

When using surround back speakers, you need to

connect surround L/R speakers.

77 En

Troubleshooting

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was

unplugged during the “Auto Setup”

procedure.

Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto

Setup”.

E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not

detect test tones.

Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 20

Check whether the speakers are properly placed and

connected.

10, 11

The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC

jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha

dealer or service center.

—

E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was canceled due to an

inappropriate user operation.

Run “Auto Setup” again. 20

E-10:INTERNAL

ERROR

An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 20

After Auto Setup

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker.

If they are correct, the speakers work properly even

when this message is displayed.

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around

the listening position.

—

W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all

speakers are placed in a similar environment.

—

Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 12

We recommended that you use speakers with the

same or similar specifications.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. —

W-4:CHECK PRNS Presence speakers were not detected

during measurement with “Extra Speaker

Assignment” set to “Presence”.

Check the presence speaker connections and perform

measurement again. If presence speakers are not

connected, set the “Extra Speaker Assignment” to

other than “Presence”.

11, 57

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

78 En

■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term

that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and

video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user

adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and

video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this

synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.

■ Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.

One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker

while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section.

With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted

frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a

much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the

sound in some way.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated

into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the

chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this

system because each of these signals is independent. The component

signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with

component input jacks is required in order to output component

signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed

of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and

synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component

transmits these three elements combined.

■ Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up

from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification.

This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from

millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color

banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between

colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more

shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases

the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the

RGB or YCbCr color space.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you

completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels

(front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital

provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel

especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the

system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By

using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate

moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible

than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum

to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-

channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-

channel sources.

For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie

sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic

moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-

around” effects.

■ Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for

high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,

and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray

Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete

channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital

Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus

also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio

systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast

numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology

enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right

channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels

instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music

sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.

There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,

“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and

“Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser

discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround

uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and

dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a

center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for

special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder

built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance

moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed

for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected

as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology

delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering

a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8

discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of

Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range

control.

Glossary

79 En

Glossary

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on

digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals

are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of

2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to

reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization

of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality

can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal

audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the

dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD

signals input from the HDMI jack.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-

channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with

all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to

the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion

video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD

video.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks

of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly

gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has

developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of

sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in

your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel

sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right,

and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This

unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel

reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-

channel format.

■ DTS Express

This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-

ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming.

In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio,

enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the

Internet while playing the main program.

■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including

Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,

this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from

the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96

kHz audio simultaneously.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with

the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■ DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray

Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio

master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD

Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz

audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed

for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,

DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■ FLAC

This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is

inferior to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides

higher audio quality.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-

supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing

an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver)

and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI

supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-

channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC

HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with

bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and

requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface

that meets the security requirements of content providers and system

operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website

at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range

of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as

0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the

full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Neural Surround

Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround

technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital

radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround

sound. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain

processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with

superior channel separation and localization of audio elements.

System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround

playback.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel

playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal

playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is

digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression.

This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM

system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the

analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the

signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while

the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric

value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that

can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while

the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is

determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher

the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be

played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more

finely the sound level can be reproduced.

80 En

Glossary

■ “x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more

extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors

that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color

space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is

particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.

81 En

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Elements of a sound field

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable

us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed

for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having

many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound

heard.

Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP

provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening

room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field

technology combined with various digital audio systems.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the

information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate

height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate

and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening

room.

■ SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm

for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each

sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows

you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any

surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even

possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

■ Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your

listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a

compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss

of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of

low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance

of the overall sound system.

Sound field program information

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberations taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening

environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those

of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually

any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will

is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound

field processor.

82 En

■ HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio

commentaries mixed down by using the following connections:

– multi-channel analog audio input (page 16)

– digital input (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.

Notes

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals

directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD

DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• 480i/60 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD

Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

83 En

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 120 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω.................................140/175/205/250 W

• Dynamic Headroom

8 Ω ...................................................................................... 1.25 dB

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO ................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

AV5, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD).................................. 60 mV or more

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.0 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

AUDIO OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT....................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front Speaker: Small)

.................................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE2 OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 100 mV/470 Ω

• Frequency Response

AV5 to FRONT.................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO ..........................................................................0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to AUDIO OUT

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ........................................... 0.02% or less

AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)................................. 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT)

.............................................................................. 86 dB or more

AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)

............................................................................ 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front Speakers ......................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (Input Shorted) ................................60 dB/55 dB or more

AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) .........................60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control...................................... Mute / –80 dB to +16.5 dB

• Tone Control (Front Speakers)

Bass Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz

Bass Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut................................................. ±10 dB at 20 kHz

Treble Turnover Frequency................................................. 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small)

..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer).......................................................... 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type (Gray Back) ............................................... NTSC

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)............................NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component ........................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion: Off)

............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]

Component (Video Conversion: Off)

.................................................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range ...................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono ...................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo................................................................74 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo......................................................................0.3/0.3%

• Antenna Input (unbalanced)....................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ......................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz

GENERAL

• Power Supply ..........................................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz

• Power Consumption ................................................... 400 W/500 VA

• Standby Power Consumption

(HDMI Control: Off, Standby Through: Off) ............ 0.2 W or less

(HDMI Control: On, Standby Through: On)

No Repeat................................................................ 1.2 W or less

Repeat......................................................................... 3 W or less

• Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 171 x 365 mm

(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 14-3/8 in)

• Weight .................................................................... 11.1 kg (24.5 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications

84 En

■ Numerics

2ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 27

3D DSP, sound field parameter ..................... 51

5.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10

6.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10

7.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10

7ch Enhancer, sound field program ............... 28

7ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 28

■ A

Action Game, sound field program ............... 27

Adaptive DRC, Volume, Function Setup ...... 60

Adjusting high frequency sound .................... 24

Adjusting low frequency sound ..................... 24

Advanced setup .............................................. 65

Adventure, sound field program .................... 26

All Channel Search mode,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 39

All Channel Search mode,

XM Satellite Radio ................................... 35

AM antenna connection ................................. 18

AM tuning ..................................................... 30

Analog audio jack .......................................... 13

ANTENNA terminal, rear panel ...................... 5

Aspect, HDMI, Function Setup ..................... 60

AUDIO 1/2 jack, rear panel ............................. 5

Audio and video player connection ............... 15

Audio jack ..................................................... 13

AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack,

front panel ................................................... 4

Audio Mode, Option menu ............................ 49

AUDIO OUT jack, rear panel .......................... 5

Audio Output, HDMI, Function Setup .......... 59

Audio player connection ................................ 16

Auto Delay, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............... 59

Auto Preset, Option menu ............................. 49

Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ........... 76

Auto Setup, Speaker Setup ............................ 56

Automatic setup ............................................. 20

AV 1-6 jack, rear panel .................................... 5

AV OUT jack, rear panel ................................. 5

■ B

Basic operation, Setup menu ......................... 56

Bass Crossover Frequency, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 58

BI AMP, advanced setup ............................... 65

Bi-amplification connection .......................... 12

Bluetooth component playback ..................... 45

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

connection ................................................. 17

Bluetooth, troubleshooting ............................ 75

■ C

Category Search mode,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 39

Category Search mode,

XM Satellite Radio ................................... 35

Cellar Club, sound field program .................. 27

Center Image, decoder parameter .................. 54

Center Level, sound field parameter .............. 53

Center speaker ............................................... 10

Center Speaker, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 57

Center Width, decoder parameter .................. 54

Chamber, sound field program ...................... 27

Changing information on the front panel

display ....................................................... 25

CINEMA DSP 3D ......................................... 29

CINEMA DSP 3D indicator,

front panel display ...................................... 6

CINEMA DSP indicator,

front panel display ...................................... 6

Clear Preset, Option menu ............................. 49

COAXIAL jack .............................................. 13

CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7

COMPONENT VIDEO jack ......................... 13

Connect, Option menu ...................................50

Connecting audio and video player ................15

Connecting audio player ................................16

Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver ......................................................17

Connecting external amplifier ........................17

Connecting external decoder ..........................16

Connecting FM antenna .................................18

Connecting iPod universal dock ....................17

Connecting multi-format player .....................16

Connecting power cable .................................19

Connecting projector ......................................14

Connecting set-top box ..................................15

Connecting SiriusConnect tuner ....................38

Connecting speaker ........................................11

Connecting speaker cable ...............................12

Connecting TV monitor .................................14

Connecting USB storage device ....................18

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ......34

Connecting Zone2 ..........................................62

Connections ....................................................10

Controlling other component,

remote control ...........................................64

Controlling Zone2 ..........................................63

Cursor indicator, front panel display ................6

Cursors

// /

k n l h,

remote control .............................................7

■ D

Decode Type, sound field parameter .............53

Decoder Mode, Option menu .........................49

Decoder parameter .........................................54

Dialogue Lift, sound field parameter .............51

Dimension, decoder parameter .......................54

Dimer, Display, Function Setup .....................60

Direct number access,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................39

Direct number access, XM Satellite Radio ....35

Direct, sound field parameter .........................53

Disconnect, Option menu ...............................50

DISPLAY, remote control ...............................7

Displaying HD Radio information .................33

Displaying input signal information ..............25

Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information ................................................42

Displaying XM Satellite Radio

information ................................................37

DOCK terminal, rear panel ..............................5

Drama, sound field program ..........................27

DSP Level, sound field parameter .................51

DSP Parameter, Setup menu ..........................61

Dynamic Range, Sound Setup .......................58

■ E

Editing sound field program ..........................51

Editing surround decoder ...............................51

Effect Level, sound field parameter ...............54

ENTER, remote control ...................................7

EQ Type Select, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ............................................58

Equalizer, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .......58

Extended Surround, Option menu ..................49

External amplifier connection ........................17

External component operation key ,

remote control .............................................7

External decoder connection ..........................16

Extra Speaker Assignment, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ............................................57

■ F

FIRM UPDATE, advanced setup ...................65

Firmware update ............................................65

FM antenna connection ..................................18

FM tuning .......................................................30

FM/AM (CATEGORY

l h),

front panel ...................................................4

Frequency tuning ............................................30

Front left speaker ...........................................10

Front panel ....................................................... 4

Front panel display .......................................... 6

Front Panel Display Scroll, Display,

Function Setup .......................................... 60

Front panel display, front panel ....................... 4

Front right speaker ......................................... 10

Front Speaker, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 57

Function Setup, Setup menu .......................... 59

■ G

GEQ, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .............. 58

GUI Position, Display, Function Setup ......... 60

■ H

Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 27

Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 27

HD indicator, front panel display .................... 6

HD Radio ....................................................... 32

HD Radio key, remote control ......................... 7

HD Radio reception, troubleshooting ............ 70

HDMI Auto Lipsync, Lipsync,

Sound Setup .............................................. 59

HDMI control ................................................ 47

HDMI Control, HDMI, Function Setup ........ 59

HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6

HDMI information ......................................... 82

HDMI jack ..................................................... 13

HDMI OUT/HDMI IN 1-4 jack, rear panel ..... 5

HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4

HDMI, Function Setup .................................. 59

HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 70

Headphones, use ............................................ 25

Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 24

High frequency sound adjustment ................. 24

■ I

INFO, front panel ............................................ 4

INFO, remote control ...................................... 7

INIT, advanced setup ..................................... 65

Initial Delay, sound field parameter .............. 52

Initial Volume, Volume, Function Setup ....... 60

Input Rename, Function Setup ...................... 61

Input selection key, remote control ................. 7

INPUT selector, front panel ............................. 4

Input signal information display .................... 25

Input source registration, SCENE function ... 24

Installing batteries, remote control .................. 9

iPod playback ................................................ 43

iPod universal dock connection ..................... 17

iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 74

iTunes Tagging, HD Radio ............................ 32

iTunes Tagging, troubleshooting ................... 71

■ L

LFE / Bass Out, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 57

Lipsync, Sound Setup .................................... 59

Liveness, sound field parameter .................... 52

■ M

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4

MAIN/ZONE2, remote control ....................... 7

Manual Delay, Lipsync, Sound Setup ........... 59

Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................ 56

Max Volume, Volume, Function Setup ......... 60

Memory Guard, Setup menu ......................... 61

MEMORY, front panel .................................... 4

MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 65

MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel .................... 5

Mono Movie, sound field program ................ 27

Movie, sound field program .......................... 26

MULTI CH INPUT jack, rear panel ................ 5

Multi information display,

front panel display ...................................... 6

Multi-format player connection ..................... 16

Multi-zone configuration ............................... 62

Index

85 En

English

INTRODUCTION

APPENDIX

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Music Video, sound field program .................27

MUTE indicator, front panel display ...............6

MUTE, remote control .....................................7

■ N

Neo:6 Cinema, decoder ..................................28

Neo:6 Music, decoder ....................................28

Neural Sur., decoder .......................................28

Numeric key, remote control ............................7

■ O

ON SCREEN, remote control ..........................7

OPTICAL jack ...............................................13

OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel .................4

Option menu ...................................................48

OPTION, remote control ..................................7

■ P

P. Initial Delay, sound field parameter ...........52

P. Liveness, sound field parameter ................52

P. Room Size, sound field parameter .............52

Pairing Bluetooth components .......................45

Pairing, Option menu .....................................50

Panorama, decoder parameter ........................54

Parental Lock, Option menu ..........................49

PHONES jack, front panel ...............................4

PHONO jack, rear panel ..................................5

Placing speaker ...............................................10

PLII Game, decoder .......................................28

PLII Movie, decoder ......................................28

PLII Music, decoder .......................................28

PLIIx Game, decoder .....................................28

PLIIx Movie, decoder ....................................28

PLIIx Music, decoder .....................................28

Power cable connection ..................................19

Power cable, rear panel ....................................5

POWER, remote control ..................................7

PRE OUT jack, rear panel ................................5

Presence L Level, sound field parameter .......53

Presence left speaker ......................................11

Presence R Level, sound field parameter .......53

Presence right speaker ....................................11

PRESET

l h, front panel .........................4

Preset Search mode,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................40

Preset Search mode, XM Satellite Radio .......36

Preset tuning ...................................................30

Pro Logic, decoder .........................................28

PROGRAM selector, front panel .....................4

Projector connection .......................................14

PURE DIRECT, front panel .............................4

■ R

Rear panel .........................................................5

Receiving remote control signal .....................17

Registering input source, SCENE function ....24

Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel ......................................................40

Registering sound field program, SCENE

function ......................................................24

Registering XM Satellite Radio channel ........36

Remote control .................................................7

Remote control code resetting ........................64

Remote control code setting ...........................64

Remote control ID setting ..............................65

Remote control signal transmitter,

remote control .............................................7

Remote control,

controlling other component .....................64

Remote control, preparation .............................9

Remote control, troubleshooting ....................74

Remote control, use ..........................................9

REMOTE ID, advanced setup ........................65

REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel .................5

Repeat playback, iPod ....................................44

Repeat playback, USB storage device ...........46

Repeat, Option menu ......................................50

Resetting remote control code ........................64

Resolution, HDMI, Function Setup ...............59

RETURN, remote control ................................ 7

Reverb Delay, sound field parameter ............ 53

Reverb Level, sound field parameter ............. 53

Reverb Time, sound field parameter ............. 53

Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 27

Room Size, sound field parameter ................. 52

■ S

SCENE function ............................................ 23

SCENE IR, advanced setup ........................... 65

SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4

SCENE, remote control ................................... 7

Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 26

Selecting a source on GUI screen .................. 24

Selecting SCENE ........................................... 23

Setting Parental Lock,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 41

Setting remote control code ........................... 64

Setting remote control ID .............................. 65

Setup menu .................................................... 55

Setup menu basic operation ........................... 56

Shuffle playback, iPod ................................... 44

Shuffle playback, USB storage device .......... 46

Shuffle, Option menu ..................................... 50

Signal Info, Option menu .............................. 49

SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 29

SIRIUS indicator, front panel display ............. 6

SIRIUS jack, rear panel ................................... 5

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ....................... 38

SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting .......73

SLEEP indicator, front panel display ..............6

Sleep timer ..................................................... 47

SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7

Sound field parameter .................................... 51

Sound field program editing .......................... 51

Sound field program registration,

SCENE function ....................................... 24

Sound selection keys, remote control .............. 7

Sound Setup, Setup menu .............................. 58

SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7

SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 65

Speaker cable connection .............................. 12

Speaker Configuration, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 56

Speaker connection ........................................ 11

Speaker Distance, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 58

Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6

Speaker layout ............................................... 10

Speaker Level, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 58

Speaker placement ......................................... 10

Speaker Setup, Setup menu ........................... 56

SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5

Specifications ................................................. 83

Spectacle, sound field program ...................... 26

Sports, sound field program ........................... 27

SR PIN, advanced setup ................................ 65

Standby Through, HDMI, Function Setup .... 59

Staright decode mode .................................... 29

Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 28

STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4

Subwoofer ...................................................... 10

Subwoofer Phase, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 58

Sur. Back Initial Delay,

sound field parameter ................................ 52

Sur. Back Liveness, sound field parameter ... 52

Sur. Back Room Size,

sound field parameter ................................ 52

Sur. Initial Delay, sound field parameter ....... 52

Sur. Liveness, sound field parameter ............. 52

Sur. Room Size, sound field parameter ......... 52

Surround back left speaker ............................ 10

Surround Back Level,

sound field parameter ................................ 53

Surround back right speaker .......................... 10

Surround back speaker ................................... 10

Surround Back Speaker, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 57

Surround decoder editing ............................... 51

Surround L Level, sound field parameter ...... 53

Surround left speaker .................................... 10

Surround R Level, sound field parameter ..... 53

Surround right speaker .................................. 10

Surround Speaker, Manual Setup,

Speaker Setup ........................................... 57

■ T

TAG indicator, front panel display ................. 6

Test Tone, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..... 58

The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 27

The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ....... 27

Tone control .................................................. 24

TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4

TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7

Transmitting remote control signal ............... 17

TRIGGER OUT jack, rear panel ..................... 5

Tuner (FM/AM), troubleshooting ................. 70

Tuner indicator, front panel display ................ 6

Tuner key, remote control ............................... 7

Tuning, AM ................................................... 30

Tuning, FM .................................................... 30

TUNING/CH

l h, front panel ................ 4

Turning off .................................................... 19

Turning on ..................................................... 19

TV control key, remote control ....................... 7

TV monitor connection ................................. 14

■ U

Updating firmware ........................................ 65

USB port, front panel ...................................... 4

USB storage device connection ..................... 18

USB storage device playback ........................ 46

USB, troubleshooting .................................... 75

■ V

VER, advanced setup .................................... 65

VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ........ 4

VIDEO jack ................................................... 13

Video jack ..................................................... 13

Video Out, Option menu ............................... 50

Video/audio jack ........................................... 13

Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 29

VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 7

VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 4

VOLUME indicator, front panel display ......... 6

Volume Trim, Option menu .......................... 48

Volume, Function Setup ................................ 60

■ X

XM indicator, front panel display ................... 6

XM jack, rear panel ......................................... 5

XM Satellite Radio tuning ............................. 34

XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ............. 71

■ Y

YPAO ............................................................ 20

YPAO, troubleshooting ................................. 76

■ Z

ZONE2 CONTROL, front panel ..................... 4

ZONE2 indicator, front panel display ............. 6

Zone2 Initial Volume, Zone2,

Function Setup .......................................... 61

Zone2 Max Volume, Zone2,

Function Setup .......................................... 61

ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4

ZONE2 OUT jack, rear panel ......................... 5

Zone2, Function Setup .................................. 61

“KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or

“pPOWER” (example)

indicates the name of the parts on

the front panel or the remote

control. Refer to “Part names and

functions” on page 4.

List of remote control codes

A.R. Systems 0274

Acme 0260

Acura 0261, 0273

ADC 0259

Admiral 0100, 0224, 0257,

0258, 0259, 0264,

0265

Advent 0204

Adventura 0107

Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328

Agashi 0327, 0328

Agazi 0259

Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Aim 0274

Aiwa 0028, 0297

Akai 0063, 0096, 0101,

0205, 0231, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Akiba 0262, 0274

Akura 0259, 0262, 0273,

0274

Alaron 0327

Alba 0243, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0266, 0269,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0294, 0300, 0327

Albatron 0222

Alcyon 0249

Alleron 0105

Allorgan 0328

Allstar 0268, 0274

America Action

0225

AMOi 0326

Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275,

0328

Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262,

0273, 0274

Amtron 0104

Anam 0225, 0261

Anam National

0102, 0104

Anglo 0261, 0273

Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261,

0273, 0274

Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261,

0263, 0273, 0274

AOC 0072, 0090, 0096,

0103

Apex 0061, 0117, 0139

Arcam 0327, 0328

Arcam Delta 0260

Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274

Arthur Martin 0275

ASA 0257, 0265

Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274

Astra 0261

Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262,

0327, 0328

Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327

Atori 0261, 0273

Auchan 0275

Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328

Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225

Ausind 0249

Autovox 0249, 0257, 0259,

0260, 0328

Aventura 0097

Awa 0327, 0328

Axion 0206

Baird 0328

Bang & Olufsen

0230, 0257

Basic Line 0261, 0262, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0328

Bastide 0260, 0328

Baur 0271, 0274

Bazin 0328

Beko 0243, 0269, 0274,

0282, 0351, 0357,

0372, 0380

Belcor 0090

Bell & Howell

0065, 0100

Benq 0051, 0160, 0315

Beon 0268, 0271, 0274

Best 0243

Bestar 0243, 0268, 0274

Binatone 0260, 0328

Blue Sky 0262, 0274

Blue Star 0270

Boots 0260, 0328

BPL 0270, 0274

Bradford 0104, 0225

Brandt 0267, 0272

Brillian 0228

Brinkmann 0274

Brionvega 0257, 0268, 0271,

0274

Britannia 0260, 0327, 0328

Brockwood 0090

Broksonic 0063, 0225

Bruns 0257

BTC 0262

Bush 0261, 0262, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0270,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0282, 0286, 0294,

0300, 0328, 0329,

0351, 0388, 0394,

0413

Candle 0072, 0090, 0096,

0107

Capsonic 0259

Carena 0274

Carnivale 0096

Carrefour 0266

Carver 0088

Cascade 0261, 0273, 0274

Casio 0317

Cathay 0268, 0271, 0274

CCE 0229, 0328

Celebrity 0057, 0101

Celera 0117

Centurion 0268, 0271, 0274

Century 0257

CGE 0243, 0249

Changhong 0117

Chimei 0323

Cimline 0261, 0273

Citizen 0072, 0085, 0090,

0096, 0104

City 0261, 0273

Clarion 0225

Clarivox 0271

Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259,

0260, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0269, 0273,

0274, 0328

CMS 0327

CMS Hightec 0328

Coby 0151

Colortyme 0072, 0090

Commercial Solutions

0071

Concerto 0072, 0090

Concorde 0261, 0273

Condor 0243, 0260, 0268,

0269, 0273, 0274,

0327

Contec 0225, 0260, 0261,

0266, 0273, 0327

Contec/Cony 0094, 0104

Continental Edison

0267

Cosmel 0261, 0273

Craig 0104, 0225

Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249,

0257

Crown 0104, 0225, 0243,

0249, 0261, 0268,

0269, 0271, 0273,

0274

CS Electronics

0260, 0262, 0327

CTC Clatronic

0263

CTX 0159

Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072,

0085, 0088, 0090,

0096, 0099, 0224

CXC 0104, 0225

Cybertron 0262

Cytron 0202

Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090,

0103, 0119, 0245,

0260, 0261, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0281,

0285, 0303, 0321,

0327, 0328, 0344,

0361, 0387

Dainichi 0262, 0327

Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327, 0328

Dantax 0243, 0271

Dawa 0274

Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090,

0261, 0273

De Graaf 0264

Decca 0260, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

Dell 0167, 0195

Denver 0308, 0312

Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274

Diamant 0274

Diamond 0327

DiamondVision

0213, 0221

Dimensia 0099

Disney 0137

Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328

Dream Vision 0415, 0416

DTS 0261, 0273

Dual 0260, 0274, 0328

Dual-Tec 0260, 0261

Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108,

0257, 0260, 0263,

0328

Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133,

0225

Dux 0271

Dwin 0224

Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274

Dynex 0181, 0182

Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274,

0328

Elcit 0257

Electa 0270

ELECTRO TECH

0261

Electroband 0057, 0101

Electrograph 0226

Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101,

0102

Element 0180

Elin 0260, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0327

Elite 0262, 0268, 0274

Elman 0263

Elta 0261, 0273, 0327

Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077,

0082, 0085, 0090,

0094, 0095, 0097,

0104, 0105, 0119,

0225, 0243, 0257,

0274

Emprex 0200

Envision 0072, 0090, 0096

Epson 0156, 0201, 0309

Erres 0268, 0271, 0274

ESA 0097

ESC 0328

Etron 0261

Eurofeel 0328

Euro-Feel 0259

Euroline 0271

Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328

Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268,

0274

Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268,

0274, 0327, 0328

Expert 0275

Exquisit 0274

Fenner 0261, 0273

Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272

Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274,

0327

Filsai 0328

Finlandia 0264

Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260,

0263, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268

Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257,

0260, 0266, 0269,

0328

Flint 0268, 0274

Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258,

0260, 0271, 0327

Formenti/Phoenix

0327

Fortress 0257, 0258

Fraba 0243, 0274

Friac 0243

Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264,

0265, 0273, 0328

Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,

0105, 0328

Fujitsu General

0328

Fujitsu Siemens

0425, 0426, 0427,

0428, 0429

Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,

0036, 0037, 0097,

0104, 0105, 0225,

0259

Futuretech 0104, 0225

Galaxi 0269, 0274

Galaxis 0243, 0274

Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227

GBC 0261, 0266, 0273

GE 0069, 0071, 0072,

0073, 0077, 0090,

0099, 0102, 0106,

0112, 0131

Geant Casino 0275

GEC 0260, 0265, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273

General Technic

0261, 0273

Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268,

0274

GFM 0177, 0210

Giant 0328

Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096,

0108

GoldHand 0327

Goldline 0274

GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085,

0090, 0094, 0096,

0103, 0243, 0260,

0261, 0264, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0322,

0328, 0395, 0399,

0412

Gorenje 0243, 0269

GPM 0262

GPX 0211

Gradiente 0162

Graetz 0265

Granada 0249, 0260, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0275, 0328

Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270,

0271

Gronic 0328

Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249,

0274, 0356

Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225

Haier 0187, 0207

Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327,

0328

Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090

Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328

Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260,

0261, 0266, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0328

Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274

Hantor 0274

Harman/Kardon

0088

Harvard 0104, 0225

Harwood 0273, 0274

Havermy 0224

HCM 0259, 0260, 0261,

0270, 0273, 0274,

0328

Hema 0273, 0328

Hewlett Packard

0146

Higashi 0327

HiLine 0274

Hinari 0261, 0262, 0266,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274

Hisawa 0262, 0270, 0275

Hisense 0165

Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,

0016, 0042, 0072,

0090, 0094, 0173,

0254, 0255, 0256,

0260, 0264, 0265,

0266, 0274, 0285,

0300, 0319, 0328,

0348, 0349, 0385,

0402, 0410

Hornyphon 0268, 0274

Hoshai 0262

Huanyu 0260, 0327

Hygashi 0260, 0327, 0328

Hyper 0260, 0261, 0273,

0327, 0328

Hypson 0259, 0260, 0268,

0270, 0271, 0274,

0275, 0328

Hyundai 0223

Iberia 0274

ICE 0259, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

ICeS 0327

Ilo 0198, 0203

IMA 0104

Imperial 0243, 0249, 0265,

0268, 0269, 0274

Indiana 0268, 0271, 0274

Infinity 0088

InFocus 0168, 0277, 0313,

0397, 0430

Ingelen 0265

Ingersol 0261, 0273

Initial 0203

Inno Hit 0249, 0260, 0261,

0262, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328

Innovation 0259, 0261

Insignia 0182, 0188, 0190,

0209

Inteq 0076

Interactive 0243

Interbuy 0261, 0273

Interfunk 0243, 0257, 0265,

0268, 0271, 0274

International 0327

Intervision 0243, 0259, 0260,

0263, 0274, 0328

Irradio 0249, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274

Isukai 0262, 0274

ITC 0260, 0328

ITS 0262, 0268, 0270,

0274, 0327

ITT 0261, 0265

ITV 0261, 0271, 0274

Janeil 0107

JBL 0088

JC Penney 0072, 0073, 0085,

0090, 0099, 0103,

0106

JCB 0057, 0101

Jensen 0072, 0090

JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,

0092, 0093, 0094,

0106, 0251, 0252,

0266, 0268, 0293,

0360, 0379

Kaisui 0260, 0261, 0262,

0270, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Kamosonic 0260

Kamp 0260, 0327

Kapsch 0265

Karcher 0243, 0260, 0261,

0271, 0274

Kawasho 0072, 0090, 0101,

0327

KEC 0225

Kendo 0243, 0263, 0264,

0274

Kenwood 0072, 0090, 0096

KIC 0328

Kingsley 0260, 0327

KLH 0117

Kloss Novabeam

0104, 0107

Kneissel 0243, 0250, 0274

Kolster 0268, 0274

Konka 0262

Korpel 0268, 0271, 0274

Korting 0243, 0257

Kosmos 0274

Koyoda 0261

KTV 0085, 0096, 0104,

0225, 0229, 0260,

0328

Kyoto 0327, 0328

Lasat 0243

Lenco 0261, 0273

Lenoir 0260, 0261, 0273

Leyco 0259, 0268, 0271,

0274

LG 0016, 0038, 0039,

0077, 0103, 0145,

0222, 0243, 0246,

0253, 0260, 0261,

0264, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0282,

0290, 0299, 0316,

0327, 0328, 0351,

0359, 0367, 0382,

0384, 0389, 0396

LG/GoldStar 0246

Liesenk 0271

Liesenkotter 0274

Life 0259, 0261

Lifetec 0259, 0261, 0273,

0274

Lloyds 0273

Loewe 0243, 0250, 0274,

0280, 0306, 0347

Loewe Opta 0257, 0268, 0271

Logik 0100

Luma 0264, 0271, 0273,

0274

Lumatron 0264, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0328

Lux May 0268

Luxman 0072, 0090

Luxor 0260, 0264, 0328

LXI 0061, 0065, 0071,

0072, 0073, 0077,

0088, 0099

M Electronic 0260, 0261, 0265,

0267, 0268, 0271

MAG 0050

Magnadyne 0257, 0263, 0271

Magnafon 0249, 0260, 0263,

0327

Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090,

0091, 0095, 0096,

0098, 0114, 0115,

0129, 0134, 0176,

0178, 0189, 0210

Magnum 0259, 0261

Majestic 0100

Mandor 0259

Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090,

0096, 0158, 0268,

0271, 0274

Marelli 0257

Mark 0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Masuda 0328

Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264,

0266, 0268, 0271,

0273, 0274, 0328,

0405

Matsushita 0067

Maxent 0193, 0226

Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274

Medion 0259, 0261, 0274

Megapower 0222

Megatron 0072, 0077

MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Melvox 0275

Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077,

0100, 0103, 0133,

0219, 0261, 0273

Memphis 0261, 0273

Mercury 0273, 0274

Metz 0257

MGA 0072, 0077, 0090,

0096, 0103

Micromaxx 0259, 0261

Microstar 0259, 0261

Midland 0069, 0071, 0073,

0076, 0085, 0106,

0108

Minerva 0249

Minoka 0268, 0274

Mintek 0203

Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,

0048, 0072, 0077,

0090, 0103, 0196,

0224, 0257, 0266,

0268, 0274, 0298,

0371

Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250,

0260, 0327, 0328

Monivision 0222

Montgomery Ward

0100

Motion 0249

Motorola 0102, 0224

MTC 0072, 0090, 0096,

0103, 0243, 0327

Multi System 0271

Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229,

0243, 0260, 0261,

0263, 0264, 0266,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Murphy 0260, 0327

NAD 0061, 0072, 0077

Naonis 0264

NEC 0026, 0053, 0072,

0090, 0096, 0102,

0103, 0266, 0328

iii

Neckermann 0243, 0257, 0260,

0264, 0268, 0269,

0271, 0274, 0328

NEI 0268, 0271, 0274

Net-TV 0226

Neufunk 0273, 0274

New Tech 0261, 0268

New World 0262

NewTech 0273, 0274, 0328

Nicamagic 0260, 0327

Nikkai 0259, 0260, 0262,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0327, 0328

Nikko 0072, 0077, 0096

Nobliko 0249, 0260, 0263,

0327

Nokia 0265

Norcent 0155

Nordic 0328

Nordmende 0257, 0265, 0267,

0268

Nordvision 0271

Novatronic 0274

Oceanic 0265, 0275

Okano 0243, 0269, 0274

Olevia 0052, 0140, 0149,

0154, 0157

ONCEAS 0260

Onwa 0104, 0225

Opera 0274

Oppo 0208

Optimus 0065, 0067

Optoma 0194

Optonica 0224

Orbit 0268, 0274

Orion 0121, 0192, 0261,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0282, 0329

Orline 0274

Osaki 0259, 0260, 0262,

0274, 0328

Oso 0262

Otto Versand 0258, 0260, 0266,

0268, 0270, 0271,

0274, 0328

Pael 0260, 0327

Palladium 0243, 0260, 0269,

0274, 0328

Palsonic 0328

Panama 0259, 0260, 0261,

0273, 0274, 0327,

0328

Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0066,

0067, 0068, 0069,

0070, 0102, 0106,

0113, 0147, 0215,

0241, 0265, 0274,

0279, 0310, 0332,

0334, 0368, 0374

Panavision 0274

Pathe Cinema 0243, 0250, 0260,

0275, 0327

Pausa 0261, 0273

Penney 0061, 0069, 0071,

0077, 0096

Perdio 0274, 0327

Perfekt 0274

Philco 0072, 0088, 0090,

0091, 0094, 0096,

0102, 0103, 0243,

0249, 0257, 0274

Philharmonic 0260, 0328

Philips 0040, 0088, 0089,

0090, 0091, 0094,

0098, 0099, 0102,

0114, 0135, 0143,

0176, 0178, 0189,

0210, 0212, 0232,

0233, 0257, 0260,

0268, 0271, 0274,

0278, 0287, 0301,

0302, 0307, 0311,

0314, 0330, 0331,

0333, 0337, 0338,

0339, 0341, 0343,

0345, 0355, 0363,

0365, 0377, 0378,

0381, 0383, 0406,

0409, 0414

Philips Magnavox

0089, 0114, 0115

Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0327

Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0327

Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096

Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072,

0090, 0243, 0265,

0267, 0268, 0271,

0274, 0408

Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273,

0274

Playsonic 0328

Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184,

0220

Poppy 0261, 0273

Portland 0072, 0085, 0090,

0103

Prandoni-Prince

0249, 0264

Precision 0260, 0328

Prima 0161, 0207, 0261,

0265, 0273

Princeton 0222

Prism 0069, 0106

Profex 0261, 0273

Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274

Proline 0268, 0274

Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099

Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271,

0274, 0327, 0328

Protech 0259, 0260, 0261,

0263, 0268, 0271,

0328

Proton 0072, 0077, 0090,

0094

Protron 0150

PROVIEW 0050, 0164

Provision 0271, 0274

Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108

Pye 0268, 0271, 0274,

0296, 0338

Pymi 0261, 0273

Quandra Vision

0275

Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102,

0106

Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0328

Questa 0266

Radialva 0274

RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077,

0096, 0225, 0274

RadioShack/Realistic

0072, 0085, 0090,

0094, 0099, 0104

Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

Radiomarelli 0257, 0274

Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273,

0274

Rank 0266

RCA 0071, 0072, 0073,

0074, 0075, 0090,

0099, 0102, 0103,

0109, 0120, 0179,

0218

Realistic 0065, 0077, 0096,

0225

Recor 0274

Redstar 0274

Reflex 0274

Revox 0243, 0268, 0271,

0274

Rex 0259, 0264, 0265

RFT 0243, 0250, 0257

Rhapsody 0327

R-Line 0268, 0271, 0274

Roadstar 0259, 0261, 0262,

0273

Robotron 0257

Rowa 0327, 0328

Royal Lux 0243

RTF 0257

Runco 0076, 0096, 0108

Saba 0257, 0265, 0267,

0272, 0376

Saisho 0259, 0260, 0261,

0273, 0328

Salora 0264, 0265

Sambers 0249, 0263

Sampo 0072, 0085, 0090,

0096, 0226

Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,

0032, 0044, 0045,

0046, 0047, 0072,

0077, 0084, 0085,

0086, 0087, 0090,

0094, 0096, 0103,

0118, 0217, 0229,

0235, 0236, 0237,

0243, 0259, 0260,

0261, 0268, 0269,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0284, 0295, 0327,

0328, 0336, 0346,

0390, 0407

Sandra 0260, 0327, 0328

Sansui 0063, 0121, 0268,

0274

Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,

0049, 0065, 0090,

0141, 0191, 0243,

0250, 0260, 0266,

0273, 0291, 0327,

0328, 0370, 0373,

0391

SBR 0271, 0274

Sceptre 0166, 0185

Schaub Lorenz

0265

Schneider 0260, 0262, 0268,

0271, 0274, 0287,

0300, 0328, 0364,

0366

Scotch 0072, 0077

Scott 0072, 0077, 0090,

0094, 0104, 0105,

0199, 0225

Sears 0061, 0065, 0071,

0072, 0073, 0077,

0088, 0090, 0097,

0099, 0105

SEG 0259, 0260, 0263,

0266, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0300, 0327,

0328

SEI 0274

SEI-Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0265

Seleco 0264, 0265, 0266

Sencora 0261, 0273

Sentra 0273

Serino 0327

Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,

0072, 0080, 0081,

0082, 0083, 0085,

0090, 0094, 0110,

0148, 0183, 0216,

0224, 0247, 0248,

0258, 0266, 0288,

0304, 0324, 0325,

0340, 0358, 0362,

0369, 0386, 0392,

0398, 0400, 0401,

0403

Sheng Chia 0224

Shogun 0090

Siarem 0257, 0263, 0274

Sierra 0268, 0274

Siesta 0243

Signature 0100

Silva 0327

Silver 0266

Singer 0257, 0263, 0275

Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0271,

0274

Skantic 0265

Solavox 0265

Sonitron 0243, 0328

Sonoko 0259, 0260, 0261,

0268, 0271, 0273,

0274, 0328

Sonolor 0265, 0275

Sontec 0243, 0268, 0271,

0274

Sony 0041, 0057, 0058,

0059, 0060, 0101,

0116, 0125, 0126,

0127, 0142, 0169,

0170, 0171, 0172,

0174, 0234, 0261,

0266, 0276, 0289,

0292, 0393, 0411

Sound & Vision

0262, 0263

Soundesign 0072, 0077, 0090,

0104, 0105, 0225

Soundwave 0268, 0271, 0274

Squareview 0097

SSS 0090, 0104, 0225

Standard 0260, 0261, 0262,

0268, 0273, 0274,

0328

Starlite 0104, 0225, 0271,

0273, 0274

Stenway 0270

Stern 0264, 0265

Strato 0273, 0274

Stylandia 0328

Sunkai 0261

Sunstar 0273, 0274

Sunwood 0261, 0268, 0273,

0274

Superla 0260, 0327, 0328

Superscan 0095, 0224

SuperTech 0273, 0274, 0327

Supra 0261, 0273

Supre-Macy 0107

Supreme 0057, 0101

Susumu 0262

Sutron 0261, 0273

SVA 0197

Sydney 0260, 0327, 0328

Sylvania 0072, 0088, 0089,

0090, 0091, 0095,

0096, 0097, 0098,

0175, 0177, 0210

Symphonic 0097, 0104, 0108,

0133, 0210, 0225

Syntax 0149

Syntax-Brillian

0149

Sysline 0271

Sytong 0327

Tandy 0224, 0258, 0260,

0262, 0265, 0328

Tashiko 0260, 0264, 0266,

0327, 0328

Tatung 0102, 0227, 0260,

0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

TCM 0259, 0261

Teac 0274, 0328

Tec 0260, 0261, 0273,

0328

Technics 0067, 0069, 0106

TechniSat 0320, 0417, 0418,

0419

Techwood 0069, 0072, 0090,

0106

TEDELEX 0328

Teknika 0072, 0085, 0088,

0090, 0094, 0100,

0103, 0104, 0105,

0225

Teleavia 0267

Telecor 0274, 0328

Telefunken 0267, 0268, 0272,

0274

Telegazi 0274

Telemeister 0274

Telesonic 0274

Telestar 0274

Teletech 0261, 0271, 0273,

0274

Teleton 0260, 0328

Televideon 0327

Televiso 0275

Tensai 0261, 0262, 0268,

0273, 0274, 0328

Tesmet 0268

Tevion 0259, 0261

Texet 0260, 0273, 0327,

0328

Thomson 0238, 0239, 0240,

0260, 0267, 0268,

0272, 0274, 0335

Thorn 0271, 0274

TMK 0072, 0077, 0090

TNCi 0076

Tokai 0268, 0274, 0328

Tokyo 0260, 0327

Tomashi 0270

Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,

0054, 0061, 0062,

0063, 0064, 0065,

0122, 0123, 0124,

0128, 0130, 0132,

0139, 0214, 0244,

0266, 0283, 0305,

0328, 0329, 0342,

0350, 0352, 0353,

0354, 0375, 0404

Totevision 0085

Towada 0265, 0328

Trakton 0328

Trans Continens

0274, 0328

Transtec 0327

Trident 0328

Triumph 0274

Uher 0243, 0249, 0265,

0268, 0274

Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263,

0274, 0327

Unic Line 0274

United 0271

Universum 0243, 0249, 0259,

0268, 0269, 0271,

0274, 0328

Univox 0274

Vector Research

0096

Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268,

0269, 0271, 0274,

0328

Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273,

0274

Victor 0093, 0266, 0268

VIDEOLOGIC

0327

Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327,

0328

VideoSystem 0268, 0274

Videotechnic 0327, 0328

Vidikron 0088

Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090,

0103

Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226,

0318

Viking 0107

Viore 0198

Visiola 0260, 0327

Vision 0268, 0274, 0328

Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160,

0227, 0420, 0421,

0422, 0423, 0424

Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274

Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264,

0265, 0268, 0274

Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328

Wards 0072, 0077, 0088,

0090, 0091, 0096,

0098, 0099, 0100,

0103, 0105

Watson 0268, 0271, 0274

Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327

Waycon 0061

Wega 0257, 0266, 0274

Wegavox 0273

Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274,

0328

Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142

White Westinghouse

0008, 0119, 0260,

0263, 0271, 0274,

0327

Wincom 0055, 0056

Xrypton 0274

Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,

0003, 0004, 0005,

0072, 0090, 0096,

0103

Yamishi 0274, 0328

Yokan 0274

Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260,

0261, 0262, 0268,

0271, 0273, 0274,

0327, 0328

Yorx 0262

Zanussi 0264, 0328

Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078,

0079, 0090, 0100,

0108, 0111

VCR

ABS 1066

Adventura 1023

Adyson 1090

Aiwa 1023, 1072, 1073,

1074

Akai 1071, 1073

Akiba 1079, 1090

Akura 1073, 1079, 1090

Alba 1074, 1075, 1076,

1079, 1090, 1091

Alienware 1066

Ambassador 1076

American High

1022

Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091

Anitech 1079, 1090

Apex 1010

ASA 1077, 1078

Asha 1020

Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078,

1079, 1090

Audio Dynamics

1018

Audiosonic 1091

Audiovox 1021

Baird 1072, 1073, 1075,

1091

Bang & Olufsen

1067

Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076,

1079, 1090, 1091

Baur 1078

Beaumark 1020

Bell & Howell

1019

Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091

Black Panther Line

1075, 1091

Blaupunkt 1078

Bondstec 1076, 1090

Broksonic 1054

Bush 1074, 1075, 1079,

1090, 1091, 1097,

1099, 1109, 1139

Calix 1021

Candle 1020, 1021

Canon 1022

Cathay 1091

Catron 1076

CGE 1072, 1073

Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090

CineVision 1058

Citizen 1020, 1021

Clatronic 1076, 1090

Colortyme 1018

Condor 1075, 1076, 1091

Craig 1020, 1021

Crown 1075, 1076, 1079,

1090, 1091

Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022

Cybernex 1020

CyberPower 1066

Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076,

1091, 1116, 1141

Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091

Dantax 1074

Daytron 1075, 1091

DBX 1018

De Graaf 1078

Decca 1072, 1073, 1078

Dell 1066

Denko 1090

DiamondVision

1050

DigiFusion 1092

DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040,

1059, 1060, 1061,

1065

Dish Network 1064

Dishpro 1064

Dual 1073, 1078, 1091

Dumont 1072, 1078

Durabrand 1032

Dynatech 1023

Echostar 1064

Elbe 1091

Elcatech 1090

Electrohome 1021

Electrophonic 1021

Elsay 1090

Elta 1079, 1090, 1091

Emerson 1021, 1022, 1023,

1070, 1090

ESC 1075, 1091

Etzuko 1079, 1090

Expressvu 1064

Ferguson 1073

Fidelity 1072, 1090

Finlandia 1078

Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078

Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079,

1090

Fisher 1019

Flint 1074

Formenti/Phoenix

1078

Frontech 1076

Fuji 1022

Fujitsu 1072

Funai 1023, 1072

Galaxy 1072

Garrard 1023

Gateway 1066

GBC 1076, 1079

GE 1020, 1022

GEC 1078

Geloso 1079

General 1076

General Technic

1074

GOI 1064

GoldHand 1079, 1090

Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072,

1077

Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076,

1077, 1079, 1090,

1091

Gradiente 1023

Graetz 1073

Granada 1078

Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076,

1077, 1079, 1090,

1091

Grundig 1078, 1079

Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091

Harley Davidson

1023

Harman/Kardon

1018

Harwood 1090

HCM 1079, 1090

Headquarter 1019

Hewlett Packard

1066

Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090,

1091

Hisawa 1074

Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078,

1089, 1108, 1124

HNS 1060

Howard Computers

1066

HP 1066

HTS 1064

Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061

Hughes Network Systems

1038, 1060

Humax 1035, 1060, 1094

Hush 1066

Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090,

1091

iBUYPOWER 1066

Impego 1076

Imperial 1072

Inno Hit 1075, 1076, 1078,

1079, 1090, 1091

Innovation 1074

Instant Replay 1022

Interbuy 1077, 1090

Interfunk 1078

Intervision 1072, 1091

Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090

ITT 1073

ITV 1075, 1077, 1091

JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020,

1021, 1022

JCL 1022

JVC 1011, 1012, 1013,

1014, 1015, 1016,

1017, 1018, 1019,

1028, 1035, 1064,

1073, 1085, 1117,

1130, 1131, 1133,

1134, 1135, 1136

Kaisui 1079, 1090

Karcher 1078

Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076,

1090

Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073

Kodak 1021, 1022

Korpel 1079, 1090

Kyoto 1090

Lenco 1075

Leyco 1079, 1090

LG 1021, 1053, 1072,

1077, 1088, 1100,

1106, 1125, 1143

Lifetec 1074

Linksys 1066

Lloyd’s 1023

Loewe Opta 1077, 1078

Logik 1079, 1090

Lumatron 1075, 1091

Luxor 1090

LXI 1021

M Electronic 1072

Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044,

1070

Magnin 1021

Manesth 1079, 1090

Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022,

1078

Mark 1091

Marta 1021

Matsui 1074, 1077

Matsushita 1022

Media Center PC

1066

Mediator 1078

Medion 1074

MEI 1022

Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023, 1032,

1048, 1069, 1072,

1077

Memphis 1079, 1090

MGN Technology

1020

Micromaxx 1074

Microsoft 1066

Microstar 1074

Migros 1072

Mind 1066

Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078

Motorola 1022

MTC 1020

Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072,

1076, 1078, 1079,

1090

Murphy 1072

NEC 1018, 1019, 1073

Neckermann 1073, 1078

NEI 1078

Nesco 1079, 1090

Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091

Nikko 1021

Niveus Media 1066

Noblex 1020

Nokia 1073, 1091

Nordmende 1073

Northgate 1066

Oceanic 1072, 1073

Okano 1074, 1090, 1091

Olympus 1022

Optimus 1021

Orion 1033, 1069, 1074,

1097, 1139

Orson 1072

Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079,

1090

Otto Versand 1078

Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079,

1090

Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009,

1022, 1026, 1042,

1043, 1068, 1082,

1101, 1126, 1132

Pathe Marconi 1073

Perdio 1072

Philco 1022, 1090

Philips 1022, 1030, 1035,

1038, 1039, 1040,

1044, 1055, 1060,

1078, 1084, 1095,

1096, 1104, 1105,

1111, 1113, 1122,

1124, 1127, 1128,

1129

Philips Magnavox

1030

Phonola 1078

Pilot 1021

Pioneer 1078, 1118

Polaroid 1010, 1049

Portland 1075, 1076, 1091

Prinz 1072

Profex 1079

Proline 1072

Proscan 1065

Prosonic 1074, 1091

Pulsar 1032

Pye 1052, 1078

Quarter 1019

Quartz 1019

Quasar 1022

Quelle 1072, 1078

Radialva 1090

RadioShack 1021

RadioShack/Realistic

1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023

Radiola 1078

Radix 1021

Randex 1021

RCA 1020, 1022, 1025,

1035, 1040, 1047,

1060, 1065

Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021,

1022, 1023

ReplayTV 1041, 1068

Rex 1073

RFT 1076, 1078, 1090

Ricavision 1066

Roadstar 1075, 1077, 1079,

1090, 1091

Royal 1090

Runco 1032

Saba 1073

Saisho 1074, 1079

Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038,

1040, 1046, 1060,

1080, 1107, 1110,

1112, 1121, 1123,

1140, 1142

Samurai 1076, 1090

Sanky 1032

Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069,

1073

Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114

Saville 1091

SBR 1078

Schaub Lorenz

1072, 1073

Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075,

1076, 1077, 1078,

1079, 1090, 1091

Sears 1019, 1021, 1022

SEG 1079, 1090, 1091

SEI-Sinudyne 1078

Seleco 1073

Sentra 1076, 1090

Sentron 1079, 1090

Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057,

1081, 1115, 1137

Shintom 1079, 1090

Shivaki 1077

Shogun 1020

Siemens 1077

Silva 1077

Silver 1091

Singer 1022

Sinudyne 1078

Solavox 1076

Sonic Blue 1041, 1068

Sonneclair 1090

Sonoko 1075, 1091

Sontec 1077

Sony 1000, 1001, 1002,

1003, 1024, 1027,

1036, 1062, 1066,

1083, 1098, 1103,

1138

Stack 1066

Stack 9 1066

Standard 1075, 1091

Stern 1091

STS 1022

Sunkai 1074

Sunstar 1072

Suntronic 1072

Sunwood 1079, 1090

Superscan 1070

Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044,

1052, 1070

Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090

Systemax 1066

Tagar Systems 1066

Taisho 1074

Tandberg 1091

Tandy 1019

Tashiko 1021, 1072

Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078

TCM 1074, 1093, 1120

Teac 1023, 1091

Tec 1076, 1090, 1091

Technics 1022

Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023

Teleavia 1073

Telefunken 1073

Teletech 1090, 1091

Tenosal 1079, 1090

Tensai 1072, 1077, 1079,

1090

Tevion 1074

Thomson 1073, 1087

Thorn 1073

Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037,

1039, 1040, 1060,

1061, 1062

TMK 1020

Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090

Tonsai 1079

Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034,

1051, 1063, 1066,

1073, 1078, 1086,

1099, 1102, 1119,

1144

Totevision 1020, 1021

Touch 1066

Towada 1079, 1090

Towika 1079, 1090

TVA 1076

Uher 1077

UltimateTV 1065

Ultravox 1091

Unitech 1020

United Quick Star

1075, 1091

Universum 1072, 1077, 1078

Vector Research

1018

Video Concepts

1018

Videon 1074

Videosonic 1020

Viewsonic 1066

Voodoo 1066

Wards 1020, 1021, 1022,

1023

Weltblick 1077

XR-1000 1022, 1023

Yamaha 1018, 1019

Yamishi 1079, 1090

Yokan 1079, 1090

Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079,

1090

Zenith 1032

ZT Group 1066

DVD

4Kus 2097

Accurian 2220

Advent 2169, 2201

AEG 2312

Airis 2318

Aiwa 2272

Akai 2170, 2195, 2225,

2227

Akura 2310

Alba 2018, 2232, 2247,

2259, 2264

Alco 2199

Alize 2315

Allegro 2215

Amitech 2312

Amphion MediaWorks

2145

AMW 2145, 2313

Apex 2044, 2045, 2046,

2047, 2076, 2208,

2209

Apple 2163

Arrgo 2216

Asono 2318

Aspire 2140, 2202

Astar 2162

ATACOM 2318

Audiovox 2111, 2199

Avious 2317

Awa 23 13

Axion 2171

Bang & Olufsen

2210

Baze 2317

BBK 2318

Bellagio 2313

Best Buy 2309

Blaupunkt 2209

Blue Parade 2207

Boghe 2300

Brainwave 2312

Brandt 2198, 2238

Broksonic 2192, 2195

Bush 2018, 2060, 2248,

2264, 2301, 2308,

2317, 2350, 2368

California Audio Labs

2197

Cambridge Audio

2304

CAT 2306, 2307

CAVS 2146

Centrum 2307

CGV 2304, 2312

Changhong 2222

Cinetec 2313

CineVision 2191, 2215

Clatronic 2308, 2317

Coby 2077, 2124, 2314

Conia 2301

Continental Edison

2313

Crown 2312

C-Tech 2305

Curtis Mathes 2217

CVG 2299

CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216,

2233, 2258

Cytron 2166

Daenyx 2313

Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280,

2299, 2312, 2313,

2326, 2376

Daewoo International

2313

Dalton 2311

Dansai 2303, 2312

Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313

Dayton 2313

DEC 2308

Decca 2312

Denon 2105, 2147, 2197,

2286

Denver 2288, 2308, 2310,

2314

Denzel 2302

Desay 2159

Diamond 2304, 2305

DiamondVision

2179, 2186

Disney 2078, 2088

DK Digital 2257

Dmtech 2226

Dual 2302

Durabrand 2218

DVX 2305

Easy Home 2309

Eclipse 2304

E-Dem 2318

Electrohome 2312

Elin 2312

Elta 2263, 2312, 2315

Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219

Enterprise 2211

Enzer 2302

Epson 2165

ESA 2219

Finlux 2304, 2312, 2317

Fintec 2299

Fisher 2212

Funai 2219

Gateway 2097

GE 2079, 2206, 2209

Gericom 2269

GFM 2176

Giec 2300

Global Solutions

2305

Global Sphere 2305

Go Video 2135, 2215

Goodmans 2247, 2289, 2298,

2300, 2308, 2330,

2369

GPX 2177

Gradiente 2197

Graetz 2302

Greenhill 2209

Grundig 2271

Grunkel 2312, 2316

GVG 2299

H&B 2308

H_her 2318

Haaz 2304, 2305

Haier 2172

Harman/Kardon

2125, 2213

HiMAX 2309

Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108,

2302, 2309, 2320,

2366

Hiteker 2208

Home Tech Industries

2318

Hyundai 2316

Ilo 2167

Initial 2167, 2209

Innovation 2228

Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219

Integra 2207

Irradio 2103

iSymphony 2164

JBL 2213

JVC 2049, 2050, 2051,

2052, 2053, 2054,

2055, 2056, 2057,

2070, 2242, 2261,

2275, 2276, 2277,

2278, 2339, 2340,

2341, 2342, 2386,

2387, 2389, 2390,

2391

Jwin 2148

Kansai 2314

Kawasaki 2199

Kennex 2312

Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270

KeyPlug 2312

Kiiro 2312

Kingavon 2308

Kiss 2302

KLH 2199, 2209

Koda 2308

Koss 2095, 2198, 2204

KXD 2309

Landel 2221

Lasonic 2214

Lawson 2305

Lecson 2303

Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317

Lenoxx 2203, 2218

LG 2080, 2107, 2115,

2116, 2141, 2188,

2211, 2215, 2237,

2239, 2285, 2293,

2295, 2348, 2370

Life 2228

Lifetec 2228

Limit 2305

Liquid Video 2204

Liteon 2097, 2121, 2220

Loewe 2274

LogicLab 2305

Magnavox 2075, 2096, 2178,

2180, 2196, 2205,

2219, 2308

Magnex 2317

Majestic 2314

Marantz 2282

Marquant 2312

Matsui 2198, 2296

McIntosh 2149

Mecotek 2312

Medion 2228

Memorex 2078, 2184, 2195

MiCO 2300, 2304

Micromaxx 2228

Microsoft 2206

Microstar 2228

Minoka 2312

Minowa 2317

Mintek 2167, 2209

Mitsubishi 2081

Mizuda 2308, 2309

Monyka 2302

Mustek 2232

Mx Onda 2304

Mystral 2316

Naiko 2312

Nesa 2209

Neufunk 2302

Nevir 2312

Next Base 2221

Nexxtech 2161

NU-TEC 2301

Onkyo 2205, 2290

Oopla 2097

Oppo 2150, 2173

Optim 2303

Optimus 2230

Orava 2308

Orbit 2313

Orion 2027, 2060

Oritron 2198, 2204

P&B 2308

Pacific 2305

Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,

2036, 2037, 2038,

2039, 2040, 2041,

2042, 2043, 2074,

2089, 2104, 2108,

2112, 2120, 2131,

2132, 2197, 2205,

2244, 2245, 2246,

2253, 2254, 2255,

2292, 2321, 2324,

2327, 2328, 2329,

2331, 2383, 2388

Parasound 2151

peeKTON 2318

Philips 2026, 2061, 2062,

2075, 2090, 2094,

2096, 2097, 2103,

2110, 2126, 2180,

2193, 2205, 2231,

2235, 2241, 2251,

2252, 2256, 2260,

2268, 2282, 2332,

2333, 2343, 2344,

2345, 2367, 2371,

2373, 2380, 2382,

2385

Phonotrend 2317

Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014,

2063, 2064, 2065,

2066, 2067, 2113,

2134, 2207, 2230,

2236, 2265, 2266,

2267, 2297, 2322,

2351, 2352, 2353,

2354, 2355, 2356,

2357, 2358, 2359,

2377

Pointer 2312

Polaroid 2047, 2133, 2185

Portland 2312

Powerpoint 2313

Prima 2174

Proceed 2208

Proscan 2206

Prosonic 2299, 2314

Protron 2152

Provision 2308

Pye 2194

Qwestar 2198

Raite 2302

RCA 2058, 2059, 2071,

2079, 2183, 2199,

2206, 2207, 2209

RedStar 2310, 2312, 2314

Regent 2203

Reoc 2305

Rimax 2315

Rio 2215

Roadstar 2281, 2308

Ronin 2313

Rotel 2153

Rowa 2200, 2301

Rownsonic 2307

Saba 2198, 2238

Sabaki 2305

Saivod 2312

Sampo 2223

Samsung 2031, 2032, 2033,

2034, 2035, 2082,

2127, 2137, 2138,

2154, 2182, 2197,

2283, 2319, 2325,

2346, 2347, 2349,

2372, 2381

Sansui 2027, 2195, 2304,

2305, 2312

Sanyo 2139, 2195, 2212,

2374

ScanMagic 2232

Schaub Lorenz

2312

Schneider 2226

Scientific Labs

2305

Scott 2243, 2311

Seeltech 2318

SEG 2240, 2302, 2305,

2313

Sharp 2009, 2010, 2084,

2122, 2142, 2143,

2144, 2181, 2190,

2228, 2262, 2375

Shinsonic 2167

Sigmatek 2309, 2318

Silva 2310

Singer 2304, 2305

Skymaster 2279, 2305

vii

Skyworth 2310

Slim Art 2312

SM Electronic 2305

Sonic Blue 2215

Sontech 2316

Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,

2020, 2021, 2022,

2023, 2024, 2025,

2069, 2072, 2073,

2085, 2086, 2087,

2091, 2092, 2093,

2102, 2128, 2129,

2130, 2249, 2250,

2323, 2334, 2335,

2336, 2360, 2361,

2362, 2363, 2364,

2365, 2384

Soundmaster 2305

Soundmax 2305

Spectra 2313

Spectroniq 2155

Standard 2305

Star Cluster 2305

Starmedia 2308, 2318

Sungale 2158

Sunkai 2312

Superscan 2196

Supervision 2305

Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189,

2196, 2219, 2224

Symphonic 2062, 2180

Synn 2305

T.D.E. Systems

2316

Tatung 2083, 2312

TCM 2228, 2379

Teac 2199, 2287, 2301,

2305

Tec 2310

Technics 2197

Technika 2312, 2317

Telefunken 2307

Tensai 2312

Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311

Theta Digital 2207

Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284,

2294

Tokai 2302, 2310

Top Suxess 2318

Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027,

2028, 2029, 2030,

2098, 2099, 2100,

2101, 2114, 2117,

2118, 2119, 2136,

2187, 2195, 2205,

2291, 2337, 2338,

2378

TRANScontinents

2313, 2317

Transonic 2317

Trio 2312

Trutech 2160

TruVision 2309

TSM 2318

Umax 2315

United 2317

Urban Concepts

2205

US Logic 2167

Venturer 2199

Viewmaster 2318

Vocopro 2156

VocoStar 2157

Waitec 2318

Welltech 2300

Westinghouse 2109, 2168

Wharfedale 2304, 2305

Woxter 2315, 2318

Xbox 2206, 2229

Xlogic 2305, 2312

XMS 2312

Xoro 2300

Yamada 2097, 2313, 2315

Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2002,

2003, 2011, 2018,

2019, 2036, 2106,

2197, 2273

Yamakawa 2302, 2313

Yukai 2232

Zenith 2080, 2141, 2205,

2211, 2215

Blu-ray Disc

LG 2115

Panasonic 2089, 2131, 2132

Pioneer 2134

Samsung 2035, 2127

Sharp 2142, 2143, 2144

Sony 2025

Yamaha 2018

DVR

Bush 2060

Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,

2040, 2041, 2042

Philips 2061, 2062

Pioneer 2063, 2064, 2065,

2066, 2067

RCA 2059

Samsung 2035

Yamaha 2036

DVD Recorder

Aspire 2140

Astar 2162

Broksonic 2192

Go Video 2135

Hitachi 2108

Insignia 2080

Irradio 2103

JVC 2054, 2055, 2056,

2057

LG 2107, 2115, 2141,

2188

Liteon 2121

Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,

2041, 2042, 2043,

2089, 2104, 2108,

2112

Philips 2090, 2096, 2097,

2126, 2193

Pioneer 2067, 2113

Pye 2194

Samsung 2034, 2082, 2138

Sansui 2027

Sanyo 2139

Sony 2022, 2023, 2024,

2085, 2086, 2087,

2102, 2128, 2129,

2130

Sylvania 2189

Toshiba 2030, 2099, 2100,

2101, 2114, 2117,

2118, 2119

Yamaha 2106

Cable

ABC 3004, 3015, 3016,

3017, 3037, 3040,

3067, 3080, 3081

ADB 3070

Adelphia 3003

Alcatel 3066

Americast 3046

Amstrad 3048, 3068

Antronix 3019, 3020

Archer 3020

Arcon 3048

AT&T 3013

Axis 3048

Bell South 3046

Cable Vision 3014

Cabletenna 3019

Cabletime 3058

Cableview 3005

Clearmaster 3045

ClearMax 3045

Clyde Cablevision

3059

Colour Voice 3022

Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039

Comcrypt 3057

Comtronics 3023

Contec 3024

Coolmax 3045

COX 3006

Cryptovision 3060

Director 3006

Eastern 3025

Everquest 3041

Fidelity 3048

Filmnet 3057

Filmnet Cablecrypt

3061

Filmnet Comcrypt

3061

Finlux 3051

Focus 3044

Foxtel 3068

France Telecom

3054, 3055

Freebox 3069

GC Electronics

3020

GE 3015, 3016

GEC 3059

Gemini 3026, 3041

General Instrument

3006, 3008, 3016,

3039, 3050, 3067,

3075

Goldstar 3042

Gooding 3049

Grundig 3048, 3049

Hamlin 3027, 3028

Hirschmann 3051

Hitachi 3016

HomeChoice 3056

Humax 3001, 3002, 3071

ITT Nokia 3051

Jasco 3041

Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016,

3026, 3037, 3041,

3050, 3064, 3067,

3075

JVC 3049

Kabel Deutschland

3043, 3073, 3074

Macab 3055

Magnavox 3029

Maspro 3049

Matsui 3049

MegaCable 3039

Memorex 3030, 3040

Minerva 3049

Mnet 3057

Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010,

3013, 3039, 3072,

3075

Movie Time 3031, 3063

Mr Zapp 3055

Multichoice 3057

Multitech 3045

NEC 3018

NET Brazil 3007

Nokia 3051

Noos 3055

NSC 3031

Oak 3024

Pace 3011, 3043, 3084

Palladium 3049

Panasonic 3034, 3036, 3040

Paragon 3040

Philips 3021, 3022, 3029,

3049, 3053, 3054,

3055

Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038,

3042, 3048, 3083,

3084

Popular Mechanics

3044

Proscan 3015, 3016

Pulsar 3040

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix

3064

Quasar 3040

RadioShack 3041, 3045

RCA 3005, 3036, 3076,

3077

Realistic 3020

Recoton 3044

Regal 3028

Regency 3025

Rembrandt 3016

Runco 3040

Sagem 3055

Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032,

3042

SAT 3048

Scientific Atlanta

3003, 3004, 3011,

3012, 3013, 3062,

3078, 3079, 3080,

3081, 3082, 3083,

3084

Signal 3026, 3041

Signature 3016

Sony 3014, 3047

Sprucer 3036

Standard Component

3033

Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041,

3067

Stargate 3026, 3041

Starquest 3026, 3041

Supercable 3008

Supermax 3045

Tele+1 3057, 3061

Telepiu 3057

Thomson 3000, 3009

TIME WARNER

3006

Tocom 3017

Torx 3067

Toshiba 3040

Tristar 3045

Tudi 3052

Tusa 3026, 3041

TV86 3031

Unika 3019, 3020

United Cable 3037, 3064

Universal 3019, 3020

Universum 3049, 3051

V2 3045

Videoway 3065

View Star 3024, 3029, 3031

viii

Viewmaster 3045

Vision 3045

Visiopass 3051, 3054, 3055

Vortex View 3045

Wittenberg 3048

Zenith 3035, 3040, 3046

Zentek 3044

Sattelite

AB Sat 4138, 4139

AccessHD 4058

ADB 4142

AGS 4138

Akai 4101, 4103

Alba 4083, 4084, 4085,

4086, 4108, 4139

Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088

Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103

Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090

Alltech 4139

Alpha 4103

Alpha Digital 4058

Alphastar 4031

Amitronica 4139

Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136,

4139

Anglo 4139

Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090,

4139

Anttron 4083, 4086

Apollo 4083

Armstrong 4089, 4103

Artec 4054

Asat 4101, 4103

ASLF 4139

Astacom 4138

Astra 4089, 4091, 4100,

4137, 4139

Astro 4074, 4086, 4088,

4090, 4093, 4135,

4136, 4137

AudioTon 4086, 4098

Aurora 4140

Austar 4140

Axiel 4138

Axis 4074, 4090, 4091,

4096

Best 4074, 4090

Blaupunkt 4093

Blue Sky 4139

Boca 4089, 4100, 4105,

4139

Boston 4138

Brain Wave 4095

Broadcast 4094

Broco 4139

BSkyB 4113, 4123

BT 4138

Bubu Sat 4139

Bush 4084, 4127

Cambridge 4136

Canal Satellite 4135

Canal+ 4135

CaptiveWorks 4049

Channel Master

4060, 4085

Chaparral 4025

CHEROKEE 4138

Chess 4134, 4139

CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137

Clatronic 4095

CNT 4088

Comag 4000, 4001, 4002,

4003, 4004

Commlink 4087

Comtech 4096

Condor 4074, 4090, 4137

Connexions 4074, 4092

Conrad 4074, 4133, 4136,

4137

Conrad Electronic

4137, 4139

Contec 4096

Coolsat 4050

Cosat 4098

Coship 4063

Crown 4089

Daeryung 4092

Daewoo 4107, 4139

DDC 4085

Delega 4085

Dew 4096

Diamond 4097

Digiality 4137

Digital Stream 4059

DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020,

4021, 4022, 4024,

4037, 4038, 4040,

4041, 4043, 4045,

4057, 4106, 4143,

4144, 4145, 4146,

4147, 4148, 4149,

4150, 4151, 4152,

4153, 4154, 4155,

4156, 4157

Discoverer 4134

Discovery 4138

Diseqc 4138

Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013,

4014, 4019, 4039,

4064

Dishpro 4039, 4064

Distrisat 4103

Ditristrad 4098

DNT 4092, 4101, 4103

Drake 4026

DStv 4140

Dune 4074

Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039,

4064, 4092, 4139

Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089,

4136, 4139

Elap 4138, 4139

Elekta 4088

Elsat 4139

Elta 4074, 4083, 4090,

4098, 4101, 4103

Emanon 4083

Emme Esse 4074, 4090

Engel 4139

Ep Sat 4084

EURIEULT 4077

Eurodec 4102

Europa 4103, 4136, 4137

Europhon 4137

Eurosat 4089

Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090,

4133, 4136, 4137

Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137

Eutelsat 4139

Exator 4083, 4086

Expressvu 4039

Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139

Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132

Fidelity 4136

Finlandia 4084

Finlux 4084

FinnSat 4096, 4102

Flair Mate 4139

Foxtel 4140

Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136

FTEmaximal 4074, 4139

Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090,

4092, 4093, 4101,

4133

Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090,

4091, 4096, 4098,

4133, 4140

GE 4015, 4016, 4061,

4151

General Instrument

4027, 4065

GMI 4089

GOI 4039

Goldbox 4135

GoldStar 4099

Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084

Goodmind 4061

Grandin 4077

Grothusen 4083, 4099

Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093,

4113, 4129, 4136,

4140

Hänsel & Gretel

4137

Hantor 4083, 4095

Hanuri 4088

Hauppauge 4126

Heliocom 4137

Helium 4137

Hinari 4085

Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128,

4136, 4137, 4138

Hisawa 4095

Hisense 4066

Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149,

4153

Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007

Houston 4098

HTS 4039

Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144,

4146, 4150, 4152

Hughes Network Systems

4021

Humax 4051, 4075, 4076,

4110

Huth 4087, 4089, 4094,

4095, 4096, 4098,

4137, 4141

Hypson 4077

Ilo 4066

Imex 4077

Innovation 4090

Insignia 4057

Intertronic 4089

Intervision 4098, 4137

ITT Nokia 4084

Jerrold 4065

Johansson 4095

JOK 4138

JSR 4098

JVC 4011, 4019, 4039,

4079

Kamm 4139

Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103,

4109, 4112, 4120,

4133, 4138, 4139

Kathrein Eurostar

4133

Klap 4138

Konig 4137

Kosmos 4099

KR 4086

Kreiselmeyer 4093

K-SAT 4139

Kyostar 4083

L&S Electronic

4074

Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090,

4100, 4133, 4134,

4137

Lasonic 4062

Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099,

4133, 4137, 4139

Leng 4095

Lennox 4098

Lenson 4136

Lexus 4103

LG 4053, 4057, 4099

Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134,

4139

Lifetec 4090

Lorenzen 4137

Lorraine 4099

Lupus 4074, 4090

Luxor 4136

Lyonnaise 4102

Macab 4102

Magnavox 4045, 4055

Manata 4077, 4138, 4139

Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098,

4138

Marantz 4101

Mascom 4088

Maspro 4084, 4139

Matsui 4138

Max 4137

Mediabox 4135

Mediamarkt 4089

Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136

Medion 4074, 4090, 4139

Medison 4139

Mega 4101, 4103

Memorex 4045

Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083,

4086, 4087, 4088,

4139

Metz 4093

Micro electronic

4136, 4137, 4139

Micro Technology

4139

MicroGem 4056

Micromaxx 4074, 4090

Microstar 4090

Microtec 4139

Minerva 4093

Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152

Mitsumi 4100

Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101,

4103, 4139

Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010,

4065

Multichoice 4140

Multitec 4134

Muratto 4099

Mysat 4139

Navex 4095

Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136,

4137, 4139

Neusat 4139

Next Level 4065

NextWave 4141

Nikko 4089, 4139

Nokia 4084, 4122

Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085,

4088, 4102

Nova 4140

Novis 4095

Oceanic 4097

Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096

Okano 4089

Optex 4098

Optus 4135, 4140, 4141

Orbitech 4083, 4134, 4135,

4136

OSat 4086

Otto Versand 4093

Pace 4084, 4093, 4113,

4121, 4125, 4138

Pacific 4097

Packsat 4138

Palcom 4085

Palladium 4089, 4136

Palsat 4134, 4136

Panasat 4140

Panasonic 4043, 4044, 4046,

4084, 4113, 4118,

4143, 4148

Panda 4084, 4137

Pansat 4047

Patriot 4138

Paysat 4045

PCT 4060

Philco 4055

Philips 4021, 4022, 4045,

4084, 4101, 4103,

4111, 4115, 4135,

4138, 4150, 4152,

4153, 4155, 4156

Phoenix 4096

Phonotrend 4084, 4087, 4098

Pioneer 4124, 4135

Polsat 4102

Predki 4095

Premiere 4098, 4135

Priesner 4089

Primestar 4030

Profile 4138

Promax 4084

Prosat 4085, 4087

Proscan 4015, 4016, 4040,

4151

Protek 4097

Proton 4066

Provision 4088

Quadral 4074, 4085, 4087,

4090, 4138

Quelle 4093, 4133, 4137

Quiero 4102

RadioShack 4065

Radiola 4101, 4103

Radix 4092, 4119

Rainbow 4086

RCA 4015, 4016, 4034,

4035, 4036, 4037,

4038, 4040, 4151,

4157

Realistic 4028

Redpoint 4091

Redstar 4074, 4090

RFT 4087, 4101, 4103

Roadstar 4139

Roch 4077

Rover 4074, 4139

Saba 4088, 4133, 4137,

4138

Sabre 4084

Sagem 4069, 4102

Sakura 4096

Samsung 4018, 4021, 4023,

4041, 4042, 4081,

4082, 4083, 4114,

4150, 4154

SAT 4085, 4136

Sat Cruiser 4141

Sat Partner 4083, 4086, 4088,

4095, 4099, 4136

Sat Team 4139

Satcom 4094, 4137

Satec 4139

Satelco 4074

Satford 4094

Satmaster 4094

Satplus 4134

Schneider 4090, 4134, 4138

Schwaiger 4097, 4134, 4137

SCS 4133

Seemann 4089, 4091, 4092

SEG 4074, 4083, 4090,

4095

Seleco 4098

Servi Sat 4077, 4139

Siemens 4093

Silva 4099

Skantin 4139

Skardin 4091

Skinsat 4136

SKR 4139

Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087,

4134, 4139

Skymax 4101, 4103

SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137,

4139

Skyvision 4098

SM Electronic 4134, 4139

Smart 4133, 4139

Sony 4017, 4020, 4135

SR 4089, 4100

Star Choice 4065

Starland 4139

Starring 4095

Start Trak 4083

Strong 4074, 4083, 4086,

4090, 4099, 4140

STS 4033

STVI 4077

Sumida 4089

Sunny Sound 4074

Sunsat 4139

Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100

Supermax 4141

Tandberg 4102

Tandy 4086

Tantec 4084

TCM 4090

Techniland 4094

TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073,

4092, 4103, 4116,

4117, 4134, 4135,

4136

Technology 4140

Technosat 4141

Technowelt 4137

Teco 4089, 4100

Telanor 4085

Telasat 4133, 4137

Telecom 4139

Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138

Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092,

4136, 4137

Telemaster 4088

Telesat 4137

Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136

Televes 4084, 4136

Telewire 4098

Tempo 4141

Tevion 4090, 4139

Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102,

4104, 4130, 4133,

4135, 4137, 4138,

4139

Thorens 4097

Thorn 4084

Tivax 4058

Tivo 4150

Tokai 4103

Tonna 4084, 4094, 4098,

4136, 4139

Toshiba 4144, 4152, 4153

Triad 4099

Triasat 4136

Triax 4093, 4133, 4136,

4139

Turnsat 4139

Tvonics 4132

Twinner 4077, 4139

UEC 4140

Uher 4134

UltimateTV 4020

Uniden 4029, 4045

Unisat 4089, 4096, 4103

Unitor 4095

Universum 4093, 4133, 4137

US Digital 4066

Variosat 4093

Vega 4074

Ventana 4101, 4103

Viewsat 4048

Visiosat 4095, 4098, 4138,

4139

Voom 4065

Vortec 4083

Welltech 4134

WeTeKom 4134, 4136

Wevasat 4084

Wewa 4084

Winersat 4095

Wisi 4084, 4092, 4093,

4136, 4137

Woorisat 4088

Worldsat 4138

Xrypton 4074

XSat 4139

Zehnder 4074, 4088, 4090,

4131, 4133

Zenith 4052, 4057, 4145

Zodiac 4086

Yamaha 5000, 5013

CD Recoder

Yamaha 5001

Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004

Tape

Yamaha 5005, 5006

Tuner

Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,

5010, 5014, 5015,

5016, 5017, 5018

USB

Yamaha 5012, 5021

DOCK

Yamaha 5011, 5022

Yamaha 2002

Information about software

About FLAC codec library

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or

without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

– Redistributions of source code must retain the above

following disclaimer.

– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

– Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the

names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without

specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE

IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER

IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

About Vorbis library

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or

without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

– Redistributions of source code must retain the above

following disclaimer.

– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the

above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

– Neither the name of the Xiphophorus nor the names of

its contributors may be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without specific

prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE

IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS

OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF

THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Printed in Malaysia WR37660

HTR-6280

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

00_HTR-6280_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 31, 2009 10:52 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual.

■ Front panel

HTR-6280

MAIN

ZONE

ON/OFF

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

INPUT

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VIDEO

AUDIO

THROUGH

VIDEO

AUX

USB

VOLUME

HDMI

EFFECT

BD/DVD

RADIO

SCENE

ZONE2

ON/OFF

INFO

MEMORY

ZONE2

CONTROL

PRESET

CATEGORY

FM AM

TUNING/CH

KNQMO R

ABC D E F G H I J

SULPTV

■ Remote control

1 2 3 4

1 25 6

1 2 3 4

7 85 6

9 0

1 2 3 4

POWER

V-AUX

PHONO

USB DOCK

MULTI

SIRIUS

TUNER

MOVIE MUSIC

RETURN

REC

ENT

POWER

INPUT

MUTE

DISPLAY

MUTE

DVD

SCENE

RADIO

STEREO

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE

INFO

MEMORY

CATEGORY

PRESET

TUN./CH

SLEEP

HDMI

AUDIO

TRANSMIT

MAIN ZONE2

TV VOL TV CH

TAG PRG SELECT

CODE SET

POWER

SOURCE

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

ON SCREEN OPTION

TOP

VOLUME

ENTER

Printed in Malaysia WR37670

Documenttranscriptie

00_HTR-6280_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 31, 2009 10:52 AM U HTR-6280 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Printed in Malaysia WR37660 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 10 11 12 Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 13 14 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-i En Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. Caution-ii En 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet in the main room. 19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. 21 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents INTRODUCTION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Rear panel .................................................................. 5 Front panel display..................................................... 6 Remote control........................................................... 7 Quick start guide..................................................... 8 L Preparing remote control ....................................... 9 Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 38 Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription.......................................................... 38 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations...................... 38 Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels...... 40 Setting the Parental Lock ......................................... 41 Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information .......................................................... 42 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 9 Using the remote control............................................ 9 Using iPod™.......................................................... 43 Connections ...........................................................10 Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 45 Placing speakers....................................................... 10 Connecting speakers ................................................ 11 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13 Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14 Connecting other components ................................. 15 Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 17 Connecting a USB storage device ........................... 18 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks.................................. 18 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18 Connecting the power cable..................................... 19 Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 19 Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component............................ 45 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 45 BASIC OPERATION Playback.................................................................23 Enjoying the sound field programs .....................26 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 30 Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning) .............................................. 30 Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning).................................................................. 30 Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only) ...........................................32 Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)................................................... 48 Option menu items................................................... 48 Selecting a video signal to be output during an audio reproduction............................................... 50 Editing surround decoders/sound field programs ........................................................... 51 Setting sound field parameters................................. 51 Sound field parameters ............................................ 51 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) ..................................................... 55 Basic operation of the Setup menu .......................... 56 Speaker Setup .......................................................... 56 Sound Setup ............................................................. 58 Function Setup ......................................................... 59 DSP Parameter......................................................... 61 Memory Guard......................................................... 61 Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 62 Connecting Zone2.................................................... 62 Controlling Zone2.................................................... 63 Controlling other components with the remote control................................................................ 64 Setting remote control codes.................................... 64 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 64 Advanced setup..................................................... 65 APPENDIX Troubleshooting.................................................... 67 Glossary ................................................................. 78 Sound field program information ....................... 81 Information on HDMI™...................................... 82 Specifications......................................................... 83 Index ...................................................................... 84 (at the end of this manual) List of remote control codes.................................... i Information about software................................... x XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) ...........................................34 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 34 1 En English Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 32 Using the iTunes Tagging feature............................ 32 Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 33 ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX Selecting sound field programs................................ 26 Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decode mode)........................................ 29 Enjoying sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 29 Enjoy sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 29 Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 29 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 47 Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 47 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Basic procedure........................................................ 23 Using the SCENE function ...................................... 23 Selecting a source on the GUI screen ...................... 24 Muting audio output................................................. 24 Adjusting high/low frequency sounds (tone control) ....................................................... 24 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 24 Using your headphones............................................ 25 Displaying input signal information ........................ 25 Changing information on the front panel display .... 25 Playback of the USB storage device........................ 46 Other functions ..................................................... 47 ADVANCED OPERATION Using Auto Setup..................................................... 20 When an error message is displayed during measurement........................................................ 22 When a warning message is displayed after measurement........................................................ 22 Using USB storage devices................................... 46 BASIC OPERATION Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) ..................................... 20 Controlling iPod™................................................... 43 PREPARATION PREPARATION SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)........................................... 38 INTRODUCTION Features.................................................................... 2 About this manual................................................... 3 Supplied accessories................................................ 3 Part names and functions....................................... 4 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 34 XM Satellite Radio® operations ............................. 35 Registering XM Satellite Radio channels................ 36 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™ information .......................................................... 37 INTRODUCTION Features ■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier • Minimum RMS Output Power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω) • FRONT L/R: 120 W + 120 W • CENTER: 120 W • SURROUND L/R: 120 W + 120 W • SURROUND BACK L/R: 120 W + 120 W ■ Speaker/Preout outputs • Speaker terminals (7-channel), extra speaker terminals (2-channel for presence or Zone2), preout jacks (7.1channel) ■ Input/Output terminals Input terminals • HDMI input x 4 • Audio/Visual input [Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input (optical) x 2, analog input x 2 [Video] Component video x 2, Video x 4 • Audio input (analog) x 2 • Phono input (analog) x 1 • Multi-channel audio input (7.1-channel) • V-AUX input [Audio] Analog x 1 [Video] Video x 1 • DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) • USB port to connect a USB storage device Output terminals • Monitor output [Audio/Video] HDMI x 1 [Video] Component video x 1, Video x 1 • Audio/Visual output [Audio] Analog x 1 [Video] Video x 1 • Audio output Analog x 1 • Zone2 output Analog x 1 Other terminals Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1 Trigger output x 1 ■ • • • • Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields CINEMA DSP 3D Compressed Music Enhancer mode Virtual CINEMA DSP SILENT CINEMA ■ Digital audio decoders • Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder 2 En • DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder • DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder • DSD decoder • DTS NEO:6 decoder • Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. model only) ■ Radio tuners • FM/AM tuning capability • HD Radio digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A. model only) • XM Satellite Radio tuning capability, using XM MiniTuner and Home Dock, sold separately (U.S.A. model only) • SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning capability, using SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately (U.S.A. model only) ■ HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) • HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or highdefinition video as well as multi-channel digital audio. – Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability – Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability – “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability – High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability – High definition digital audio format signals capability • Analog to analog and HDMI digital video upconversion (video ↔ component video → HDMI) capability for monitor out • Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video output 480i(576i) or 480p(576p) → 720p, 1080i or 1080p • HDMI control function supported ■ Automatic speaker setup features • “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker outputs suitable for listening environments. ■ Other features • 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter • GUI (graphic user interface) menus to optimize this unit to suit individual audiovisual system • iPod and USB file browsing and album art display capability • Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources • Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability • SCENE function for changing input sources and sound field programs with one key • Bi-amplification connection capability • Sleep timer • Multi-zone function • iTunes Tagging function (U.S.A. model only) About this manual PREPARATION Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. iPod™ “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Bluetooth™ HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Supplied accessories APPENDIX Check that you received all of the following parts. • Remote control (page 7) • Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (page 9) • Optimizer microphone (page 20) • AM loop antenna (page 18) • Indoor FM antenna (page 18) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. ADVANCED OPERATION Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. BASIC OPERATION Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTSHD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. INTRODUCTION • Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • For better viewing, we increase the size of characters used in example screen images in this manual. Therefore the size ratio of characters to other objects (such as icons) may be different from that of the actual display image. • “KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “dHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or “Part names and functions” (page 4).for the information about each position of the parts. • ☞ indicates the page describing the related information. • y indicates a tip for your operation. English 3 En Part names and functions Front panel A BC D E F G H I J HDMI THROUGH VOLUME ZONE2 CONTROL ZONE2 ON/OFF INFO l MEMORY PRESET FM l h AM CATEGORY l h TUNING/CH h SCENE BD/DVD TV RADIO CD INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE PHONES TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC USB ON/OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA K A L M N O ZONE2 ON/OFF P Q M Switches the zone function on and off (page 63). B C D E STRAIGHT H TUNING/CH l / h I Front panel display Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels. Displays information on this unit (page 6). J VOLUME control K MAIN ZONE ON/OFF L PHONES jack Controls the volume of this unit (page 23). Turns this unit on and off (page 19). For plugging headphones (page 25). 4 En V Toggles between the selected sound field program and straight decode mode (page 29). P SCENE Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field programs (page 23). Q PURE DIRECT Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (page 24). This key lights up when Pure Direct mode is on. R INPUT selector S OPTIMIZER MIC jack Selects an input source (page 23). For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting output characteristics of speakers (page 20). T VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack For connecting the video output cable of a camcorder or game console (page 18). FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h) Change the tuner bands between FM and AM. Select a channel category for a XM/SIRIUS. U Changes sound field programs (page 26). PRESET l / h Selects an FM/AM preset station (page 31) or an XM/SIRIUS preset channel (pages 36 and 40). G O MEMORY Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (page 31) or XM/ SIRIUS channels as preset channels (pages 36 and 40). F PROGRAM selector INFO Changes information (input, DSP program, audio decoder, etc) displayed on the front panel display (page 25). T TONE CONTROL N ZONE2 CONTROL Enables operation of a receiver set in Zone2, including input source switching, volume control and tuner operation, with the main amplifier or remote control after this key is pressed (page 63). S AUDIO Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers (page 24). HDMI THROUGH Lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby. • when the HDMI control function is on • when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working R VIDEO U AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack For connecting the audio output cable of a camcorder or game console (page 18). V USB port For connecting a USB memory device or USB portable audio player (page 18) Part names and functions Rear panel b SIRIUS DOCK c d e f XM HDMI OUT g HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 4 HDMI 3 h i INTRODUCTION a ANTENNA (BD/DVD) HD Radio GND FM AM UNBAL. EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE PHONO SPEAKERS MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE CLASS 2 WIRING REMOTE PR IN GND PREPARATION PR OUT PB VIDEO PB VIDEO Y Y 12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT FRONT CENTER OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 SINGLE a k FRONT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT l m SIRIUS jack AUDIO OUT n o k For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) (page 38). b DOCK terminal l PHONO jacks m n TRIGGER OUT jack AV OUT jacks AUDIO 1/2 jacks MULTI CH INPUT jacks AUDIO OUT jacks ZONE2 OUT jacks Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a different zone (page 62). p PRE OUT jacks Outputs multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an external amplifier (page 17). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION o REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting an external component that supports the remote control function (page 17). p Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an external component (page 15). MONITOR OUT jacks Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as a TV (page 14). 1 SUBWOOFER 2 For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output (page 16). For connecting a turntable (page 15). e SUR. BACK PRE OUT For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2 (page 15). For connecting XM Mini-Tuner in XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) (page 34). d SURROUND ADVANCED OPERATION XM jack FRONT Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source to an external component (page 15). For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (page 17). c ZONE2 OUT CENTER BASIC OPERATION j AV OUT SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal to operate it linked with operation of this unit. For example, when an electric screen that supports a trigger input is connected, it opens and closes linked with operation of an input source selected in this unit. APPENDIX f HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 jacks For connecting an HDMI-compatible video monitor or external components for HDMI inputs 1-4 (pages 14 and 15). g ANTENNA terminals h SPEAKERS terminals For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (page 18). For connecting front, center, surround and surround back speakers (page 11). Connect the presence speakers (page 11) or the speakers for Zone2 (page 62) to EXTRA SP terminals. Power cable j AV 1-6 jacks English i Connect this cable to an AC wall outlet (page 19). For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6 (page 15). 5 En Part names and functions Front panel display ab c SIRIUS XM d e f g h i HD TAG j k SLEEP ZONE 2 STEREO 3 TUNED l VOL. MUTE SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR m a b n HDMI indicator i ZONE2 indicator Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is selected as an input source. j SLEEP indicator k MUTE indicator Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input source. l VOLUME indicator d HD indicator m Cursor indicators Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (page 47). SIRIUS indicator Flashes when audio is muted. Displays volume levels. Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception band (page 32). e TAG indicator Lights up when the selected HR Radio program (or song being played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature (page 32). f CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP is selected. g CINEMA DSP 3D indicator h Tuner indicator Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated. Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/ AM station (page 30). o Lights up when Zone2 is turned on. XM indicator Lights up when an XM tuner is selected as an input source. c m Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available for operations. n Multi information display o Speaker indicators Displays menu items and settings for the current operation. Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently output. Subwoofer Presence L Front L Surround L Surround back L SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR Center Presence R Front R Surround R Surround back R Surround back 6 En Part names and functions Remote control n a ZONE2 b POWER SOURCE c FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h) CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER SLEEP o p MEMORY PRESET k / n TUN./CH k / n HDMI 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 V-AUX PHONO USB DOCK TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI g Sound selection keys PRESET TUN./CH h SCENE q f AUDIO f Selects sound field programs (page 26). INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field programs (page 23). ENHANCER SUR. DECODE g INFO Changes the information shown on the front panel display (page 25). CATEGORY FM AM e Switches a band between FM and AM. Select a channel category for XM/ SIRIUS. Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels. STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT i ON SCREEN j Cursors k / n / l / h Select menu items or change PREPARATION 1 AV d Tuner keys INTRODUCTION MAIN e Displays the GUI screen (page 24). SCENE BD DVD TV CD ON SCREEN i j r OPTION VOLUME ENTER RETURN k MENU MUTE PRG SELECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 u v INPUT m l Numeric keys m TV control keys n TRANSMIT o CODE SET Enter numbers. Enables operations of a TV or a projector (page 64). Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control. ENT TV POWER TV VOL External component operation keys p POWER q SLEEP r OPTION s VOLUME +/– t DISPLAY Switches this unit on and standby (page 19). Switches the sleep timer operations (page 47). a Remote control signal transmitter Transmits infrared signals. b MAIN/ZONE2 Switches amplifiers (Main or Zone2) to be operated by the remote control (page 63). SOURCE POWER d Input selection keys Adjust the volume of this unit (page 23). Displays the play information on the video monitor. When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (page 43). Switches an external component on and off. HDMI 1-4 AV 1-6 AUDIO 1/2 V-AUX PHONO USB DOCK u MUTE v HD Radio keys Turns the mute function on and off (page 24). TAG PRG SELECT Stores “tag” data to the iPod or internal memory of this unit (page 32). Selects an HD Radio audio program (page 32). English TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4. Selects AV inputs 1 through 6. Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2. Selects a signal input from the VIDEO AUX jacks. Selects a signal input from the PHONO jacks. Selects a USB device connected to the USB port. Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK terminal. Selects the FM/AM tuner. Selects a SiriusConnect tuner as an input source. Selects an XM tuner as an input source. Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. APPENDIX c Displays the Option menu (page 48). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Sets remote control codes for external component operations (page 64). TV CH MUTE ADVANCED OPERATION TAG settings. Confirms a selected item. Returns to the previous screen or ends the menu display. Operate recording, playback etc. of external components (page 64). t REC l ENTER RETURN s DISPLAY TOP MENU k RADIO BASIC OPERATION h 7 En Quick start guide When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on operations and settings. Step 1: Prepare items for setup Step 2: Set up your speakers Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items necessary for setup. For example, prepare the following items for setting up a 7.1-channel sound system. Front right speaker Video monitor • Placing speakers • Connecting speakers ☞P. 10 ☞P. 11 y Subwoofer Front left speaker Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. Surround right speaker • This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions, and room acoustics, etc.). You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using the YPAO technology (☞P. 20). Step 3: Connect your components Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components. Center speaker Surround Back right speaker Components (such as DVD player) Surround Back left speaker Surround left speaker Requirements Speakers qty. Front speaker 2 Center speaker 1 Surround speaker 2 Surround back speaker 2 ☞P. 14 ☞P. 15 ☞P. 16 ☞P. 17 ☞P. 18 ☞P. 17 ☞P. 18 ☞P. 34 ☞P. 38 Step 4: Turn on the power Connect the power cable and turn on this unit. Active subwoofer 1 Speaker cable 7 Subwoofer cable 1 Reproduction component such as DVD player 1 Video monitor such as TV 1 Video cable or HDMI cable 2 Audio cable 2 y • Prepare two magnetically shielded speakers (for front). The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1 Two surround speakers 2 One center speaker 3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s) • If your video monitor is a CRT, we recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers. • Video and audio cables are unnecessary if you use HDMI cables. 8 En • Connecting a TV monitor or projector • Connecting other components • Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder • Connecting an external amplifier • Connecting a USB storage device • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver • Connecting the FM and AM antennas • Connecting an XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock • Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner • Connecting the power cable • Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 19 ☞P. 19 Step 5: Select the input source and start playback Select the component connected in step 3 as an input source and start playback. • Basic procedure • Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 23 ☞P. 26 y • This unit supports the SCENE function (page 23) that changes the input source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key. PREPARATION Preparing remote control 1 Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 3 Remote control sensor window PREPARATION 2 within 6 m (20 ft) 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places y • You can operate external components with this remote control by setting the remote control code (page 64). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX • Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control narrows – the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries to leak. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may be different even though they look the same. • If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked material. If the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Dispose of the old batteries correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries and set the remote control code. 30 ADVANCED OPERATION Take off the battery compartment cover. 30 BASIC OPERATION 1 3 INTRODUCTION Installing batteries in the remote control English 9 En Connections Placing speakers This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommended the following speaker layout in order to obtain the optimum surround effect. 7.1-channel speaker layout Speaker channels C FR FL SW SW 30˚ SL SR 60˚ 80˚ SL SR SBL SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more 6.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL SW SW SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB 5.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL SW SW 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 10 En 80˚ ■ Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. ■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the 5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further back than in the 7.1-channel speaker layout. ■ 30˚ SL ■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. When using a screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom. SR Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the listening position at least 30 cm (1 ft) away from each other, ideally at the same distance as that between the front left and right speakers. In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel sound signals are mixed down and output from the single surround back speaker. In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel sound signals are output from the surround left and right speakers. ■ Subwoofer (SW) The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and lowfrequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections from a wall. Connections 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL PR FL FR 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) C INTRODUCTION ■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (page 26). We recommend that you use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 57). Connecting speakers PREPARATION Connect your speakers to the respective terminals as follows, according to your speaker layout. y • Connect optional presence speakers or Zone2 speakers (page 62) to the EXTRA SP terminals. • You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them. b a e d k j ■ 6.1-channel (with Zone2 speakers) Speakers ANTENNA HD Radio GND FM AM BASIC OPERATION HDMI 4 HDMI 3 Jacks on this unit a Front speaker L FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) f Surround back speaker SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (SINGLE) h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) UNBAL. EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE SPEAKERS SINGLE CLASS 2 WIRING E FRONT CENTER SINGLE CENTER SUR.BACK AUDIO OUT FRONT ZONE2 OUT SURROUND CENTER SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT ■ c ■ g f h i 7.1-channel (with presence speakers) Speakers Jacks on this unit 5.1-channel (with Zone2 speakers) Speakers Jacks on this unit a Front speaker L FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) FRONT (R) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) c Center speaker CENTER h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) f Surround back speaker L SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (L) k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) g Surround back speaker R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (R) h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 j Presence speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) k Presence speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) English FRONT (L) APPENDIX a Front speaker L b Front speaker R ADDITIONAL INFORMATION H INPUT SUBWOOFER SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND ADVANCED OPERATION 2V MAX. T 11 En Connections Caution • A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this unit and the other end to that of your speaker. • Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned on. • If images on the monitor (CRT) are distorted, place the speakers away from the video monitor. If it does not work, use magnetically shielded speakers. • Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in the advanced setup menu before connecting the speakers (page 65). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers when you set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN”. ■ Connecting speaker cables 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist bare wires of the cable together so that they will not cause a short circuits. ■ Using bi-amplification connections You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system which supports bi-amplification connection as shown below. To activate the connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in the advanced setup menu (page 65). Front speakers Right Left 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare wires into the hole and then tighten the knob. This unit FRONT 2 Red: positive (+) 1 Black: negative (–) 3 Connecting the banana plug Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. Banana plug 12 En SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP Caution Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. Note • You cannot use surround back speakers or extra speakers (presence and Zone2 speakers) when bi-amplification connections are made. Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs ■ ■ Audio jacks Jack and cables Analog audio jacks (white) To transmit conventional analog stereo audio signals. Use stereo pin cables. Connect red plugs to red jacks (R) and white plugs to white jacks (L). (red) To transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use pin cables for digital audio signals. (orange) HDMI jacks HDMI Description To transmit digital video and digital audio signals. Use HDMI cables. HDMI y R COAXIAL jacks Jack and cables • We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (page 49). PREPARATION L Description Video/audio jacks INTRODUCTION This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are connecting. C OPTICAL jacks O To transmit optical digital audio signals. Use optical fiber cables for optical digital audio signals. This unit automatically converts input video signals and outputs the signals to the HDMI OUT jack and MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks (video conversion). Input OPTICAL Output HDMI HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO ADVANCED OPERATION COMPONENT VIDEO ■ Video jacks Jack and cables VIDEO jacks VIDEO V Description To transmit conventional composite video signals. Use video pin cables. PR PB PR Y VIDEO PB Y VIDEO Through Converted COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (yellow) COMPONENT VIDEO jacks BASIC OPERATION COAXIAL To transmit component video signals that include luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB) and chrominance red (PR) components. Use component video cables. (red) PB PB (blue) Y APPENDIX Y (green) English 13 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector According to the types of video input jacks available on your video monitor (such as a TV or projector), choose one of the connection methods as shown below. When you connect video players such as a DVD player to this unit with an HDMI connection, connect your video monitor to this unit with an HDMI connection. Note • Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Outputting TV sounds from this unit TV, or projector c a To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection between one of the AV 1-6 jacks of this unit and an audio output jack of the TV. If the TV supports an optical digital output, we recommend that you use the AV 1 jack. Connecting to the AV 1 jack allows you to switch an input source to the AV 1 jack with a just a single key operation using the SCENE function (page 23). b Y HDMI PB PR V TV HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDM (BD/DVD) Digital output (optical) PHONO MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE PR IN GND OUT VIDEO PB Y 12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT PR PR GND PB PB VIDEO Y L OPTICAL AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 SURROUND Y SUR.BA MULTI CH INPU O ■ To connect an HDMI video monitor OPTICAL Jacks on components a HDMI input Jacks on this unit HDMI OUT y • This unit supports the HDMI control function (page 47). If your TV supports the HDMI control function, you can control this unit with the remote control of your TV. ■ To connect component video monitor Jacks on components b Component video output ■ Jacks on this unit MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) To connect composite video monitor Jacks on components c Video input (composite) 14 En Jacks on this unit MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO1 AUD Connections Connecting other components Note • Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Audio input (PHONO) DOCK XM HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 4 HDMI 3 (BD/DVD) HDMI input (HDMI 1-4) PHONO MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE PR PR IN GND PREPARATION SIRIUS Audio / video output (AV OUT) INTRODUCTION This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control. OUT PB VIDEO PB VIDEO Y 12V 0.1A MAX. TRIGGER OUT Audio / video input (AV 1-6) FRONT CENTER Audio output (AUDIO OUT) OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 Audio input (AUDIO 1/2) SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT ZO O Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH INPUT) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ SURROUND MULTI CH INPUT Audio and video player / Set-top box Output jacks on the connected external component External component External component with component video output Audio HDMI output Optical digital output Component video Audio Coaxial digital output Video Component video output Audio Coaxial digital output Video Composite output Audio Optical digital output Video Composite output Audio Analog audio output Video Composite output Audio Analog audio output Video Composite output Input jack HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 4 AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL AV 2 COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL AV 4 OPTICAL VIDEO VIDEO AV 5 Analog audio VIDEO AV 6 Analog audio VIDEO English Video Input source APPENDIX External component with composite video output Audio/Video Output jack Input sources/jacks of this unit ADDITIONAL INFORMATION External component with HDMI output Signal BASIC OPERATION Y 15 En Connections y • Input sources in parentheses are recommended to connect to the respective jacks. If your Yamaha component has the remote in/out terminal, you can switch the input source to that component with a single key operation using the SCENE function (page 23). • You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display as necessary (page 61). • See page 62 on how to use the ZONE2 OUT jacks. • When you connect an external component with analog audio and component video (or composite) output jacks, connect the analog audio output to the AUDIO 1 or AUDIO 2 jacks of this unit while making a video connection (component video or composite). Then select the video to be output when “AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2” is selected as the input source (page 50). ■ Audio player Output jacks on the connected external component External component Output jack External component with optical digital output Optical digital output External component with coaxial digital output Coaxial digital output External component with analog audio output Analog audio output Turntable Analog audio output Input sources/jacks of this unit Input source Input jack AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL AV 4 OPTICAL AV 2 COAXIAL AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL AV 5 Analog audio AV 6 Analog audio AUDIO 1 Analog audio AUDIO 2 Analog audio PHONO Analog audio y • We recommend connecting the coaxial digital output terminal of a CD player to the AV3 jack. • When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier. • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. About audio/video output terminals Among the analog audio and analog video signals input to this unit via input terminals, the audio/video signals of the selected input sources are output from the AV OUT jacks and AUDIO OUT jacks. An HDMI input signal, COMPONENT VIDEO input signal or digital audio input signal cannot be output. When using the AV OUT jacks: connect an external component to the VIDEO or analog audio terminal. When using the AUDIO OUT jacks: connect an external component to the analog audio terminal. ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R and Subwoofer) for analog multi-channel input from a multiformat player, external decoder, etc. Notes • When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor is automatically disabled. • Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1channel speaker system when using this feature. • You can specify a video signal to be output during a multi-channel audio reproduction (page 50). If your DVD player has analog multi-channel output jacks, connect them to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks while making a video connection (component video or composite). CENTER FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT L R L R R L Center out Subwoofer out Surround back out Surround out Front out Multi-format player or external decoder (7.1-channel output) 16 En Connections Note • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any connections to the speaker terminals. a b c d SINGLE SURROUND 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SUR. BACK PRE OUT e FRONT PRE OUT jacks b SURROUND PRE OUT jacks c SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. Surround channel output jacks. Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack. Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK terminal. Use a dedicated cable for connection between the dock/ receiver and this unit. SIRIUS DOCK XM BASIC OPERATION a • If connecting a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE control signal reception to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start playback on the Yamaha component by using the SCENE function (page 23). • If connecting a component other than Yamaha products to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF” in the advanced setup menu (page 65). HDMI OUT y • To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set “Surround Speaker” to any parameter except “None” (page 57). d PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO PR CENTER PRE OUT jack GND Center channel output jack. PB ADVANCED OPERATION VIDEO e PREPARATION FRONT CENTER y INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting an external amplifier If you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding speaker terminals. SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jack Y Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Transmitting/receiving remote control signals When the components have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. HDMI 4 BD/DVD) MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE PR IN OUT PB VIDEO APPENDIX Y Remote control out Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component Remote control in IR flasher or Yamaha component (CD or DVD player, etc.) English 17 En Connections Connecting a USB storage device Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For information about USB storage devices supported by this unit, see page 46. Connecting the FM and AM antennas An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to the respective jacks. Indoor FM antenna VOLUME l EMORY PRESET FM l h AM CATEGORY l h TUNING/CH h Outdoor AM antenna Connect a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire, and extend it outdoors (use the AM loop antenna together with this antenna). AM loop antenna SCENE BD/DVD TV RADIO CD INPUT PURE DIRECT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC USB 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 ANTENNA HD Radio FM GND AM EFFECT VIDEO AUDIO UNBAL. EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE SPEAKERS SINGLE CLASS 2 WIRING REMOTE IN USB Ground (GND terminal) The GND terminal is not for earth grounding. To reduce noises, connect a ground bar or a vinyl-covered wire with a copper plate at its tip, and place it in the moist ground. y USB memory device or USB portable audio player Using the VIDEO AUX jacks • The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good reception. • Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit. • If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor antenna. For details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. • Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is connected. Assembling the AM loop antenna Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. VOLUME l EMORY PRESET FM l h AM CATEGORY l h TUNING/CH h SCENE BD/DVD TV RADIO CD INPUT STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC EFFECT VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO USB Connecting the AM loop antenna The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other to the GND terminal. L AUDIO R Press and hold L R Analog audio output Video output V Game console or video camera 18 En Insert Release Connections Connecting the power cable INTRODUCTION After all connections are complete, plug the power cable of this unit into an AC wall outlet. To the AC wall outlet NE2/PRESENCE CLASS 2 WIRING PREPARATION Power cable BASIC OPERATION Turning this unit on and off Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or pPOWER on the remote control) to turn on this unit. 2 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or pPOWER) again to turn off this unit (standby mode). ADVANCED OPERATION 1 y ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back. • You can also turn on this unit by pressing PSCENE (or hSCENE). • This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall outlet. Caution Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit to be saved incorrectly. APPENDIX English 19 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit. Caution • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not allow small children to enter the room during the procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. 2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the SOPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. INPUT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC VIDEO USB AUDIO y • You can manually adjust the output characteristics of your speakers with “Manual Setup” in the Setup menu (page 56). Optimizer microphone Using Auto Setup 1 Check the following points. Before starting the automatic setup, check the following. • All speakers and subwoofer are connected properly. • Headphones are disconnected from this unit. • The video monitor is connected properly. • This unit and the video monitor are turned on. • This unit is selected as the video input source of the video monitor. • The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). • The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer are set to the maximum. “MIC ON. View GUI MENU” appears on the front panel display. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. Auto Setup Extra Speaker Assignment Zone2 Presence None EQ Type Flat Front Natural Start Move focus Start y • You can bring up the above menu screen from the Setup menu (page 56). 3 CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer y • It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod. 20 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) 4 Set Finish Select items Speaker Config Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround Back/Subwoofer Distance (Min / Max) Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Level (Min / Max) Displays the speaker output levels in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes • If “Error” appears on the GUI screen during “Auto Setup”, measurement is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an error message is displayed during measurement” (page 22). • If problems occur during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” (xx indicates the number of warnings) appears in red. For details, see “When a warning message is displayed after measurement” (page 22). 7 Press jCursor n to select “Start” and then press jENTER to start the setup procedure. A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10 seconds. A loud test tone is output during measurement. Auto Setup Auto Setup Completed ! Please disconnect the micorphone (Then this screen will automatically disappear) Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise results, stay where you will not disturb the measurement, such as to the side of or behind the speakers or outside the room. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be subjected to high temperatures such on an AV component. APPENDIX Return Notes • During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • Press jCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure. Press jENTER to confirm the settings. The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to measurement results. To cancel the operation, press jCursor l / h to select “Cancel” and press jENTER. When the following screen appears, remove the optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now complete. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same characteristics as the front left and right speakers. Select this if your front left and right speakers have significantly better qualities than the other speakers. 6 Cancel ADVANCED OPERATION Flat This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same characteristics. Select this if your speakers have similar qualities. Speaker Config : 3 /4 / 0.1 Distance (Min / Max) : 8.0ft / 8.5ft Level (Min / Max) : -3.5dB / +4.5dB BASIC OPERATION Natural This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound. Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat”. Result PREPARATION To select sound characteristics for adjustment, press jCursor n to select “EQ Type” and then press jCursor l / h. If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, press iON SCREEN once and then operate this unit. This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on automatically measured speaker characteristics. In “EQ Type”, you can select the following parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the desired sound characteristics. Auto Setup INTRODUCTION 5 When measurement is successfully completed, “YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display and the measurement result appears on the GUI screen. When the speakers are connected to EXTRA SP terminals, press jCursor k repeatedly to select “Extra Speaker Assignment” and then press jCursor l / h to select how to use EXTRA SP terminals from “Zone2”, “Presence” or “None”. If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, press iON SCREEN once and then operate this unit. y 21 En English • If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel”. • Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of speakers. • If you press jENTER before removing the optimizer microphone, “Auto Setup” of “Speaker Setup” in the Setup menu (page 56) is displayed. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) When an error message is displayed during measurement If an error is detected during measurement, the measurement is canceled and “Error” appears on the GUI screen. Check the error and solve the problem. For details on each error message, see page 76. Press jCursor n once, press jCursor l / h to select “Retry” or “Exit” and then press jENTER. Error E-1 : No Front Speakers FrontL/R channel signals are not detected. Check wiring and connections of the front L/R speakers. Retry Exit Move focus Retry Performs “Auto Setup” again. Exit Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup”. y • When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To continue measurement, select “Proceed”. However, we recommend that you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again. When a warning message is displayed after measurement If a problem occurs during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” appears on the GUI screen. Check the warning and solve the problem. For details on each warning message, see page 77. Auto Setup Result Speaker Config : 3 /4 / 0.1 Distance (Min / Max) : 8.0ft / 8.5ft Level (Min / Max) : -3.5dB / +4.5dB Check 2 warnings Set Cancel See details Select items y • Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto Setup” again. 1 Press jCursor n / k to select “Check xx warning(s)” and then press jENTER. Details of the warning message are displayed. If there are multiple warning messages, you can display the next message using jCursor h. 2 To return to the top result display, press jENTER again. 22 En BASIC OPERATION Playback 1 2 VOL. y • You can also select an input source from the GUI screen (page 24). • You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display or GUI screen as necessary (page 61). Volume-18.5dB L SL SW C R SR Note When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is output, do the following. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS” (page 49). Using the SCENE function Keys Input source Sound field program BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight TV AV 1 Straight CD AV 3 Straight RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer APPENDIX y • When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing PSCENE (or hSCENE). • If you connect a Yamaha DVD/CD player that has the capability of the SCENE control signals to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start playback on the player by using the SCENE function. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four scenes are available for different usages, such as playing movies or music. The following input sources and sound field programs are provided as the initial factory settings. ADVANCED OPERATION Play the external component that you have selected as the source input, or select a radio station on the tuner. Refer to the operating instructions of the external component for details on playback. For selecting radio stations or playback of an iPod, Bluetooth component or USB storage device using this unit, see the following. • FM/AM radio tuning (page 30) • iPod playback (page 43) • Bluetooth component playback (page 45) • USB storage device playback (page 46) VOL. BASIC OPERATION AV1 Volume PREPARATION Input source name 3 Turn the JVOLUME control (or press sVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume. Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select an input source. The name of the selected input source is displayed for a few seconds. INTRODUCTION 4 Basic procedure Selecting a SCENE Press PSCENE (or hSCENE). English y • You can also select a SCENE from the GUI screen (page 24). 23 En Playback Registering input source/sound field program y • If an input source you want to select is available in “Select Scene”, you can select the desired input source and sound field program at once. 3 Select the desired input source/sound field program and then press and hold PSCENE (or hSCENE) key to edit until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel display. y Muting audio output 1 Press uMUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. The MUTE indicator on the front panel display flashes while audio output is muted. 2 Press uMUTE again to resume audio output. • If you change the input source setting, register the remote control code of an external component to the input source (page 64). Switching remotely controlled external components linked to scene selections You can operate an external component with the remote control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the external component for each input source. Setting remote control codes for desired input sources allows you to switch between external components linked to scene selections. 1 Adjusting high/low frequency sounds (tone control) Register the remote control code of an external component to the desired input source (page 64). You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range (Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. Note 1 • This feature is not available for TUNER, SIRIUS and XM input sources. 2 While holding down the desired hSCENE key, press and hold the dInput selection key to which you registered a remote control code in step 1. From now on the external component can be remotely controllable just by selecting a scene. Selecting a source on the GUI screen 1 Press jENTER. Press iON SCREEN on the remote control. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. TV CD Treble 2 0.0dB Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to adjust the frequency range. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB The display returns to the previous screen automatically in few seconds. Notes • The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source. • If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. Select Scene BD/DVD Press MTONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. The current setting is displayed on the front panel display. RADIO Enjoying pure hi-fi sound 2 Use jCursor k / n repeatedly to switch the page and jCursor l / h repeatedly to select the desired source. Category Source Select Scene BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO Select Media USB, DOCK, SIRIUS, XM, TUNER, PHONO, V-AUX, MULTI CH Select Input HDMI1-4, AV1-6, AUDIO1/2 24 En Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Press QPURE DIRECT (or gPURE DIRECT) to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off. QPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct mode on. Playback y • The font panel display automatically turns off while this unit in the Pure Direct mode. Using your headphones Changing information on the front panel display Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly. Available information differs depending on the selected input source. For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP Program”, the following screen appears on the front panel display. INTRODUCTION The following features are disabled in the Pure Direct mode. – sound field program, tone control – display and operation of the Option menu and Setup menu – multi-zone function Input source Straight Sound field program Notes Displaying input signal information When HDMI 1-4 or AV1-4 is selected as the input source, you can display audio/video signal information. • Input signal information is displayed on both the GUI screen and front panel display. 1 HDMI1-4 AV1-6 AUDIO1/2 V-AUX PHONO iPod (DOCK) (simple remote mode) BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Input DSP Program Audio Decoder USB iPod (DOCK) (menu browse mode) (on play information display) DSP Program, Audio Decoder, Song, Artist, Album (on GUI screen) List TUNER Press jCursor k / n to select “Signal Info” and then press jENTER. Information on the input signal is displayed. See page 49 for details about each information. Signal Info <Audio> Dolby TrueHD Format 3 / 2 / 0.1 Channel 96kHz Sampling Frequency --Bitrate <Video> Video In Video Out DSP (for HD Radio information) Call Sign*, Category*, Artist / Song*, Album*, Tag Info, DSP Program, Audio Decoder, Frequency SIRIUS Channel, Category, Artist / Song, Composer, Antenna, DSP Program, Audio Decoder XM Channel, Category, Artist / Song, Antenna, DSP Program, Audio Decoder MULTI CH Input HDMI 480p HDMI 1080p HDMI 1 Straight Note • If an HDMI related error occurs, error information is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 3 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. APPENDIX Input Frequency, DSP Program, Audio Decoder ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 Select the desired input source and then press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for the selected input source is displayed (page 48). Information ADVANCED OPERATION y Input source BASIC OPERATION • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are divided to left and right channels. When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, only front L/R sounds are output from the headphones. PREPARATION Plug your headphones in the LPHONES jack on the front panel. When you select a sound field program while using the headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT CINEMA mode. Note • Information marked with “*” is not available when analog HD Radio station is selected. English 25 En Enjoying the sound field programs This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders. Selecting sound field programs ■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select a desired sound field program. ■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs. Sound field programs for movies/TV programs ...............................Press gMOVIE repeatedly. Sound field programs for music........................................................Press gMUSIC repeatedly. Stereo reproduction ...........................................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly. Multi-channel stereo reproduction ....................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly. Compressed music enhancer.............................................................Press gSTEREO repeatedly. Surround decoder ..............................................................................Press gSUR.DECODE repeatedly. For example, if you select “Sci-Fi”, the following screen appears on the front panel display. Sound field program category Sci-Fi Program name Notes • Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input source is applied again. • When you play back the Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS Express, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources or audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (page 29) is automatically selected. Sound field program descriptions This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. y • You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (page 6). • Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 51. • in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP. For movie/TV program sources (MOVIE) Program Descriptions Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effectsfeaturing movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. 26 En Enjoying the sound field programs Program Descriptions Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. BASIC OPERATION For audio music sources (MUSIC) Program Descriptions Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. APPENDIX For stereo reproduction (STEREO) 2ch Stereo ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. ADVANCED OPERATION Hall in Munich Program PREPARATION This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. INTRODUCTION Drama Descriptions Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. y • When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. English 27 En Enjoying the sound field programs For multi-channel stereo reproduction (STEREO) Program 7ch Stereo Descriptions Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. Compressed Music Enhancer (ENHANCER) Program Descriptions Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts. 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. Surround decode mode (SUR. DECODE) Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels. Decoder Descriptions Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources. PLIIx Movie / PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected PLIIx Music / PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected PLIIx Game / PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music. Neural Sur. (U.S.A. model only) Neural Surround processing for any sources. The Neural Surround decoder supports PCM (sampling rate of 96 kHz or lower), Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Surround (except for DTS 96/24), DSD and analog 2-channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are reproduced in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio. y • An input source is played back in straight decode mode (page 29) when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source. 28 En Enjoying the sound field programs Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decode mode) 1 To cancel straight decode mode, press OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT) again. A sound field program name appears on the front panel display, and sound is reproduced with that sound field effect. CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to the EXTRA SP terminals, perform the following settings and then select a CINEMA DSP related sound field program. • Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack. • Set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 57). • Set “3D DSP” to “On” (page 51). When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel display lights up. ADVANCED OPERATION Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. When “Surround Speaker” in the Setup menu is set to “None” (page 57), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode BASIC OPERATION Enjoying sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Note • SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions. – 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected. – Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is selected. PREPARATION 2 To enable straight decode mode, press OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT). “Straight” appears on the front panel display. SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode is automatically selected when you connect the headphone plug to the PHONES jack. INTRODUCTION In straight decode mode, sounds are reproduced without sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced without a sound field effect. Enjoy sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA™) Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if you set “Surround Speaker” to “None” (page 57). – headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack. – 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected. – Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is used. APPENDIX English 29 En FM/AM tuning The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. ■ Frequency tuning mode You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching or specifying its frequency. ■ Preset tuning mode You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in. y • You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the Option menu (page 49). • (U.S.A. model only) When tuning in to an HD Radio station, the HD indicator lights up. See page 32 for details about the HD Radio features. 4 Note Notes • Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception. • When you press lNumeric keys during preset tuning, a preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to frequency tuning mode using HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) prior to the operation. • “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the entered frequency is correct. Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning) 1 2 3 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press GFM (eFM) or GAM (eAM) to select a band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display according to the band that you have selected. Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) to specify the frequency. To adjust the frequency to a higher range, press h (or k). To adjust it to the lower range, press l (or n). The TUNED indicator on the front panel display lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being broadcasted is in stereo. STEREO TUNED FM92.5MHz The frequency changes in the following manner according to how you press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./ CH k / n). When you press the key more than 1 second The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is detectable around the current frequency. This is effective when the tuner can receive strong signals without any interference. Once the search starts, release the key. When you keep holding the key, the search continues even when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to tune in to a specific station. When you press and release the key The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps. Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong signals and stations are skipped during the search. 30 En To tune in by direct frequency tuning, press lNumeric keys to enter the frequency of the station. Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889”. Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning) You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset). Registering stations by automatic station preset The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 stations. To register AM stations, use manual station preset. (U.S.A. model only) You can register up to 40 FM HD Radio, AM HD Radio and analog FM radio stations with strong signals. Note • (U.S.A. model only) If you register an FM HD Radio station with this feature, only the main audio program of the station (HD1) will be stored. To store other audio program, preset the station manually. 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed (page 48). 3 Select “Auto Preset” and then press jENTER. Auto Preset Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later from the lowest frequency upwards. FM/AM tuning y • You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by pressing ePRESET k / n or jCursor k / n while “READY” is displayed on the front panel display. • To cancel registration, press jRETURN. 4 • To cancel registration, press jRETURN or leave this unit without any operations for about 30 seconds. 01:FM87.5MHz Frequency You can manually register FM stations with weak signals or AM stations. 1 Tune in to the desired station (page 30). Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). “Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display, followed soon by the preset number to which the station will be registered. Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed (page 48). 3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Clear Preset” and then press jENTER. • By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically register the selected station to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to select the preset number to which the station will be registered. When you select a preset number to which no station is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a preset number to which any station has been already registered, the frequency of the station is displayed. Preset number y • To cancel the operation and return to the Option menu, press jRETURN. 4 Press jCursor k / n to select a preset number to reset and then press jENTER. The preset station registered to the selected preset number is cleared. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat step 4. 5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. 01:Empty Flashes Preset number APPENDIX Frequency to be registered 01:FM92.5MHz ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 ADVANCED OPERATION • (U.S.A. model only) To register a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2 to HD8), press vPRG SELECT to select the desired audio program. y 3 y • Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped. • “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed if no stations are registered. • You can directly select a preset number by pressing lNumeric keys while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.” appears if you enter an invalid number. • When you press lNumeric keys during normal tuning, a frequency is entered. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) prior to the operation. • (U.S.A. model only) This unit may take a little time to call a sub-audio program of an HD Radio station. Clearing preset stations y 2 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to select a preset number. BASIC OPERATION Registering stations by manual station preset You can call preset stations registered by automatic station preset or manual station preset. PREPARATION During the automatic station preset, “MEMORY” appears in the front panel display each time a station is registered. When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears and then the display returns to the Option menu. To return the display to the original state, press rOPTION. Calling a preset station (Preset tuning) INTRODUCTION y Status Preset number Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). When registration is complete, the display returns to the original state. English y • You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric keys. 31 En Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”. This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, program types, and comments) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8). Notes • The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you only tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 49). • This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital FM HD Radio station directly by using the lNumeric keys (page 30). Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs The HD indicator lights up in the front panel display when this unit is tuned into an HD Radio reception band. In this state, you can select the desired audio program if the selected FM HD Radio station provides multiple audio programs (up to 8). ■ ■ Behavior of the display This unit automatically shows the HD Radio information (call sign, etc) on the front panel display after 3 seconds. You can switch HD Radio information to be displayed (page 33). HD WXYZ-FM When multiple audio programs are provided Audio program number (relative/total) Lights up Audio program number (absolute) Using the iTunes Tagging feature HD FM 88.9MHz1 Press vPRG SELECT b / a on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired audio program. This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes Tagging feature, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”. 1 y • You can also select audio program using lNumeric keys(1-8) and lENT when this unit is in the automatic or manual tuning mode. In case you select an audio program currently not available, “HDx Off” (“x” indicates the program number) appears. Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD Radio audio program (if available). If the selected HD Radio program (or song being played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature, the TAG indicator lights up in the front panel display and “TAG” appears on the GUI screen. Notes Lights up • When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds. • Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the broadcasting station and the time period. ■ When only one audio program is provided If this unit is tuned into an FM HD Radio station including only one audio program or an AM HD Radio station, you cannot select audio programs. Lights up HD TAG TUNED WXYZ-FM 2 While a song you want to tag is being played back, press vTAG on the remote control. If a song is tagged, “StorageSuccess” and the number of stored iTunes Tagging information files (up to 50) appear in the front panel display. HD FM 87.5MHz 32 En Notes • “Insufficient Data’ appears in the front panel display and GUI screen if tagging is not available. • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging” (page 71) Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only) y Audio Decoder INTRODUCTION • This unit transmits the “tag” data to the iPod if an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the “tag” data (up to 50) in the internal memory and will transmit it next time your iPod is stationed. Current audio decoder (page 28), frequency, audio program number (absolute) Displaying HD Radio™ information Frequency Note Frequency, audio program number (absolute), audio program number (relative/total) • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or GUI screen, see “HD Radio Reception” (page 70). ■ Front panel display Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle the following HD Radio information display modes. Back to “Call Sign” Display example (Call Sign) Call Sign HD ■ Program category, frequency, audio program number (absolute) GUI screen Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed on the GUI screen. Artist name, song title, frequency, audio program number (absolute) a Preset no. b HD 1/3 FM 88.9MHz-1 Input f g Classic Rock Frankie Zipper Road to India Made-to-order Tuner Straight Enhancer Option Menu Data Hold a Preset number, call sign, audio program number (relative/total) HD Radio icon, TUNED icon c Program category, artist name, song title, album title The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored in the internal memory, frequency, audio program number (absolute) d STEREO icon e TAG icon f Frequency indication gauge g Band, frequency, audio program APPENDIX b Tag Info y DSP Program ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ch Name Category Artist Song DSP Album title, frequency, audio program number (absolute) WXYZ-FM TUNED c Album 10: d e ADVANCED OPERATION STEREO TAG Artist / Song BASIC OPERATION WXYZ-FM Call sign, frequency, audio program number (absolute) Category PREPARATION Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in the front panel display or on the GUI screen. • To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen. Current sound field program (page 26), frequency, audio program number (absolute) English 33 En XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Listening to Satellite Radio To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii). Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources. Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children. To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346). To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US). SIRIUS XM Radio Legal SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. Notes • If “CHECK ANTENNA”, “CHECK XM TUNER” or “NO SIGNAL” appears on the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be correct. • When “UPGRADE XM TUNER” is displayed, it means that the connected antenna is old. See page 71 for details. Activating XM Satellite Radio SIRIUS DOCK XM PHONO COMPONENT VIDEO PR Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM MiniTuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) y • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 37) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. 34 En Note • The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http:// activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) XM Satellite Radio® operations Category Search mode 1 Press GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel category. “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during the channel category selection. When you select the category, the first channel in the category is selected. Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dXM) to select “XM” as the input source. The XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears on the front panel display and GUI screen (page 37). Category search mode Search mode The first channel in the category INTRODUCTION 1 ■ XM Pop 001Preview Category name Channel number Channel name Note y • If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search). • When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. 2 2 • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 37). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 36). ■ All Channel Search mode Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. XM y • You can search for a channel quickly by holding down HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). • You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h). Note • This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of this unit): – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. ■ Direct number access In the All Channel Search mode or Category search mode, press the lNumeric keys to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”. y • To display the Radio ID number displayed on the front panel display, select channel “0”. • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71). APPENDIX 00880's • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION y y ADVANCED OPERATION Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” (page 36). While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display, press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. BASIC OPERATION Note • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or on the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71). PREPARATION XM English 35 En XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Registering XM Satellite Radio channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel as described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this page. Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode) Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM channels. For details, see “Registering preset channels” on this page. Preset channel number XM Registering preset channels 1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset channel in one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations” (page 35). Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 40). y • You can directly select a preset number by pressing a lNumeric keys while calling a preset channel. XM 00880's 2 00880's Clearing preset channels Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). The indicator on the front panel display changes as follows. Currently registered channel number (or “---” if empty) You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite Radio channels. 1 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “XM” is displayed. 2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select “Clear Preset” and then press jENTER. 3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset station number that you want to clear. XM P01:---<<008 Preset number to which new channel number is registered Channel number to be registered y • By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically register the selected channel to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). • To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN. 3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to select the stored preset station number. y • You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric keys. • If you select a preset number being used (currently registered channel number appears next to the preset number), the current preset channel will be overwritten. 4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). 36 En XM 008 80's 4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of the selected preset channel. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat steps 3 and 4. To end the operation, press rOPTION. XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™ information GUI screen Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed on the GUI screen. Note d • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 71). ■ a Front panel display Ch 008 b All Channel Search Ch Name Category Artist Song c Input DSP PREPARATION Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. 80’s Decades Sanumemo Road to India XM Straight Enhancer Option Menu Hold Data Channel Channel number, channel name Channel category, channel number a Channel number b Search mode (page 35) c Channel name, channel category, artist name, song title d Antenna reception level y • To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen. BASIC OPERATION Category INTRODUCTION Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen. ■ Artist / Song ADVANCED OPERATION Artist name, song title, channel number Antenna Antenna reception level, channel number ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DSP Program Current sound field program (page 26), channel number Audio Decoder Current audio decoder (page 28), channel number APPENDIX Back to “Channel” Display example (Antenna) XM Antenna English y • You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 60). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears. 37 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect tuner. SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna (sold separately) SIRIUS Displaying the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. 2 Press l0 and then lENT to display the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner. “000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the front panel display. Write the Sirius ID below. DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO T AN PR DC 5V ID:________________________________________ To the AC wall outlet 3 y • To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “Antenna” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS Information” screen on the GUI screen (page 42) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. • You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information Contact for activation URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) y • Status messages appear on the front panel display or GUI screen during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED” appears. Notes • If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna. • If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner. Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is 12-digit number and it appears on the package of the SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel “0” (see below). Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate your subscription. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. The SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears on the front panel display. Search mode SIRIUS 184Weather Channel number Channel name y • When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Notes • When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only select “184” or “000”. • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or on the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73). 38 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) 2 • You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 42). • If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL SIRIUS” (on the front panel display) and “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” (on the GUI screen) appear. • You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (page 40). All Channel Search mode Press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. SIRIUS 001Hits1 Direct number access In the All Channel Search mode or Category search mode, press the lNumeric keys to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”. y • To display the Sirius ID number displayed on the front panel display, select channel “0”. • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears on the front panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the lNumeric keys or press lENT to cancel (page 41). • If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73). ADVANCED OPERATION y • You can search for a channel quickly by holding down HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). • You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h). Category Search mode 1 Press GCATEGORY l / h (or eCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel category. “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during channel category selection. When you select the category, the first channel in the category is selected. Category search mode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ BASIC OPERATION ■ ■ PREPARATION y Note • This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of this unit): – the channel is locked (page 41). – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. INTRODUCTION Search for a channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” (page 40). The first channel in the category SIRIUS Pop APPENDIX Category name Note • If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search). 2 English While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display, press HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. y • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). 39 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this page. Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode) Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see “Registering preset channels” on this page. SIRIUS 001Hits1 Registering preset channels 1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset channel in one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations” (page 38). SIRIUS 001Hits1 2 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). The indicator on the front panel display changes as follows. Currently registered channel number (or “---” if empty) Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 40). Clearing preset channels You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. 1 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed. 2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select “Clear Preset” and then press jENTER. 3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset station number that you want to clear. SIRIUS SIRIUS P01:---<<001 Preset number to which new channel number is registered Channel number to be registered y • By holding down EMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically register the selected channel to an empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number). • To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN. 3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to select the stored preset station number. y • You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric keys. • If you select a preset number being used (currently registered channel number appears next to the preset number), the current preset channel will be overwritten. 4 Press EMEMORY (or eMEMORY). 40 En 001 Hits 1 4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of the selected preset channel. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat steps 3 and 4. To end the operation, press rOPTION. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Setting the Parental Lock 6 Press jCursor l / h to select the category of a channel you want to lock. Parental Lock Category Pop Input Setting the code number and the locking channels DSP 7 2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select “Parental Lock” and then press jENTER. 3 Use jCursor l / h (to select a digit to edit) and jCursor k / n (to select a number) to enter the desired 4-digit code number. If you have entered a code number before, enter the same code number. 001 002 003 004 005 SIRIUS Hits 1 The Blend SIRIUS XM Love 40s on 4 50s on 5 Select Cat / Ch Lock / Unlock Press jCursor k / n to select a channel you want to lock. Notes • You can also select a channel by using eCATEGORY l / h or eTUN./CH k / n. • While the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen is displayed, sound of the selected channel is output even the channel is locked. 8 Press jENTER to lock the selected channel. A check mark appears next to the locked channel on the GUI screen. You can toggle channel lock and unlock as you press jENTER. Parental Lock Category Pop Channel 006 007 008 009 010 ’60s Vibrations Totally ’70s Big ’80s The Pulse 9 The Bridge ADVANCED OPERATION Parental Lock Enter New PIN 0000 Input DSP Input DSP SIRIUS 7ch Enhancer Edit Set 4 Press jENTER. The confirmation screen appears. 5 Press jENTER again to confirm the code number. “OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears. Select Cat / Ch Lock / Unlock 9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to lock all the desired channels. 10 Press jRETURN repeatedly to exit the “Parental Lock” screen. This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked, this unit is tuned into “184 Weather/Emergency” or “000 Sirius ID”. Tuning into the locked channels Tune into the channel with direct number access (page 39) or Preset Search mode (page 40). When you tune into the locked channel, “LOCKED” appears on the front panel display and GUI screen, followed by the following message. Enter the set Parental lock code by using the lNumeric keys. To cancel this operation, press lENT. APPENDIX Note • If a code number is already registered and you enter the different number, “Wrong” appears and the screen returns to step 3. Enter the correct code number. • If you forget the Parental lock code or want to change it, reset it using “SR PIN” (page 65). SIRIUS 7ch Enhancer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The entered code number is needed for tuning in the channel or unlocking the channel. Write it down below. Code number: ________________________________ BASIC OPERATION Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed. SIRIUS 7ch Enhancer Channel PREPARATION Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number (PIN) and select the channels to be locked. 1 INTRODUCTION You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode and you search a channel by pressing HTUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n). SIRIUS PIN: 41 En English Note • If an incorrect number is entered, “Wrong” appears on the front panel display or the GUI screen and this unit is tuned into the previously selected channel. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the GUI screen. Note • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 73). ■ Front panel display Press DINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information display modes. Channel Display example (Antenna) SIRIUS Antenna y • You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 60). • If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals, “ACQUIRING” appears on the front panel display. • When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears. ■ GUI screen Press tDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed on the GUI screen. Channel number, channel name d Category a Channel category, channel number b Ch 001 All Channel Search SIRIUS Hits 1 Pop Sanumemo Road to India Frankie Zipper Ch Name Category Artist Song Composer c Input Artist/Song DSP Artist name, song title, channel number Option Menu Hold Data a Channel number b Search mode (page 39) c Channel name, channel category, artist name, song title, composer name d Antenna reception level Composer Composer name, channel number SIRIUS Straight Enhancer y • To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.. Antenna Antenna reception level, channel number DSP Program Current sound field program (page 26) Audio Decoder Current audio decoder (page 28) Back to “Channel” 42 En Using iPod™ Notes • iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using the YDS-11. INTRODUCTION Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (page 17), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control or the menu displayed on the GUI screen. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 28). y Controlling iPod in menu browse mode Controlling iPod™ Key j y • “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display. 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dDOCK) to select “iPod” (DOCK) as the input source. 2 Press tDISPLAY on the remote control. The following screen appears on the GUI screen. Function Subsequent menu k Menu up n Menu down l Previous menu h Subsequent menu Search backward (Press and hold) f Search forward (Press and hold) a Skip forward b Skip backward Music Videos Input k s Stop e Pause (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) t DISPLAY Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) 3 DOCK STRAIGHT Press jCursor k / n to select “Music” or “Videos” and then press jCursor h. • Select “Music” to browse music files. • Select “Videos” to browse video files. Note • The “Videos” menu does not appear unless the both your iPod and Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature. APPENDIX p DSP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION w iPod ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER You can browse song or video files stored on your iPod using the GUI screen. You cannot directly control your iPod in this mode. BASIC OPERATION You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform the following operations with the remote control. PREPARATION • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display. • For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see the “iPod” section on page 74. • (U.S.A. model only) Once the connection between an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature and this unit is complete, this unit transmits iTunes Tagging information to the iPod (page 32). Switch between Menu browse mode and Simple remote mode Controlling iPod in simple remote mode English You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying the menu on the GUI screen. You can also directly control your iPod in this mode. 43 En Using iPod™ 4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a menu item and then press jENTER to start playback. Menu items of “Music” Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs Menu items of “Videos” Menu items vary depending on the files stored on your iPod. ■ Shuffle/repeat playback When controlling iPod in simple remote mode, operate the iPod directly to set the shuffle and repeat playback. 1 Press tDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “iPod” is displayed (page 48). 3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or “Repeat” and then press jENTER. 4 Press jCursor l / h to select the desired playback style. Play information display Shuffle: • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in random order. • Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to play back albums in random order. a b c d e 01:04 –02:27 Input DSP DOCK Straight a Shuffle and repeat icons b (playback), (pausing), (search forward) and (search backward) c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc) d Elapsed time, progress bar, remaining time e Song title, artist name, album title y • You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by pressing DINFO (or fINFO). • Album arts are available only when the file contains image data. 44 En Repeat: • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back repeatedly. • Select “One” to repeat each song. • Select “All” to repeat all songs. Song Made-to-order Artist Frankie Zipper Album Road to India To return to the previous screen, press jRETURN. y • When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the GUI screen. • When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ 1 ” or “ ” appears on the GUI screen. Using Bluetooth™ components Note • This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. Make sure the Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver in the Bluetooth device list, and enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth component. When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on the front panel display. y • You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. • Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s operating instructions. ■ Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth™ component Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK) as the input source. 2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with and set it to pairing mode. For details on operation of the Bluetooth component, refer to the manual supplied with it. 3 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for “BLUETOOTH” is displayed (page 48). 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK) as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. 3 Press jCursor n to select “Connect” and then press jENTER. After you execute “Connect”, communication with the Bluetooth component is established. When the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver recognizes the Bluetooth component, “BT Connected” appears on the front panel display. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ADVANCED OPERATION To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. y • The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. BASIC OPERATION 5 PREPARATION Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component INTRODUCTION You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “Pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance. y Volume Trim Connect Pairing Input DSP 4 BLUETOOTH 7ch Enhancer 4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component. English Press jCursor n to select “Pairing” and then press jENTER. “Searching” appears and the pairing operation starts. APPENDIX • When you press jENTER on the remote control, the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver searches and connects to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears on the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth component, display the Option menu again, select “Disconnect” and then press jENTER. Option Menu y • To cancel pairing, press jRETURN. • You can also start pairing operation by holding down EMEMORY on the front panel. 45 En Using USB storage devices You can enjoy playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA , MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files stored on your USB memory device or USB portable player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs). Notes • You can play back only the files stored in the first partition. • Some files may not be playable depending on models and types of USB storage devices. Playback of the USB storage device ■ Play information display a 1 Connect your USB storage device to the VUSB port on the front panel (page 18). b c 2 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dUSB) to select “USB” as the input source. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. d e 00:30 Song Made-to-order Artist Frankie Zipper Album Road to India Input DSP USB Straight Enhancer USB Road to India Symphony 01 Symphony 02 Symphony 03 Take–Hero Input DSP USB Straight Enhancer If you have connected the USB storage device to this unit before, playback of the music file played at the last time automatically starts. 3 4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a music file to play back. • To select a file or folder, press jCursor k / n. • To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or jENTER. • To return to the previous menu, press j l. Press jENTER to start play back. You can also perform the following operations with remote control. Key a Shuffle and repeat icons b (playback) c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc) d Elapsed time e Song title, artist name, album title y • Album arts are available only when the file contains image data. Shuffle/repeat playback 1 Press rOPTION on the remote control while “USB” is selected as the input source. The Option menu for “USB” is displayed (page 48). 2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or “Repeat” and then press jENTER. 3 Press jCursor l / h to select the desired playback style. Function a Skip forward during playback b Skip backward during playback Shuffle: • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in random order. • Select “On” to play back music files in random order. k s Stop p Play Repeat: • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back repeatedly. • Select “One” to repeat each music file. • Select “All: to repeat all music files in the folder. y • When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the GUI screen. • When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ 1 ” or “ ” appears on the GUI screen. 4 46 En To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. Other functions Using the sleep timer Press qSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press qSLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. Turn on the TV. Other HDMI control devices are also turned on in conjunction with the TV. If not, turn on them manually. Sleep 120min. Sleep Off Sleep 90min. 5 Select this unit as the input source of the TV. Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. 6 Turn on the HDMI control device (DVD player or Blu-ray player) connected to this unit. For this unit, check that the DVD player or Blu-ray player is selected as an input source of this unit. If not, select it as an input source. For external devices, check that the TV screen shows the playback picture of the player. 7 Check if the HDMI control function works (turn on this unit or adjust the volume level using the remote control of the TV). When the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the front panel display lights up. Press qSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “Sleep Off” appears on the front panel display. Using the HDMI™ control function • In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV may be effective. – “HDMI Control” is set to “On” on this unit. – The HDMI control function is enables on the TV. y • This unit automatically selects the TV scene (page 23) when you select this unit as the device to reproduce TV sounds using the remote control of your TV. That is, if you connect an audio output jack of your TV to the AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack of this unit, you can enjoy TV sounds with the specified sound field program soon. y • The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player. • If you connect this unit and your DVD player, Blu-ray player or HD DVD player (HDMI control function supported) with HDMI, you can also control the device. • We suggest that you use products (TV, DVD player, Blu-ray player or HD DVD player) from the same manufacturer. 2 Enable the HDMI control function on each device. For this unit, set “HDMI Control” to “On” (page 59). For external devices, refer to the manual supplied with each device to enable the HDMI control function. English Turn on all devices connected to this unit with HDMI. For details, refer to the manual supplied with your device. APPENDIX 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Please refer to the manual supplied with your TV and check the following. – The HDMI control function is enabled on your TV. – This unit is appropriately connected to your TV. Note <Note> ADVANCED OPERATION You can operate the following functions of this unit with the remote control of your TV when connecting this unit and the TV (HDMI control function supported) with HDMI. • Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with TV) • Adjusting the volume • Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or TV) BASIC OPERATION 4 The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. PREPARATION Turn off the TV. Other HDMI control devices are also turned off in conjunction with the TV. If not, turn off them manually. INTRODUCTION 3 y • You do not need to perform steps 1 through 2 from the next time. 47 En ADVANCED OPERATION Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu) This unit has an Option menu of frequently used menu items for input sources compatible with this unit. The procedure for setting the Option menu items is described below. 1 2 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select the desired input source. Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for the selected input source is displayed. For details about the Option menu items of each input source, see “Option menu items” on this page. Option menu items The following menu items are provided for each input source. Input Source HDMI1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info AV1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info AV 5-6 Volume Trim AUDIO1/2 Volume Trim V-AUX Volume Trim PHONO Volume Trim USB Volume Trim Signal Info Shuffle Repeat iPod (DOCK) Volume Trim Shuffle Repeat Note BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Volume Trim Connect/ Disconnect Pairing • In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to select the current input source again. TUNER Volume Trim Audio Mode Auto Preset SIRIUS Volume Trim Clear Preset Parental Lock XM Volume Trim Clear Preset MULTI CH Volume Trim Video Out Option Menu Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info Input DSP 3 Menu item HDMI 1 Straight Press jCursor k / n to select the desired menu item and then press jENTER. Parameters of the selected menu item are displayed. 4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select the desired setting and then press jENTER 5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN. Video Out Clear Preset Details of the menu items are as follows: y • The default settings are marked with “*”. Volume Trim Input source: All Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0.0dB* to +6.0dB (in 0.5 dB steps) Reduces any change in volume when switching input sources by correcting volume differences between input sources. You can set this parameter for each input source. 48 En Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu) Decoder Mode Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Choices: Auto*, DTS Auto DTS Automatically selects audio input signals. Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. Extended Surround Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Choices: Auto*, PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, Off Notes • Video information • Signal Info Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, USB • Audio information • Format Channel Format of digital audio signals. Message Error messages about HDMI signals and HDMI components. See the following for details of the error messages. • HDMI error message (appears only when an error has occurred) • HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Device Over The number of HDMI components connected is over the limit. Out of Res. The connected monitor is not compatible with the video input signal. Audio Mode Input source: TUNER Choices: Auto*, Mono Sets FM (or HD Radio) broadcasting receiving mode. Auto Mono Receives in stereo mode by priority. Receives in monaural mode. You can get a better reception in monaural mode. Note • (U.S.A. model only) Select “Auto” to tune into HD Radio stations. When “Mono” is selected, you can tune into analog stations only. Auto Preset Input source: TUNER Automatically detects FM radio stations and registers them as preset stations (page 30). y • (U.S.A. model only) Automatically detects FM and AM HD Radio stations and analog FM radio stations and registers them as preset stations. Clear Preset Input source: TUNER, XM, SIRIUS Clears preset station (TUNER: page 31, XM: page 36, SIRIUS: page 40). Parental Lock Input source: SIRIUS Set the Parental Lock (page 41). 49 En English The number of input signal channels (front/surround/LFE). For example, if input signal channels are 3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/0.1” is displayed. If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed. Format and resolution of video output signal. APPENDIX Displays information on audio and video signals on the GUI screen and front panel display. You can change items to be displayed using jCursor k / n. Video Out ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Off Format and resolution of video input signal. ADVANCED OPERATION EX/ES Video In BASIC OPERATION PLIIx Music The bit rate of input signal per second. PREPARATION PLIIx Movie Automatically selects the most suitable decoder according to whether a flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel. Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMovie decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when two surround back speakers are connected. Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two surround back speakers are connected. Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1channel. Always reproduces original signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present. Bitrate • “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input. • The bit rate may vary during playback. Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. Auto The sampling frequency per second in analog-to-digital conversion. INTRODUCTION Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction. Sampling Frequency Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu) Shuffle Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB Choices: iPod (DOCK): Off*, Songs, Albums USB: Off*, On Changes the shuffle playback style. Repeat Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB Choices: Off*, One, All Changes the repeat playback style. Connect / Disconnect Selecting a video signal to be output during an audio reproduction This function enables this unit to output video signals when “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source. Follow the procedure below to select the video to be output during an audio reproduction. 1 Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” as the input source. 2 Press rOPTION on the remote control. The Option menu for the selected input source is displayed. 3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Video Out” and then press jENTER. Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Connects to or disconnects from a Bluetooth component. Pairing Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (page 45). Video Out Input source: AUDIO 1/2, MULTI CH Choices: AV1 to AV6, V-AUX, Off* Specifies a video signal to be output during an audio reproduction. For details, see “Selecting a video signal to be output during an audio reproduction” on this page. 50 En Video;;;;;;Off 4 Press jCursor l / h to select a video input jack to be used during an audio reproduction. – AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) – AV3-6 (VIDEO) – V-AUX (VIDEO) – Off (no video output) 5 To exit the Option menu, press rOPTION. Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Setting sound field parameters y • The default settings are marked with “*”. CINEMA DSP basic parameters y DSP Level • You cannot configure the parameters when “Memory Guard” is set to “On” (page 61). Adjustable range: –6dB to 0dB* to +3dB 2 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. 3 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then press jENTER. 4 Press jCursor k / n to select “DSP Parameter” and then press jENTER. Sound field program Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as follows. • The effect sound is too soft. • There are no differences between effects of the sound field programs. →Increase the effect level. • The sound is dull. • The sound field effect is added too much. →Reduce the effect level. Dialogue Lift Choices: DSP Parameter Sound field parameters 5 Set values Press jCursor k / n to select “Program Name” and then press jCursor l / h to select a sound field program to edit. Press jCursor k / n to select a parameter to edit and then press jCursor l / h to change the setting. For details on functions and adjustable ranges of the sound field parameters, see “Sound field parameters” on this page. The ideal dialogue position If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”. Move up to the ideal dialogue position y 7 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON SCREEN. Notes • This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to “Presence” (page 57). • You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position. 3D DSP Choices: On*, Off When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use sound field programs in 3D mode. 51 En English To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program, press jCursor n repeatedly to select “Initialize” and then press jCursor h. Then, press jCursor h again to execute the initialization or jCursor l to cancel it. When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest. The position gets higher as you increase the value. APPENDIX • Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other sound field program parameters. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6 Sci-Fi PLIIx Movie 0dB 16ms 1.0 2ms 1.0 ADVANCED OPERATION Program Name Decode Type DSP Level P. Initial Delay P. Room Size Sur. Initial Delay Sur. Room Size 0* to 5 Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen. BASIC OPERATION Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions of sources or rooms by setting the parameters. Sound field parameters Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Note Source sound • This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to “Presence” (page 57). ■ Parameters for adjusting early-reflected sound Level Sound field parameters for advanced configurations Level Early Time Time Sound source Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay / Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial Delay Adjustable range: 1 to 99ms (Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay), 1 to 49ms (Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial Delay) Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation time is long. Early-reflected sound Level Level Original source sound Time Delay Time Delay Sound source Small = 0.1 ■ Large = 2.0 Parameters for defining attenuation characteristics of early-reflected sound Liveness / P. Liveness / Sur. Liveness / Sur. Back Liveness Adjustable range: 0 to 10 Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation time is long. Source sound Live Large = 99ms Dead Time Level Small = 1ms Level Reflecting Time y • We recommended that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field when you adjust the delay time. ■ Parameters for specifying room size Room Size / P. Room Size / Sur. Room Size / Sur. Back Room Size Small reflected sound Large reflected sound Adjustable range: 0.1 to 2.0 Produces different senses of sound expansion according to room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus, different senses of sound expansion can be created by changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is defined as twice larger than the original room size. 52 En Small = 0 Large = 10 Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound Reverb Level Adjustable range: 0 to100% Reverb Time Adjustable range: 1.0 to 5.0s Source sound (dB) Reverb Level Rear reverberation Early reflections 60dB 60dB Time Time Time Reverb Time Short reverberation Long reverberation Parameters for certain sound field programs ■ Parameter for MOVIE sound field programs Decode Type Sound source Choices: Large = 5.0s Selects the decoder type for use with the MOVIE sound field programs. Note Reverb Delay Adjustable range: 0 to 250ms Level ■ Parameter for 2ch Stereo Direct Choices: Auto*, Off Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. Source sound ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Reverb Delay parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. Increasing the value of Reverb Delay allows you to create a reverberant sound in a wider area for the same Reverb Time. • You cannot select a decoder for the following MOVIE sound field programs. – Mono Movie – Sports – Action Game – Roleplaying Game ADVANCED OPERATION Small = 1.0s PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema BASIC OPERATION Reverb Time PREPARATION Rear reverberation Source sound INTRODUCTION Reverb Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation. Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the value. Reverb Time adjustment allows you to create a natural reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time longer for a sound source or room with less echo, or shorter for a sound source or room with more echo. Reverb Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound level. Increasing the value of Reverb Level makes the reverbration sound level higher, which allows you to create more echo. Level ■ (dB) Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble” tone controls are both set to 0 dB. Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control. 60dB Time Reverb Delay Reverb Time Parameters for 7ch Stereo Center Level / Surround L Level / Surround R Level / Surround Back Level / Presence L Level / Presence R Level APPENDIX ■ Reverberation Adjustable range: 0 to 100% 53 En English Adjusts the volume of the center, surround L/R, surround back and presence L/R channels in the 7ch Stereo program. The available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Editing surround decoders/sound field programs ■ Parameter for Straight Enhancer and 7ch Enhancer Effect Level Choices: High*, Low Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. When the high-frequency signals of the source is emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low”. To reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low”. Decoder parameters You can customize decoder effects by setting the following parameters. For details about the types of decoders, see “Surround decode mode” (page 28). ■ Parameter for PLIIx Music and PLII Music Panorama Choices: Off*, On Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Dimension Adjustable range: –3 to STD* to +3 Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value more positive. Center Width Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7 You can spread the center sound toward left and right according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker. ■ Parameter for Neo:6 Music Center Image Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0 Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. 54 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) You can call the Setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus. For details, read “Basic operation of the Setup menu” first, and see the respective pages. Function Page Sets items for speakers. 56 Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 56 Manual Setup Separately adjusts volume of each speaker. 58 Speaker Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between speakers and the listening position. 58 Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics. 58 Test Tone Generates test tones. 58 Sets various items for sound outputs. 58 Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones. 58 Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 59 HDMI Auto Lipsync Sets on or off of automatic adjustments for delay between output timing between video signals input from the HDMI jack and audio signals. 59 Auto Delay Fine adjusts a delay time of HDMI Auto. 59 Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the delay of audio and visual output. 59 Sets various items for HDMI and display. 59 Sets various items for input sources. 59 HDMI Control Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports the HDMI control function is connected with this unit. 59 Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby. 59 Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals. 59 Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input signals. 59 Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog video input signals. 60 Sound Setup Function Setup HDMI Sets items for a video monitor or the front panel display. 60 Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display. 60 Front Panel Display Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display. 60 GUI Position Adjusts top and bottom positions of the GUI screen displayed on the video monitor. 60 Display 60 Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level. 60 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. 60 60 Changes input source names to be displayed on the GUI screen or the front panel display. 61 Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2. 61 Zone2 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. 61 Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. 61 55 En English Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. Input Rename APPENDIX Sets items for volumes. Adaptive DRC Volume ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Speaker Level ADVANCED OPERATION 56 BASIC OPERATION 56 Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening environment. PREPARATION Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers. Speaker Configuration INTRODUCTION Menu/Submenu Speaker Setup Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Menu/Submenu Function Page DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs. 61 Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration. 61 Basic operation of the Setup menu 5 The Setup menu screen appears on both the GUI screen and front panel display. GUI screen Setup Menu Press jCursor k / n to select an item to edit and then press jCursor l / h to change the setting. Some items in “Manual Setup” of “Speaker Setup” take up a full screen. To display other items in “Manual Setup”, press jCursor k / n. Example (Speaker Configuration) Speaker Setup Sound Setup Function Setup DSP Parameter Memory Guard Speaker Configuration Front Speaker Small Large Front panel display ;SpeakerSetup In this section, procedures of setting menus using the video monitor are described. 1 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. 2 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then press jENTER. The Setup menu appears on the video monitor. 3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired menu then press jENTER. Items of the selected menu are displayed. y • To configure other items, repeat step 5. 6 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON SCREEN. Note • In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to select the current input source again. Speaker Setup You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup” (YPAO) for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup” for manual adjustment. y • The default settings are marked with “*”. Example (Function Setup) Auto Setup Function Setup Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic characteristics or the room, which are automatically measured. For details on operations, see page 20. HDMI Display Volume Input Rename Zone2 y • To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN. 4 If necessary, press jCursor k / n to select the desired submenu then press jENTER. Example (Volume) Volume Adaptive DRC Max Volume Initial Volume 56 En Off +16.5dB Off Manual Setup Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on manually set parameters. After “Auto Setup” (YPAO) is performed, you can check automatically adjusted parameters in the “Manual Setup” menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if necessary. ■ Speaker Configuration Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening environment. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) y Note • If “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front”, “Front Speaker” automatically switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small”. Extra Speaker Assignment Center Speaker Choices: Choices: Zone2*, Presence, None None, Small*, Large Selects the application for the EXTRA SP terminals. Sets the size of center speaker. Zone2 None Presence None Small Note • When setting “Extra SP Assign” to “Zone2” or “Presence”, the surround back channel signals for main output is separately output from other channels. Large LFE / Bass Out Choices: Subwoofer, Front, Both* Select this when no center speaker is connected. Center channel signals are spread to front left and right speakers. Select this when a small center speaker is connected. Low-frequency components of center channel are output from a subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected they are output from front speakers. Select this when a large center speaker is connected. Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound) channel or other channels. The output status is as follows. Surround Speaker LFE channel signals None Subwoofer Front speakers Other speakers Output Not output Not output Front Not output Output Not output Both Output Not output Not output Small Low-frequency components of other channel signals Parameter Subwoofer Front speakers Other speakers Large Select this when no surround speakers are connected. Surround channel signals are spread to front left and right speakers. “Surround Back Speaker” automatically switches to “None” when this is selected. Select this when small surround speakers are connected. Low-frequency components of surround channels are output from a subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected they are output from front speakers. Select this when large surround speakers are connected. [1] [2] [2] y Front Not output [3] [2] • When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Both [3] [4] [2] Surround Back Speaker Choices: [1] [2] [3] Front Speaker Choices: Small, Large* Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers. Small None Large x 1 Small x 1 Large x 2 Small x 2 Select this when no surround back speaker are connected. Surround back channel signals are output from the surround L/R speakers and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled, they are output from the surround L/R speakers and front speakers. Select this when one large surround back speaker is connected. Select this when one small surround back speaker is connected. Select this when two large surround back speakers are connected. Select this when two small surround back speakers are connected. y • When “Surround Back Speaker” is set to “None”, “PLIIx Movie”, “PLIIx Music” and “PLIIx Game” of the surround decode mode (page 28) are not available. 57 En English Large Select this when small speakers are connected. Low-frequency components of the front left and right channels are output from a subwoofer. Select this when large speakers are connected. None, Large x 1, Small x 1, Large x 2, Small x 2* Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers. APPENDIX [4] Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to “Small”. Outputs low-frequency components when the sizes of speakers are set to “Large”. Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to “Small”. Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right channels. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Subwoofer ADVANCED OPERATION Subwoofer None, Small*, Large Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers. BASIC OPERATION Parameter Choices: PREPARATION Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the speakers in the second zone. Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the presence speakers. Disables the EXTRA SP terminals. INTRODUCTION • The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size: “Large” or “Small”. “Large” and “Small” refer to speakers with woofer diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Bass Crossover Frequency Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component output from a speaker with a size set to “Small” (Small x 1, Small x 2) Sound with a frequency below that limit is output from a subwoofer or front speakers. If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. Subwoofer Phase Choices: Normal*, Reverse Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Normal Reverse ■ Select this not to change the phase of your subwoofer. Select this to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Speaker Level Adjustable range: –10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5dB step) Defaults: 0dB (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R) –1.0dB (CNTR, SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR) Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending on the number of speakers connected. y • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears instead of “SBL” and “SBR”. • You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test Tone” to “On” (on this page). • If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. ■ Speaker Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of each speaker. Unit Choices: feet (ft) meters (m) feet (ft)*, meters (m) Displays the speaker distance in feet. Displays the speaker distance in meters. ■ Equalizer Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic equalizer. EQ Type Select Choices: Auto PEQ, GEQ*, Off Selects an equalizer type. Auto PEQ GEQ Off Uses a parametric equalizer selected in “Auto Setup”. Characteristics of the currently used parametric equalizer are displayed below “Auto PEQ”. Uses a graphic equalizer. Press jENTER to adjust the characteristics of the graphic equalizer. Not use a graphic equalizer. GEQ Channels Front Left, Front Right, Center, Surround Left, Surround Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Back Right Choices: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5dB step) Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust signal levels in 7 frequency ranges. To adjust the signal level within each range, press jCursor l / h to select the desired speaker while “Channel” is selected, press jCursor k / n to select the desired frequency band and then press jCursor l / h to adjust the signal level. ■ Test Tone Choices: Off*, On Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates test tones. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the settings of “Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone. Off On Not generate test tones. Generates test tones. Sound Setup You can set various items for sound outputs. ■ Dynamic Range Choices: Min/Auto, STD, Max* FR.L / FR.R / CNTR / SUR.L / SUR.R / SBL / SBR / SWFR / PR.L / PR.R Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for reproducing bitstream signals. Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft) Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R) 2.60m (8.5ft) (CNTR) 2.40m (8.0ft) (SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR) Min/Auto y • Available items differ depending on the “Speaker Configuration” settings (page 56). • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears instead of “SBL” and “SBR”. 58 En STD (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. Sets the standard dynamic range recommended for regular home use. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Max Outputs sound without adjusting the dynamic range of the input signals. HDMI Auto Lipsync Choices: Off*, On Automatically adjusts output timing of audio and video signals when a TV that supports an automatic lip-sync function is connected to this unit. Off On Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) Fine adjust the correction time when “HDMI Auto Lipsync” is set to “On”. The actual correction time is displayed under in “Auto Delay” field and an offset time set by the user in “Offset” field. Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the correction time. Select this when the connected TV does not support the automatic lipsync function or you set “HDMI Auto Lipsync” to “Off”. Function Setup You can set various items for HDMI and display. HDMI Control On, Off* y • This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. • To enables HDMI signal standby-through output, any one of the input sources connected to the HDMI 1-4 jacks must be selected before switching to standby. • When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up. In this state, this unit consumes up to 3 watts of power even on standby. ■ Audio Output Choices: Amplifier*, TV, Amplifier + TV Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks. Amplifier Outputs HDMI sound signals form the speakers connected to this unit. TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the speakers of a TV connected to this unit. Sound output from the speakers connected to this unit is muted. Amplifier + Outputs HDMI sound signals from the TV speakers connected to this unit and the speakers of a TV connected to this unit. Note Enables the HDMI control function. Disables the HDMI control function. • This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. ■ Resolution Choices: Through*, 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted from analog video input signals and output from the HDMI OUT jack. Notes • Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog video signals cannot be upscaled. • When a video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit, this unit automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the detected resolution. • If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set “MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (page 65) and try again. English • The BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby. – when the HDMI control function is on – when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working • When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, this unit consumes 1 to 3 watts of power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this unit. y APPENDIX Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports the HDMI control function is connected with this unit. When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the video monitor even when this unit is on standby. On Off y ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can set items for HDMI. Choices: Off • Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the TV vary depending on specifications of the monitor. HDMI ■ Outputs the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT jack. Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT jack. ADVANCED OPERATION Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) On BASIC OPERATION Auto Delay On, Off* Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby. When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks to the video monitor even when this unit is on standby. PREPARATION Select this when the connected TV does not support the automatic lip-sync function or you do not use the automatic lip-sync function. Set the correction time in “Manual Delay”. Select this when the connected TV supports the automatic lip-sync function. Fine adjust the correction time in “Auto Delay”. Standby Through Choices: INTRODUCTION ■ Lipsync Adjusts delay between video output and audio output. ■ 59 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Through*, 16:9, Smart Zoom Sets a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT jack when the HDMI signals are converted from analog video input signals by a video conversion function. Through Outputs the video signals without changing the aspect ratio. 16:9 Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 images on a 16:9 TV with black bands on the right and left sides of the TV screen. Smart Zoom Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 images on a 16:9 TV by stretching right and left of images to fit on the TV screen. Volume You can set items for volumes. ■ Adaptive DRC Choices: Notes • You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set to “Through”. • This setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3. • You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or when 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input. Display You can set items for a video monitor and the front panel display. Auto, Off* Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows. When the volume level is low: narrow the dynamic range When the volume level is high: widen the dynamic range Auto Off Output level Aspect Choices: Output level ■ Auto Input level Volume : low Auto Off Off Input level Volume : high Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Not adjust the dynamic range automatically. y • This setting is also effective for headphones. Dimmer Adjustable range: –4 to 0* Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is darkened. Note • The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode even if the value is increased. Front Panel Display Scroll Choices: Continuous*, Once Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of characters exceed a display area of the front panel display. Continuous Once Repeatedly displays all characters by scrolling. Displays all characters by scrolling once, halts scrolling and then displays first 14 characters. GUI Position Adjustable range: –5 to 0* to +5 Adjusts the position of the GUI screen displayed on the video monitor. To move the screen up (or to the right), set this value larger. To move the screen down (or to the left), set this value smaller. 60 En ■ Max Volume Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB (or Mute) when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. The volume increases to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5 dB (default). ■ Initial Volume Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step) Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used when this unit was set to standby is applied. Note • When you set “Max Volume” and “Initial Volume” the setting of “Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Input Rename DSP Parameter Selecting a name to be displayed from templates Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to edit and then press jCursor l / h to select a new name from the following templates. – Satellite – VCR – Tape – MD – PC – iPod – HD DVD – “blank” jCursor l / h jCursor k / n jENTER Choices: Off*, On Protects the Setup menu settings against accidental alteration. Off On Not protect settings. Protects the Setup menu settings (except for “Decode Type” in “DSP Parameter” and “Memory Guard”). Note • When this parameter is switched to “On”, “ corner of the Setup menu screen. ” appears at the top left BASIC OPERATION Entering an original name Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to edit and then press jENTER. Enter up to 9 characters by selecting one character at a time with the following key operations. Memory Guard PREPARATION – Blu-ray – DVD – SetTopBox – Game – TV – DVR – CD – CD-R You can set parameters for the sound field programs. For details, see page 51. INTRODUCTION Changes input source names to be displayed on the front panel display. Selects a character to edit. Selects a character to enter. Enters a selected character. The following characters are available for input. A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space ADVANCED OPERATION Zone2 Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2. y • These parameters are available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to “Zone2” (page 57). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Zone2 Max Volume Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2, so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. ■ Zone2 Initial Volume Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step) APPENDIX Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2 when the power of Zone2 unit is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used at the time when the Zone2 unit was set to standby is applied. Note • If you set “Zone2 Max Volume” and “Zone2 Initial Volume”, the setting of “Zone2 Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, if you set “Zone2 Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Zone2 Initial Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time the Zone2 unit is turned on. English 61 En Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. This feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signal can be sent to the second zone. If you want to output sounds to Zone2, connect an external component to the AV5-6, AUDIO1-2 or VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (by analog connection). For example, if you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player to the second zone, you must connect the HDMI DVD player to this unit by both HDMI and analog connections. Using the internal amplifier of this unit Connecting Zone2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these products. Up to 6 components can be connected using monaural analog mini cables or via an IR flashers. For details about connections, see “Transmitting/receiving remote control signals” (page 17). Important safety notice The EXTRA SP terminals of this unit should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your unit. Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2” (page 57). Using an external amplifier Connect an amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows. From the ZONE2 OUT jacks EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE Amplifier Second zone (Zone2) Main zone Second zone (Zone2) DVD player (etc.) This unit Main zone Remote control y This unit Infrared signal emitter From the REMOTE OUT jack Infrared signal receiver To the REMOTE IN jack Note • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 62 En • You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP terminals as the front speaker system of another zone. • When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume of the Zone2 speakers (page 61). Using multi-zone configuration Controlling Zone2 PREPARATION Switching to the Zone2 operation mode Before controlling Zone2 by using the control keys on the front panel or on the remote control, follow the procedure below to switch this unit to the Zone2 operation mode. To control Zone2 by using the front panel control keys BASIC OPERATION ■ Press CZONE2 CONTROL while Zone2 is turned on. The ZONE2 indicator flashes on the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. ADVANCED OPERATION ZONE 2 Flashes Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing on the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the main zone operation mode. ■ To control Zone2 by using the remote control Switch bMAIN/ZONE2 to the “ZONE2” position. Operations in the Zone2 operation mode ■ INTRODUCTION You can select and control Zone2 by using the control keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are as follows: • Selecting the input source. • Tuning into the desired station (when “TUNER” is selected as the input source) • Tuning into the desired channel (when “XM” or “SIRIUS” is selected as the input source) (U.S.A. model only) • Adjusting the volume of Zone2 (when Zone2 speakers are connected to the EXTRA SP terminals). • Select “DOCK” to use the iPod features (page 43) or Bluetooth features (page 45) in Zone2. • Select “SIRIUS” to use the SIRIUS Satellite Radio features (page 38) in Zone2. • Select “XM” to use the XM Satellite Radio features (page 34) in Zone2. Turning on or set Zone2 to standby Press AZONE2 ON/OFF (or pPOWER). Operating Zone2 APPENDIX ■ English Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select the desired input source. • Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, “AUDIO2”, “VAUX” or “PHONO” to listen to the input source in Zone2. • Select “TUNER” to use the FM/AM radio features (page 30) in Zone2. • Select “USB” to use the USB features (page 46) in Zone2. 63 En Controlling other components with the remote control You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for controlling external components are as follows: cSOURCE POWER Turns on and off an external component. Input source jCursor, ENTER, RETURN Operates the menus of external components. kExternal component operation keys Function as a recording or playback key of an external component, or a menu display key. lNumeric keys Function as numeric keys of an external component. mTV control keys INPUT MUTE TV VOL +/– TV CH +/– POWER [USB] — — — [DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011 [TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007 [SIRIUS] Tuner Yamaha 5017 [XM] Tuner Yamaha 5009 [MULTI] — — — • An external component controlled by the remote control is automatically selected according to selection of the scenes (page 23). Setting remote control codes • You can use mTV control keys only for controls of TV regardless of selected input sources. • You need to set the remote control code first to control external components. • The remote control keys for controlling external components are available only when the external components have corresponding control keys. The following remote control codes are assigned to input sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Default remote control code settings Category Default code y Switches visual inputs of TV Mutes audio of TV Controls the volume of TV Switches channels of TV Turns on and off TV y Input source Manufacturer “—” indicates no assignment tDISPLAY Switches between the screens of external components. ■ Category Manufacturer You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. You should perform each step within 1 minute after the previous step. 1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. nTRANSMIT blinks twice. 2 Press the desired dInput selection key. 3 Press lNumeric keys to enter a remote control code. Once the remote control code is registered, nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. Default code [HDMI 1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018 [HDMI 2] — — — [HDMI 3] — — — [HDMI 4] — — — [AV 1] — — — You can reset all remote control codes to the factory default settings. 1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as a tip of a ballpoint pen. nTRANSMIT blinks twice. Resetting all remote control codes [AV 2] — — — [AV 3] CD Yamaha 5013 [AV 4] — — — [AV 5] — — — [AV 6] — — — 2 Press iON SCREEN. [AUDIO 1] — — — 3 [AUDIO 2] — — — [V-AUX] — — — Press lNumeric keys to enter “9981”. Once the initialization is complete, nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. [PHONO] — — — 64 En Advanced setup In the advanced setup menu, you can set basic operations of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or initialize user settings. 2 While holding down OSTRAIGHT on the front panel, press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF. Keep holding down OSTRAIGHT until “ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel display. ADVANCEDSETUP 3 4 Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. To change other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4. 5 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to standby. The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. y • Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an actual display screen. SP IMP. -XXX Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN* REMOTE ID -XXX Choices: ID1*, ID2 You can check the firmware of this unit and update the firmware using the USB port on the front panel. Select the following parameter in step 3 above. FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware of this unit. To update the firmware, select “FIRM UPDATE” and then press OSTRAIGHT. Notes • Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware. • Be sure to read information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. SR PIN -XXX Displays the firmware of this unit. Choices: RESET, CANCEL* Resets Parental lock cord when using SIRIUS Satellite tuner. BI AMP - XXX Choices: ON, OFF* Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12. Choices: ON*, OFF Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals to an external component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE function is selected. Setting a remote control ID Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted operation of the other amplifier. “ID1” is set for both the main unit and remote control by default. If you have changed the remote control ID, make sure that you select the same ID for the main unit in the the advanced setup menu. Press oCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. nTRANSMIT blinks twice. 2 Press iON SCREEN. MON.CHK - XXXX Choices: YES*, SKIP Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack. English 1 APPENDIX SCENE IR -XXX VERXXX.XXX.XXX ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to the same setting. ADVANCED OPERATION Selects output impedance of this unit according to connected speakers. When you connect 4-ohm speakers to the FRONT speaker terminals, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN.”. Updating the firmware BASIC OPERATION Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select the parameter you want to change. The default setting are marked with “*”. DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL* Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can select an initialization method from the following. DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field programs VIDEO Video conversion settings (resolution/ aspect) in the Setup menu and the GUI display position ALL All CANCEL Cancellation of initialization PREPARATION Set this unit to standby. Choices: INTRODUCTION 1 INIT-XXXXXXXXX 65 En Advanced setup 3 Enter the desired remote control ID code. To switch to ID1: Press lNumeric keys to enter “5019”. To switch to ID2: Press lNumeric keys to enter “5020”. Once the remote control code is registered, nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. y • If you initialize the settings of this unit, “REMOTE ID” (remote control code of this unit) is set to “ID1”. 66 En APPENDIX Troubleshooting General Problem Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — This unit suddenly enters the standby mode The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 65 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit and play the source again. — The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall outlet. 19 The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 65 (When this unit is turned back on and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. 11 This unit cannot be turned off. The internal microcomputer is frozen due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — No picture. An appropriate video input is not selected on the video monitor. Select an appropriate video input on the video monitor. — The external video component is connected to one of the HDMI 1-4 jacks while your video monitor is connected to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks. Connect the external video component to the video input jacks other than the HDMI 1-4 jacks or connect the video monitor to the HDMI OUT jack. This unit outputs the video signals not supported by the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Displays the advanced setup menu and select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters. 65 Displays the advanced setup menu and set “MON.CHK” to “YES”. 65 Video signals are input from a game console while your video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. 14 Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks. 14 This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. APPENDIX The internal microcomputer is frozen due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. ADVANCED OPERATION This unit does not operate properly. BASIC OPERATION Remedy PREPARATION See page Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. 14, 15 English 67 En Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page The picture is disturbed. The video software is copy-protected. No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 15 No appropriate input source has been selected. Rotate the RINPUT selector (or press dInput selection key) to select the desired input source. 23 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11 The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. 23 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Display “Signal Info” in the Option menu and check the input signal format. If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback component is properly connected to this unit (or a proper input source is selected). If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format cannot be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 82 “Audio Output” in “HDMI” is set to “TV”. Set “Audio Output” (Function Setup → HDMI → Audio Output) to the other setting. 59 A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the Option menu and set “Decoder Mode” to “Auto”. 48 When a monaural source sound field program is applied, sound of all channels are output from the center speaker for some surround decoders. Try another sound field program. 26 The playback component or speakers are not connected properly. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12, 15 Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, try the following. 1) Change the input source to another one. 2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not output from that speaker. Select another sound field program. 3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and enables output of that speaker. 6, 23, 26, 56 The volume of that speaker is set to minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and adjust the volume (Manual Setup → Speaker Level). 58 This unit is in the straight decode mode. Press OSTRAIGHT (or gSTRAIGHT) to turn off the straight decode mode. 29 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound field programs. Try another sound field program. 26 The speaker is malfunction. Check the speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator lights up, connect another speaker and check if sound is output. If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction. — Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. No sound is output from a specific speaker. 68 En Troubleshooting Problem Remedy See page “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front” and a Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signals is being played. Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Subwoofer” or “Both”. 57 “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Subwoofer” or “Front” and a 2-channel source is being played. Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Both”. 57 The source does not contain low frequency signals. Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto”. 49 The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Set the playback component properly referring to its operating instructions. — Noise/hum noise is heard. Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO 1/2 jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. 64 “Memory Guard!” is displayed and the setting cannot be changed. “Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 61 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — 15, 49 BASIC OPERATION “Extended Surround” in the Option menu is set to “Off”, or an input signal does not contain a surround back flag with “Extended Surround” set to “Auto”. PREPARATION No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. INTRODUCTION No sound is heard from the subwoofer. Cause ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 69 En Troubleshooting HDMI™ Problem No picture or sound. Cause Remedy See page The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The connected HDMI component does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 82 Tuner (FM/AM) Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy You are too far from the station transmitter or the input from the antenna is weak. See page Check the antenna connections. 18 Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. — Switch to monaural mode. 49 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. You are in an area far from a station or an input from the antenna is weak. Replace an outdoor antenna with more sensitive multi element antenna. — Tune in manually or by direct frequency tuning. 30 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 18 Use the manual tuning method. 30 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 18 The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing and properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna. 18 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — See page There are buzzing and whining noises. HD Radio™ Reception (U.S.A. model only) Problem Cause Remedy This unit cannot receive the HD Radio signals of the selected radio station. The radio station provides analog FM/AM radio service only. Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio service. 32 The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position. — “Audio Mode” in the Option menu is set to “Mono”. 70 En Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna. — Set “Audio Mode” to “Auto”. 49 Troubleshooting Problem Cause The radio station provides one audio program only. HD Radio information does not appear. The radio station does not provide the information. See page Remedy See page INTRODUCTION This unit cannot select other audio programs than the main program. Remedy iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only) Status message “YDS-10” does not support tag file transfer. Cause Tag data is not saved because of invalid data. Tag Already Stored Tag data for the same content has been already saved. Tag Storage full Remedy — See page — Tag data cannot be stored because the internal memory of this unit is full. Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. — iPod full Tags cannot be stored Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod because the HDD space of your iPod is full. Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make room and try again. — Transferring Failed Tag data cannot be transferred to your iPod. Check if the iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11) properly. — Storing Tag Tag data is being stored in the internal memory of this unit. Transferring Tag data is being transferred to your iPod. Tag(s)Sent Tag data has been transferred to your iPod. APPENDIX The selected HR Radio program (or song being played) does not support the iTunes Tagging feature. ADVANCED OPERATION Insufficient Data Use “YDS-11” to transfer tag data from this unit to your iPod. BASIC OPERATION Tag data cannot be transferred to your iPod when it is station in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS10). Cause PREPARATION Problem XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message CHECK XM TUNER Cause Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cable is connected to this unit. See page 34 English The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected to this unit. Remedy 71 En Troubleshooting Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM antenna cable has become damaged. Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged. 34 LOADING XM The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program information from the XM satellite signal. This message can also occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note that this unit may not respond to some operations while this message is displayed. This message should disappear in a few seconds in good signal conditions. If you see this message often, reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or XM information on the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level. 37 NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite signal. Something may be blocking the XM antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not properly aimed. Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or XM information on the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level. See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna installation information. 37 CHANNEL OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting. Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select another channel. — CHANNEL NOT AUTHORIZED You may be attempting to tune to an XM channel that is blocked or that you cannot receive with your XM subscription package. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of channels. For information on receiving this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ or contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346. — CHANNEL NOT AVAILABLE The selected channel is not available. The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number. This message may occur initially with a new XM MiniTuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again. — UPGRADE XM TUNER This unit has detected a XM CNP1000 which is not compatible with this unit. If you have connected the XM Mini-Tuner (CNP2000) and see this message, set this unit to standby, disconnect and reconnect the XM MiniTuner Home Dock and re-install the Mini-Tuner in the Home Dock and turn on this unit. If you continue to see this message with the XM Mini-Tuner, contact XM Satellite Radio at http://xmradio.com/ or 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800967-2346). If you have an incompatible XM CNP1000, contact XM for information on upgrading to the XM MiniTuner. — ---- No artist name or song title is available for this selection. No action required. — 72 En Troubleshooting SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) Status message Cause Remedy See page SIRIUS LOADING This unit is communicating with the SiriusConnect tuner. The message disappears normally within several tens of seconds. — CHECK SIRIUS TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly. Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and this unit. 38 The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. 38 NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner. Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit supports, 38 ACQUIRING SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or SIRIUS information on the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level. 42 UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the channel list. Wait until the updating is complete. — The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the subscription. 38 F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the firmware. Wait until the updating is complete. — CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the selected channel. URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) 38 Select another channel. 38 Select another channel. 38 SUBSCRIPTION UPDATED The subscription information is updated. INVALID CHANNEL The selected channel is currently out of service. Not Available The operation you made is not available. APPENDIX 38 ADVANCED OPERATION Check the connection of the antenna and SiriusConnect tuner. BASIC OPERATION The antenna is not connected to the SiriusConnect tuner properly. PREPARATION ANTENNA ERROR INTRODUCTION If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. English 73 En Troubleshooting Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 9 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. 65 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 64 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 64 If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, do the following. When the key does not work during DVD disc menu operation: press the dInput selection keys on the remote control again. When the key does not work during Option menu or Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for the current menu operation again. — Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. iPod™ Note • In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and GUI screen, check the connection of your iPod (page 17). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 74 En Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 17 Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock and then place it back in the dock. 43 Use an iPod supported by this unit. — Troubleshooting Status message Cause Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. See page 43 Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Bluetooth™ Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the middle of the pairing. The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the middle of establishing the connection. BASIC OPERATION Canceled The pairing is canceled. BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Not Found No Bluetooth components are found during a pairing process. Pairing must be performed on the both this unit and your Bluetooth component at the same time. Check whether your Bluetooth component is set to the paring mode and then try again. 45 No Bluetooth components are found during a Bluetooth connection. Check whether your Bluetooth component is turned on and then try again. 45 Locate your Bluetooth component within 10 meters (33 feet) of this unit and then try again. 45 USB The music files and folder cannot be browsed. Remedy See page The music files and folders are stored the locations other than the FAT area. Place the music files and folders in the FAT area. — You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB storage device. — This unit cannot recognize some characters used in the file name or folder name. Edit the file name or folder name using a PC and then try again. — The USB storage device is not compatible with mass storage class (except USB HDDs). Use a USB storage device that is compatible with mass storage class (except USB HDDs). — This unit does not recognize the USB storage device properly. Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 19 75 En English The USB storage device cannot be recognized. Cause APPENDIX The pairing is completed. ADVANCED OPERATION Completed Problem PREPARATION Status message INTRODUCTION Disconnected Remedy Troubleshooting Status message Cause Remedy See page USB Connected Your USB storage device is connected. Disconnected Your USB storage device has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB storage device. — This unit recognizes the USB storage device as an illegal device. Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 19 This unit cannot access your USB storage device. Try another USB storage device. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB storage device to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage device to the USB port of this unit. Access Error Unable to play The data is invalid. — 18, 19 Try resetting your USB storage device. — Try another USB storage device. — Auto Setup (YPAO) Notes • • • • If the an error or warning message appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again. Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal. Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct. If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center. Before Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 20 Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 61 During Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11 E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround channels are detected. Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11 E-3:NO PRNS SP Only signals from one of the presence L/ R channels are detected. Check the presence L/R speaker connections. 11 E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. If you connect only one surround back speaker, connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack. 11 E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed accurately due to loud ambient noise. Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. When using surround back speakers, you need to connect surround L/R speakers. 11 E-6:CHECK SUR. 76 En Troubleshooting Error message Cause Remedy See page The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto Setup”. 20 E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 20 10, 11 The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha dealer or service center. — E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was canceled due to an inappropriate user operation. Run “Auto Setup” again. 20 E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 20 PREPARATION Check whether the speakers are properly placed and connected. INTRODUCTION E-7:NO MIC After Auto Setup Cause Remedy See page Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker. If they are correct, the speakers work properly even when this message is displayed. 12 W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all speakers are placed in a similar environment. — Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 12 We recommended that you use speakers with the same or similar specifications. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. — W-4:CHECK PRNS Presence speakers were not detected during measurement with “Extra Speaker Assignment” set to “Presence”. Check the presence speaker connections and perform measurement again. If presence speakers are not connected, set the “Extra Speaker Assignment” to other than “Presence”. 11, 57 APPENDIX Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. ADVANCED OPERATION W-1:OUT OF PHASE BASIC OPERATION Error message English 77 En Glossary ■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1channel sources. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “flyaround” effects. ■ ■ Bi-amplification connection A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ Deep Color Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. 78 En Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. Glossary ■ DSD ■ DTS 96/24 ■ DTS Digital Surround DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Bluray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ DTS-HD Master Audio LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 79 En English DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ APPENDIX ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industrysupported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ■ BASIC OPERATION DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1channel format. FLAC This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. PREPARATION DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ INTRODUCTION Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals input from the HDMI jack. Glossary ■ “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. 80 En Sound field program information ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. BASIC OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ADVANCED OPERATION Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor. APPENDIX ■ PREPARATION Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. ■ INTRODUCTION ■ Elements of a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument. CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital audio systems. English ■ CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. 81 En Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. y • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following connections: – multi-channel analog audio input (page 16) – digital input (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • 480i/60 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz 82 En Specifications FM SECTION • Tuning Range ...................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono ...................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo................................................................74 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo......................................................................0.3/0.3% • Antenna Input (unbalanced)....................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range ......................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz GENERAL ADVANCED OPERATION • Power Supply ..........................................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz • Power Consumption ................................................... 400 W/500 VA • Standby Power Consumption (HDMI Control: Off, Standby Through: Off) ............ 0.2 W or less (HDMI Control: On, Standby Through: On) No Repeat................................................................ 1.2 W or less Repeat......................................................................... 3 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 171 x 365 mm (17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 14-3/8 in) • Weight .................................................................... 11.1 kg (24.5 lbs) BASIC OPERATION • Video Signal Type (Gray Back) ............................................... NTSC • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)............................NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ...................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ........................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion: Off) ............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion: Off) .................................................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB PREPARATION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 120 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω.................................140/175/205/250 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ...................................................................................... 1.25 dB • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO ................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ AV5, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD).................................. 60 mV or more AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.0 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT....................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front Speaker: Small) .................................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE2 OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV5 to FRONT .................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO ..........................................................................0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to AUDIO OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ........................................... 0.02% or less AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)................................. 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT) .............................................................................. 86 dB or more AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers) ............................................................................ 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front Speakers ......................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (Input Shorted) ................................60 dB/55 dB or more AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) .........................60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control...................................... Mute / –80 dB to +16.5 dB • Tone Control (Front Speakers) Bass Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz Bass Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut................................................. ±10 dB at 20 kHz Treble Turnover Frequency................................................. 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small) ..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .......................................................... 24 dB/oct. INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION * Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX English 83 En Index ■ Numerics 2ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 27 3D DSP, sound field parameter ..................... 51 5.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 6.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 7.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 7ch Enhancer, sound field program ............... 28 7ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 28 ■ A Action Game, sound field program ............... 27 Adaptive DRC, Volume, Function Setup ...... 60 Adjusting high frequency sound .................... 24 Adjusting low frequency sound ..................... 24 Advanced setup .............................................. 65 Adventure, sound field program .................... 26 All Channel Search mode, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 39 All Channel Search mode, XM Satellite Radio ................................... 35 AM antenna connection ................................. 18 AM tuning ..................................................... 30 Analog audio jack .......................................... 13 ANTENNA terminal, rear panel ...................... 5 Aspect, HDMI, Function Setup ..................... 60 AUDIO 1/2 jack, rear panel ............................. 5 Audio and video player connection ............... 15 Audio jack ..................................................... 13 AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ................................................... 4 Audio Mode, Option menu ............................ 49 AUDIO OUT jack, rear panel .......................... 5 Audio Output, HDMI, Function Setup .......... 59 Audio player connection ................................ 16 Auto Delay, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............... 59 Auto Preset, Option menu ............................. 49 Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ........... 76 Auto Setup, Speaker Setup ............................ 56 Automatic setup ............................................. 20 AV 1-6 jack, rear panel .................................... 5 AV OUT jack, rear panel ................................. 5 ■ B Basic operation, Setup menu ......................... 56 Bass Crossover Frequency, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 58 BI AMP, advanced setup ............................... 65 Bi-amplification connection .......................... 12 Bluetooth component playback ..................... 45 Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection ................................................. 17 Bluetooth, troubleshooting ............................ 75 ■ C Category Search mode, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 39 Category Search mode, XM Satellite Radio ................................... 35 Cellar Club, sound field program .................. 27 Center Image, decoder parameter .................. 54 Center Level, sound field parameter .............. 53 Center speaker ............................................... 10 Center Speaker, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 Center Width, decoder parameter .................. 54 Chamber, sound field program ...................... 27 Changing information on the front panel display ....................................................... 25 CINEMA DSP 3D ......................................... 29 CINEMA DSP 3D indicator, front panel display ...................................... 6 CINEMA DSP indicator, front panel display ...................................... 6 Clear Preset, Option menu ............................. 49 COAXIAL jack .............................................. 13 CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7 COMPONENT VIDEO jack ......................... 13 84 En Connect, Option menu ...................................50 Connecting audio and video player ................15 Connecting audio player ................................16 Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ......................................................17 Connecting external amplifier ........................17 Connecting external decoder ..........................16 Connecting FM antenna .................................18 Connecting iPod universal dock ....................17 Connecting multi-format player .....................16 Connecting power cable .................................19 Connecting projector ......................................14 Connecting set-top box ..................................15 Connecting SiriusConnect tuner ....................38 Connecting speaker ........................................11 Connecting speaker cable ...............................12 Connecting TV monitor .................................14 Connecting USB storage device ....................18 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ......34 Connecting Zone2 ..........................................62 Connections ....................................................10 Controlling other component, remote control ...........................................64 Controlling Zone2 ..........................................63 Cursor indicator, front panel display ................6 Cursors k / n / l / h, remote control .............................................7 ■ D Decode Type, sound field parameter .............53 Decoder Mode, Option menu .........................49 Decoder parameter .........................................54 Dialogue Lift, sound field parameter .............51 Dimension, decoder parameter .......................54 Dimer, Display, Function Setup .....................60 Direct number access, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................39 Direct number access, XM Satellite Radio ....35 Direct, sound field parameter .........................53 Disconnect, Option menu ...............................50 DISPLAY, remote control ...............................7 Displaying HD Radio information .................33 Displaying input signal information ..............25 Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio information ................................................42 Displaying XM Satellite Radio information ................................................37 DOCK terminal, rear panel ..............................5 Drama, sound field program ..........................27 DSP Level, sound field parameter .................51 DSP Parameter, Setup menu ..........................61 Dynamic Range, Sound Setup .......................58 ■ E Editing sound field program ..........................51 Editing surround decoder ...............................51 Effect Level, sound field parameter ...............54 ENTER, remote control ...................................7 EQ Type Select, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ............................................58 Equalizer, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .......58 Extended Surround, Option menu ..................49 External amplifier connection ........................17 External component operation key , remote control .............................................7 External decoder connection ..........................16 Extra Speaker Assignment, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ............................................57 ■ F FIRM UPDATE, advanced setup ...................65 Firmware update ............................................65 FM antenna connection ..................................18 FM tuning .......................................................30 FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h), front panel ...................................................4 Frequency tuning ............................................30 Front left speaker ...........................................10 Front panel ....................................................... 4 Front panel display .......................................... 6 Front Panel Display Scroll, Display, Function Setup .......................................... 60 Front panel display, front panel ....................... 4 Front right speaker ......................................... 10 Front Speaker, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 Function Setup, Setup menu .......................... 59 ■ G GEQ, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .............. 58 GUI Position, Display, Function Setup ......... 60 ■ H Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 27 Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 27 HD indicator, front panel display .................... 6 HD Radio ....................................................... 32 HD Radio key, remote control ......................... 7 HD Radio reception, troubleshooting ............ 70 HDMI Auto Lipsync, Lipsync, Sound Setup .............................................. 59 HDMI control ................................................ 47 HDMI Control, HDMI, Function Setup ........ 59 HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6 HDMI information ......................................... 82 HDMI jack ..................................................... 13 HDMI OUT/HDMI IN 1-4 jack, rear panel ..... 5 HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4 HDMI, Function Setup .................................. 59 HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 70 Headphones, use ............................................ 25 Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 24 High frequency sound adjustment ................. 24 ■ I INFO, front panel ............................................ 4 INFO, remote control ...................................... 7 INIT, advanced setup ..................................... 65 Initial Delay, sound field parameter .............. 52 Initial Volume, Volume, Function Setup ....... 60 Input Rename, Function Setup ...................... 61 Input selection key, remote control ................. 7 INPUT selector, front panel ............................. 4 Input signal information display .................... 25 Input source registration, SCENE function ... 24 Installing batteries, remote control .................. 9 iPod playback ................................................ 43 iPod universal dock connection ..................... 17 iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 74 iTunes Tagging, HD Radio ............................ 32 iTunes Tagging, troubleshooting ................... 71 ■ L LFE / Bass Out, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 Lipsync, Sound Setup .................................... 59 Liveness, sound field parameter .................... 52 ■ M MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4 MAIN/ZONE2, remote control ....................... 7 Manual Delay, Lipsync, Sound Setup ........... 59 Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................ 56 Max Volume, Volume, Function Setup ......... 60 Memory Guard, Setup menu ......................... 61 MEMORY, front panel .................................... 4 MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 65 MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel .................... 5 Mono Movie, sound field program ................ 27 Movie, sound field program .......................... 26 MULTI CH INPUT jack, rear panel ................ 5 Multi information display, front panel display ...................................... 6 Multi-format player connection ..................... 16 Multi-zone configuration ............................... 62 Index Music Video, sound field program .................27 MUTE indicator, front panel display ...............6 MUTE, remote control .....................................7 ■ N ■ O ■ P ■ U Updating firmware ........................................ 65 USB port, front panel ...................................... 4 USB storage device connection ..................... 18 USB storage device playback ........................ 46 USB, troubleshooting .................................... 75 ■ V VER, advanced setup .................................... 65 VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack, front panel ........ 4 VIDEO jack ................................................... 13 Video jack ..................................................... 13 Video Out, Option menu ............................... 50 Video/audio jack ........................................... 13 Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 29 VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 7 VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 4 VOLUME indicator, front panel display ......... 6 Volume Trim, Option menu .......................... 48 Volume, Function Setup ................................ 60 ■ X XM indicator, front panel display ................... 6 XM jack, rear panel ......................................... 5 XM Satellite Radio tuning ............................. 34 XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ............. 71 ■ APPENDIX R Y YPAO ............................................................ 20 YPAO, troubleshooting ................................. 76 ■ Z ZONE2 CONTROL, front panel ..................... 4 ZONE2 indicator, front panel display ............. 6 Zone2 Initial Volume, Zone2, Function Setup .......................................... 61 Zone2 Max Volume, Zone2, Function Setup .......................................... 61 ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4 ZONE2 OUT jack, rear panel ......................... 5 Zone2, Function Setup .................................. 61 “KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “pPOWER” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to “Part names and functions” on page 4. 85 En English Rear panel .........................................................5 Receiving remote control signal .....................17 Registering input source, SCENE function ....24 Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel ......................................................40 Registering sound field program, SCENE function ......................................................24 Registering XM Satellite Radio channel ........36 Remote control .................................................7 Remote control code resetting ........................64 Remote control code setting ...........................64 Remote control ID setting ..............................65 Remote control signal transmitter, remote control .............................................7 Remote control, controlling other component .....................64 Remote control, preparation .............................9 Remote control, troubleshooting ....................74 Remote control, use ..........................................9 REMOTE ID, advanced setup ........................65 REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel .................5 Repeat playback, iPod ....................................44 Repeat playback, USB storage device ...........46 Repeat, Option menu ......................................50 Resetting remote control code ........................64 Resolution, HDMI, Function Setup ...............59 T TAG indicator, front panel display ................. 6 Test Tone, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..... 58 The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 27 The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ....... 27 Tone control .................................................. 24 TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4 TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7 Transmitting remote control signal ............... 17 TRIGGER OUT jack, rear panel ..................... 5 Tuner (FM/AM), troubleshooting ................. 70 Tuner indicator, front panel display ................ 6 Tuner key, remote control ............................... 7 Tuning, AM ................................................... 30 Tuning, FM .................................................... 30 TUNING/CH l / h, front panel ................ 4 Turning off .................................................... 19 Turning on ..................................................... 19 TV control key, remote control ....................... 7 TV monitor connection ................................. 14 ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ■ S SCENE function ............................................ 23 SCENE IR, advanced setup ........................... 65 SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4 SCENE, remote control ................................... 7 Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 26 Selecting a source on GUI screen .................. 24 Selecting SCENE ........................................... 23 Setting Parental Lock, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 41 Setting remote control code ........................... 64 Setting remote control ID .............................. 65 Setup menu .................................................... 55 Setup menu basic operation ........................... 56 Shuffle playback, iPod ................................... 44 Shuffle playback, USB storage device .......... 46 Shuffle, Option menu ..................................... 50 Signal Info, Option menu .............................. 49 SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 29 SIRIUS indicator, front panel display ............. 6 SIRIUS jack, rear panel ................................... 5 SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ....................... 38 SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ....... 73 SLEEP indicator, front panel display .............. 6 Sleep timer ..................................................... 47 SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7 Sound field parameter .................................... 51 Sound field program editing .......................... 51 Sound field program registration, SCENE function ....................................... 24 Sound selection keys, remote control .............. 7 Sound Setup, Setup menu .............................. 58 SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7 SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 65 Speaker cable connection .............................. 12 Speaker Configuration, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 56 Speaker connection ........................................ 11 Speaker Distance, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 58 Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6 Speaker layout ............................................... 10 Speaker Level, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 58 Speaker placement ......................................... 10 Speaker Setup, Setup menu ........................... 56 SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5 Specifications ................................................. 83 Spectacle, sound field program ...................... 26 Sports, sound field program ........................... 27 SR PIN, advanced setup ................................ 65 Standby Through, HDMI, Function Setup .... 59 Staright decode mode .................................... 29 Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 28 STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4 Subwoofer ...................................................... 10 Subwoofer Phase, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 58 Sur. Back Initial Delay, sound field parameter ................................ 52 Sur. Back Liveness, sound field parameter ... 52 Sur. Back Room Size, sound field parameter ................................ 52 Sur. Initial Delay, sound field parameter ....... 52 Sur. Liveness, sound field parameter ............. 52 Sur. Room Size, sound field parameter ......... 52 Surround back left speaker ............................ 10 Surround Back Level, sound field parameter ................................ 53 Surround back right speaker .......................... 10 Surround back speaker ................................... 10 Surround Back Speaker, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 Surround decoder editing ............................... 51 BASIC OPERATION P. Initial Delay, sound field parameter ...........52 P. Liveness, sound field parameter ................52 P. Room Size, sound field parameter .............52 Pairing Bluetooth components .......................45 Pairing, Option menu .....................................50 Panorama, decoder parameter ........................54 Parental Lock, Option menu ..........................49 PHONES jack, front panel ...............................4 PHONO jack, rear panel ..................................5 Placing speaker ...............................................10 PLII Game, decoder .......................................28 PLII Movie, decoder ......................................28 PLII Music, decoder .......................................28 PLIIx Game, decoder .....................................28 PLIIx Movie, decoder ....................................28 PLIIx Music, decoder .....................................28 Power cable connection ..................................19 Power cable, rear panel ....................................5 POWER, remote control ..................................7 PRE OUT jack, rear panel ................................5 Presence L Level, sound field parameter .......53 Presence left speaker ......................................11 Presence R Level, sound field parameter .......53 Presence right speaker ....................................11 PRESET l / h, front panel .........................4 Preset Search mode, SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................40 Preset Search mode, XM Satellite Radio .......36 Preset tuning ...................................................30 Pro Logic, decoder .........................................28 PROGRAM selector, front panel .....................4 Projector connection .......................................14 PURE DIRECT, front panel .............................4 ■ PREPARATION ON SCREEN, remote control ..........................7 OPTICAL jack ...............................................13 OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel .................4 Option menu ...................................................48 OPTION, remote control ..................................7 Surround L Level, sound field parameter ...... 53 Surround left speaker .................................... 10 Surround R Level, sound field parameter ..... 53 Surround right speaker .................................. 10 Surround Speaker, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 57 INTRODUCTION Neo:6 Cinema, decoder ..................................28 Neo:6 Music, decoder ....................................28 Neural Sur., decoder .......................................28 Numeric key, remote control ............................7 RETURN, remote control ................................ 7 Reverb Delay, sound field parameter ............ 53 Reverb Level, sound field parameter ............. 53 Reverb Time, sound field parameter ............. 53 Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 27 Room Size, sound field parameter ................. 52 List of remote control codes TV A.R. Systems Acme Acura ADC Admiral 0274 0260 0261, 0273 0259 0100, 0224, 0257, 0258, 0259, 0264, 0265 Advent 0204 Adventura 0107 Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328 Agashi 0327, 0328 Agazi 0259 Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Aim 0274 Aiwa 0028, 0297 Akai 0063, 0096, 0101, 0205, 0231, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Akiba 0262, 0274 Akura 0259, 0262, 0273, 0274 Alaron 0327 Alba 0243, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0266, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0294, 0300, 0327 Albatron 0222 Alcyon 0249 Alleron 0105 Allorgan 0328 Allstar 0268, 0274 America Action 0225 AMOi 0326 Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275, 0328 Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262, 0273, 0274 Amtron 0104 Anam 0225, 0261 Anam National 0102, 0104 Anglo 0261, 0273 Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261, 0273, 0274 Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261, 0263, 0273, 0274 AOC 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103 Apex 0061, 0117, 0139 Arcam 0327, 0328 Arcam Delta 0260 Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274 Arthur Martin 0275 ASA 0257, 0265 Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274 Astra 0261 Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262, 0327, 0328 Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Atori 0261, 0273 Auchan 0275 Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328 Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225 i Ausind Autovox Aventura Awa Axion Baird Bang & Olufsen Basic Line Bastide Baur Bazin Beko Belcor Bell & Howell Benq Beon Best Bestar Binatone Blue Sky Blue Star Boots BPL Bradford Brandt Brillian Brinkmann Brionvega Britannia Brockwood Broksonic Bruns BTC Bush Candle Capsonic Carena Carnivale Carrefour Carver Cascade Casio Cathay CCE Celebrity Celera Centurion Century CGE Changhong Chimei Cimline Citizen City Clarion Clarivox 0249 0249, 0257, 0259, 0260, 0328 0097 0327, 0328 0206 0328 0230, 0257 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0260, 0328 0271, 0274 0328 0243, 0269, 0274, 0282, 0351, 0357, 0372, 0380 0090 0065, 0100 0051, 0160, 0315 0268, 0271, 0274 0243 0243, 0268, 0274 0260, 0328 0262, 0274 0270 0260, 0328 0270, 0274 0104, 0225 0267, 0272 0228 0274 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274 0260, 0327, 0328 0090 0063, 0225 0257 0262 0261, 0262, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0286, 0294, 0300, 0328, 0329, 0351, 0388, 0394, 0413 0072, 0090, 0096, 0107 0259 0274 0096 0266 0088 0261, 0273, 0274 0317 0268, 0271, 0274 0229, 0328 0057, 0101 0117 0268, 0271, 0274 0257 0243, 0249 0117 0323 0261, 0273 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0104 0261, 0273 0225 0271 Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0269, 0273, 0274, 0328 CMS 0327 CMS Hightec 0328 Coby 0151 Colortyme 0072, 0090 Commercial Solutions 0071 Concerto 0072, 0090 Concorde 0261, 0273 Condor 0243, 0260, 0268, 0269, 0273, 0274, 0327 Contec 0225, 0260, 0261, 0266, 0273, 0327 Contec/Cony 0094, 0104 Continental Edison 0267 Cosmel 0261, 0273 Craig 0104, 0225 Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249, 0257 Crown 0104, 0225, 0243, 0249, 0261, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274 CS Electronics 0260, 0262, 0327 CTC Clatronic 0263 CTX 0159 Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072, 0085, 0088, 0090, 0096, 0099, 0224 CXC 0104, 0225 Cybertron 0262 Cytron 0202 Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090, 0103, 0119, 0245, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0281, 0285, 0303, 0321, 0327, 0328, 0344, 0361, 0387 Dainichi 0262, 0327 Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 Dantax 0243, 0271 Dawa 0274 Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090, 0261, 0273 De Graaf 0264 Decca 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Dell 0167, 0195 Denver 0308, 0312 Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274 Diamant 0274 Diamond 0327 DiamondVision 0213, 0221 Dimensia 0099 Disney 0137 Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 Dream Vision 0415, 0416 DTS 0261, 0273 Dual 0260, 0274, 0328 Dual-Tec 0260, 0261 Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108, 0257, 0260, 0263, 0328 Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133, 0225 Dux 0271 Dwin 0224 Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274 Dynex 0181, 0182 Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274, 0328 Elcit 0257 Electa 0270 ELECTRO TECH 0261 Electroband 0057, 0101 Electrograph 0226 Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101, 0102 Element 0180 Elin 0260, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327 Elite 0262, 0268, 0274 Elman 0263 Elta 0261, 0273, 0327 Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077, 0082, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0095, 0097, 0104, 0105, 0119, 0225, 0243, 0257, 0274 Emprex 0200 Envision 0072, 0090, 0096 Epson 0156, 0201, 0309 Erres 0268, 0271, 0274 ESA 0097 ESC 0328 Etron 0261 Eurofeel 0328 Euro-Feel 0259 Euroline 0271 Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328 Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268, 0274 Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268, 0274, 0327, 0328 Expert 0275 Exquisit 0274 Fenner 0261, 0273 Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272 Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274, 0327 Filsai 0328 Finlandia 0264 Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260, 0263, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268 Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257, 0260, 0266, 0269, 0328 Flint 0268, 0274 Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258, 0260, 0271, 0327 Formenti/Phoenix 0327 Fortress 0257, 0258 Fraba 0243, 0274 Friac 0243 Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264, 0265, 0273, 0328 Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025, 0105, 0328 Fujitsu General 0328 Fujitsu Siemens 0425, 0426, 0427, 0428, 0429 Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0097, 0104, 0105, 0225, 0259 Futuretech 0104, 0225 Galaxi 0269, 0274 Galaxis 0243, 0274 Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227 GBC 0261, 0266, 0273 GE 0069, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0090, 0099, 0102, 0106, 0112, 0131 Geant Casino 0275 GEC 0260, 0265, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273 General Technic 0261, 0273 Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268, 0274 GFM 0177, 0210 Giant 0328 Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096, 0108 GoldHand 0327 Goldline 0274 GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0096, 0103, 0243, 0260, 0261, 0264, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0322, 0328, 0395, 0399, 0412 Gorenje 0243, 0269 GPM 0262 GPX 0211 Gradiente 0162 Graetz 0265 Granada 0249, 0260, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0275, 0328 Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270, 0271 Gronic 0328 Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249, 0274, 0356 Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225 Haier 0187, 0207 Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327, 0328 Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090 Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328 Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260, 0261, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274 Hantor 0274 Harman/Kardon 0088 Harvard 0104, 0225 Harwood 0273, 0274 Havermy 0224 HCM 0259, 0260, 0261, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0328 Hema 0273, 0328 Hewlett Packard 0146 Higashi 0327 HiLine 0274 Hinari Hisawa Hisense Hitachi Hornyphon Hoshai Huanyu Hygashi Hyper Hypson Hyundai Iberia ICE ICeS Ilo IMA Imperial Indiana Infinity InFocus Ingelen Ingersol Initial Inno Hit Innovation Insignia Inteq Interactive Interbuy Interfunk International Intervision Irradio Isukai ITC ITS ITT ITV Janeil JBL JC Penney JCB Jensen JVC 0261, 0262, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274 0262, 0270, 0275 0165 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0072, 0090, 0094, 0173, 0254, 0255, 0256, 0260, 0264, 0265, 0266, 0274, 0285, 0300, 0319, 0328, 0348, 0349, 0385, 0402, 0410 0268, 0274 0262 0260, 0327 0260, 0327, 0328 0260, 0261, 0273, 0327, 0328 0259, 0260, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0275, 0328 0223 0274 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0327 0198, 0203 0104 0243, 0249, 0265, 0268, 0269, 0274 0268, 0271, 0274 0088 0168, 0277, 0313, 0397, 0430 0265 0261, 0273 0203 0249, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 0259, 0261 0182, 0188, 0190, 0209 0076 0243 0261, 0273 0243, 0257, 0265, 0268, 0271, 0274 0327 0243, 0259, 0260, 0263, 0274, 0328 0249, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274 0262, 0274 0260, 0328 0262, 0268, 0270, 0274, 0327 0261, 0265 0261, 0271, 0274 0107 0088 0072, 0073, 0085, 0090, 0099, 0103, 0106 0057, 0101 0072, 0090 0017, 0018, 0019, 0092, 0093, 0094, 0106, 0251, 0252, 0266, 0268, 0293, 0360, 0379 Kaisui Kamosonic Kamp Kapsch Karcher Kawasho KEC Kendo Kenwood KIC Kingsley KLH Kloss Novabeam Kneissel Kolster Konka Korpel Korting Kosmos Koyoda KTV Kyoto Lasat Lenco Lenoir Leyco LG LG/GoldStar Liesenk Liesenkotter Life Lifetec Lloyds Loewe Loewe Opta Logik Luma Lumatron Lux May Luxman Luxor LXI M Electronic MAG Magnadyne Magnafon 0260, 0261, 0262, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0260 0260, 0327 0265 0243, 0260, 0261, 0271, 0274 0072, 0090, 0101, 0327 0225 0243, 0263, 0264, 0274 0072, 0090, 0096 0328 0260, 0327 0117 0104, 0107 0243, 0250, 0274 0268, 0274 0262 0268, 0271, 0274 0243, 0257 0274 0261 0085, 0096, 0104, 0225, 0229, 0260, 0328 0327, 0328 0243 0261, 0273 0260, 0261, 0273 0259, 0268, 0271, 0274 0016, 0038, 0039, 0077, 0103, 0145, 0222, 0243, 0246, 0253, 0260, 0261, 0264, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0290, 0299, 0316, 0327, 0328, 0351, 0359, 0367, 0382, 0384, 0389, 0396 0246 0271 0274 0259, 0261 0259, 0261, 0273, 0274 0273 0243, 0250, 0274, 0280, 0306, 0347 0257, 0268, 0271 0100 0264, 0271, 0273, 0274 0264, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 0268 0072, 0090 0260, 0264, 0328 0061, 0065, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0088, 0099 0260, 0261, 0265, 0267, 0268, 0271 0050 0257, 0263, 0271 0249, 0260, 0263, 0327 Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0095, 0096, 0098, 0114, 0115, 0129, 0134, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0210 Magnum 0259, 0261 Majestic 0100 Mandor 0259 Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090, 0096, 0158, 0268, 0271, 0274 Marelli 0257 Mark 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Masuda 0328 Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328, 0405 Matsushita 0067 Maxent 0193, 0226 Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274 Medion 0259, 0261, 0274 Megapower 0222 Megatron 0072, 0077 MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Melvox 0275 Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077, 0100, 0103, 0133, 0219, 0261, 0273 Memphis 0261, 0273 Mercury 0273, 0274 Metz 0257 MGA 0072, 0077, 0090, 0096, 0103 Micromaxx 0259, 0261 Microstar 0259, 0261 Midland 0069, 0071, 0073, 0076, 0085, 0106, 0108 Minerva 0249 Minoka 0268, 0274 Mintek 0203 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0072, 0077, 0090, 0103, 0196, 0224, 0257, 0266, 0268, 0274, 0298, 0371 Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250, 0260, 0327, 0328 Monivision 0222 Montgomery Ward 0100 Motion 0249 Motorola 0102, 0224 MTC 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103, 0243, 0327 Multi System 0271 Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229, 0243, 0260, 0261, 0263, 0264, 0266, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Murphy 0260, 0327 NAD 0061, 0072, 0077 Naonis 0264 NEC 0026, 0053, 0072, 0090, 0096, 0102, 0103, 0266, 0328 ii Neckermann NEI Net-TV Neufunk New Tech New World NewTech Nicamagic Nikkai Nikko Nobliko Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Nordvision Novatronic Oceanic Okano Olevia ONCEAS Onwa Opera Oppo Optimus Optoma Optonica Orbit Orion Orline Osaki Oso Otto Versand Pael Palladium Palsonic Panama Panasonic Panavision Pathe Cinema Pausa Penney Perdio Perfekt Philco Philharmonic Philips iii 0243, 0257, 0260, 0264, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 0268, 0271, 0274 0226 0273, 0274 0261, 0268 0262 0273, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0259, 0260, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0072, 0077, 0096 0249, 0260, 0263, 0327 0265 0155 0328 0257, 0265, 0267, 0268 0271 0274 0265, 0275 0243, 0269, 0274 0052, 0140, 0149, 0154, 0157 0260 0104, 0225 0274 0208 0065, 0067 0194 0224 0268, 0274 0121, 0192, 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0329 0274 0259, 0260, 0262, 0274, 0328 0262 0258, 0260, 0266, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0243, 0260, 0269, 0274, 0328 0328 0259, 0260, 0261, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0006, 0007, 0066, 0067, 0068, 0069, 0070, 0102, 0106, 0113, 0147, 0215, 0241, 0265, 0274, 0279, 0310, 0332, 0334, 0368, 0374 0274 0243, 0250, 0260, 0275, 0327 0261, 0273 0061, 0069, 0071, 0077, 0096 0274, 0327 0274 0072, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0094, 0096, 0102, 0103, 0243, 0249, 0257, 0274 0260, 0328 0040, 0088, 0089, 0090, 0091, 0094, 0098, 0099, 0102, 0114, 0135, 0143, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0210, 0212, 0232, 0233, 0257, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0278, 0287, 0301, 0302, 0307, 0311, 0314, 0330, 0331, 0333, 0337, 0338, 0339, 0341, 0343, 0345, 0355, 0363, 0365, 0377, 0378, 0381, 0383, 0406, 0409, 0414 Philips Magnavox 0089, 0114, 0115 Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072, 0090, 0243, 0265, 0267, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0408 Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273, 0274 Playsonic 0328 Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184, 0220 Poppy 0261, 0273 Portland 0072, 0085, 0090, 0103 Prandoni-Prince 0249, 0264 Precision 0260, 0328 Prima 0161, 0207, 0261, 0265, 0273 Princeton 0222 Prism 0069, 0106 Profex 0261, 0273 Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274 Proline 0268, 0274 Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099 Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 Protech 0259, 0260, 0261, 0263, 0268, 0271, 0328 Proton 0072, 0077, 0090, 0094 Protron 0150 PROVIEW 0050, 0164 Provision 0271, 0274 Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108 Pye 0268, 0271, 0274, 0296, 0338 Pymi 0261, 0273 Quandra Vision 0275 Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102, 0106 Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Questa 0266 Radialva 0274 RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077, 0096, 0225, 0274 RadioShack/Realistic 0072, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0099, 0104 Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Radiomarelli 0257, 0274 Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273, 0274 Rank 0266 RCA Realistic Recor Redstar Reflex Revox Rex RFT Rhapsody R-Line Roadstar Robotron Rowa Royal Lux RTF Runco Saba Saisho Salora Sambers Sampo Samsung Sandra Sansui Sanyo SBR Sceptre Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scotch Scott Sears SEG SEI 0071, 0072, 0073, 0074, 0075, 0090, 0099, 0102, 0103, 0109, 0120, 0179, 0218 0065, 0077, 0096, 0225 0274 0274 0274 0243, 0268, 0271, 0274 0259, 0264, 0265 0243, 0250, 0257 0327 0268, 0271, 0274 0259, 0261, 0262, 0273 0257 0327, 0328 0243 0257 0076, 0096, 0108 0257, 0265, 0267, 0272, 0376 0259, 0260, 0261, 0273, 0328 0264, 0265 0249, 0263 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0226 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0072, 0077, 0084, 0085, 0086, 0087, 0090, 0094, 0096, 0103, 0118, 0217, 0229, 0235, 0236, 0237, 0243, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0284, 0295, 0327, 0328, 0336, 0346, 0390, 0407 0260, 0327, 0328 0063, 0121, 0268, 0274 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0065, 0090, 0141, 0191, 0243, 0250, 0260, 0266, 0273, 0291, 0327, 0328, 0370, 0373, 0391 0271, 0274 0166, 0185 0265 0260, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0287, 0300, 0328, 0364, 0366 0072, 0077 0072, 0077, 0090, 0094, 0104, 0105, 0199, 0225 0061, 0065, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0088, 0090, 0097, 0099, 0105 0259, 0260, 0263, 0266, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0300, 0327, 0328 0274 SEI-Sinudyne Seleco Sencora Sentra Serino Sharp Sheng Chia Shogun Siarem Sierra Siesta Signature Silva Silver Singer Sinudyne Skantic Solavox Sonitron Sonoko Sonolor Sontec Sony Sound & Vision Soundesign Soundwave Squareview SSS Standard Starlite Stenway Stern Strato Stylandia Sunkai Sunstar Sunwood Superla Superscan SuperTech Supra Supre-Macy Supreme Susumu Sutron SVA Sydney 0257, 0263, 0265 0264, 0265, 0266 0261, 0273 0273 0327 0009, 0010, 0011, 0072, 0080, 0081, 0082, 0083, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0110, 0148, 0183, 0216, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0258, 0266, 0288, 0304, 0324, 0325, 0340, 0358, 0362, 0369, 0386, 0392, 0398, 0400, 0401, 0403 0224 0090 0257, 0263, 0274 0268, 0274 0243 0100 0327 0266 0257, 0263, 0275 0257, 0263, 0271, 0274 0265 0265 0243, 0328 0259, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 0265, 0275 0243, 0268, 0271, 0274 0041, 0057, 0058, 0059, 0060, 0101, 0116, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0142, 0169, 0170, 0171, 0172, 0174, 0234, 0261, 0266, 0276, 0289, 0292, 0393, 0411 0262, 0263 0072, 0077, 0090, 0104, 0105, 0225 0268, 0271, 0274 0097 0090, 0104, 0225 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0104, 0225, 0271, 0273, 0274 0270 0264, 0265 0273, 0274 0328 0261 0273, 0274 0261, 0268, 0273, 0274 0260, 0327, 0328 0095, 0224 0273, 0274, 0327 0261, 0273 0107 0057, 0101 0262 0261, 0273 0197 0260, 0327, 0328 Sylvania Symphonic Syntax Syntax-Brillian Sysline Sytong Tandy Tashiko Tatung TCM Teac Tec Technics TechniSat Techwood TEDELEX Teknika Teleavia Telecor Telefunken Telegazi Telemeister Telesonic Telestar Teletech Teleton Televideon Televiso Tensai Tesmet Tevion Texet Thomson Thorn TMK TNCi Tokai Tokyo Tomashi Toshiba Totevision Towada Trakton Trans Continens Transtec Trident 0072, 0088, 0089, 0090, 0091, 0095, 0096, 0097, 0098, 0175, 0177, 0210 0097, 0104, 0108, 0133, 0210, 0225 0149 0149 0271 0327 0224, 0258, 0260, 0262, 0265, 0328 0260, 0264, 0266, 0327, 0328 0102, 0227, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 0259, 0261 0274, 0328 0260, 0261, 0273, 0328 0067, 0069, 0106 0320, 0417, 0418, 0419 0069, 0072, 0090, 0106 0328 0072, 0085, 0088, 0090, 0094, 0100, 0103, 0104, 0105, 0225 0267 0274, 0328 0267, 0268, 0272, 0274 0274 0274 0274 0274 0261, 0271, 0273, 0274 0260, 0328 0327 0275 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0268 0259, 0261 0260, 0273, 0327, 0328 0238, 0239, 0240, 0260, 0267, 0268, 0272, 0274, 0335 0271, 0274 0072, 0077, 0090 0076 0268, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0270 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0061, 0062, 0063, 0064, 0065, 0122, 0123, 0124, 0128, 0130, 0132, 0139, 0214, 0244, 0266, 0283, 0305, 0328, 0329, 0342, 0350, 0352, 0353, 0354, 0375, 0404 0085 0265, 0328 0328 0274, 0328 0327 0328 Triumph Uher 0274 0243, 0249, 0265, 0268, 0274 Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263, 0274, 0327 Unic Line 0274 United 0271 Universum 0243, 0249, 0259, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 Univox 0274 Vector Research 0096 Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273, 0274 Victor 0093, 0266, 0268 VIDEOLOGIC 0327 Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327, 0328 VideoSystem 0268, 0274 Videotechnic 0327, 0328 Vidikron 0088 Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090, 0103 Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226, 0318 Viking 0107 Viore 0198 Visiola 0260, 0327 Vision 0268, 0274, 0328 Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160, 0227, 0420, 0421, 0422, 0423, 0424 Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274 Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264, 0265, 0268, 0274 Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328 Wards 0072, 0077, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0096, 0098, 0099, 0100, 0103, 0105 Watson 0268, 0271, 0274 Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327 Waycon 0061 Wega 0257, 0266, 0274 Wegavox 0273 Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142 White Westinghouse 0008, 0119, 0260, 0263, 0271, 0274, 0327 Wincom 0055, 0056 Xrypton 0274 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103 Yamishi 0274, 0328 Yokan 0274 Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Yorx 0262 Zanussi 0264, 0328 Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078, 0079, 0090, 0100, 0108, 0111 VCR ABS 1066 Adventura Adyson Aiwa 1023 1090 1023, 1072, 1073, 1074 Akai 1071, 1073 Akiba 1079, 1090 Akura 1073, 1079, 1090 Alba 1074, 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Alienware 1066 Ambassador 1076 American High 1022 Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091 Anitech 1079, 1090 Apex 1010 ASA 1077, 1078 Asha 1020 Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078, 1079, 1090 Audio Dynamics 1018 Audiosonic 1091 Audiovox 1021 Baird 1072, 1073, 1075, 1091 Bang & Olufsen 1067 Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Baur 1078 Beaumark 1020 Bell & Howell 1019 Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091 Black Panther Line 1075, 1091 Blaupunkt 1078 Bondstec 1076, 1090 Broksonic 1054 Bush 1074, 1075, 1079, 1090, 1091, 1097, 1099, 1109, 1139 Calix 1021 Candle 1020, 1021 Canon 1022 Cathay 1091 Catron 1076 CGE 1072, 1073 Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090 CineVision 1058 Citizen 1020, 1021 Clatronic 1076, 1090 Colortyme 1018 Condor 1075, 1076, 1091 Craig 1020, 1021 Crown 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022 Cybernex 1020 CyberPower 1066 Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076, 1091, 1116, 1141 Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091 Dantax 1074 Daytron 1075, 1091 DBX 1018 De Graaf 1078 Decca 1072, 1073, 1078 Dell 1066 Denko 1090 DiamondVision 1050 DigiFusion 1092 DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1065 Dish Network 1064 Dishpro 1064 Dual 1073, 1078, 1091 Dumont Durabrand Dynatech Echostar Elbe Elcatech Electrohome Electrophonic Elsay Elta Emerson 1072, 1078 1032 1023 1064 1091 1090 1021 1021 1090 1079, 1090, 1091 1021, 1022, 1023, 1070, 1090 ESC 1075, 1091 Etzuko 1079, 1090 Expressvu 1064 Ferguson 1073 Fidelity 1072, 1090 Finlandia 1078 Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078 Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079, 1090 Fisher 1019 Flint 1074 Formenti/Phoenix 1078 Frontech 1076 Fuji 1022 Fujitsu 1072 Funai 1023, 1072 Galaxy 1072 Garrard 1023 Gateway 1066 GBC 1076, 1079 GE 1020, 1022 GEC 1078 Geloso 1079 General 1076 General Technic 1074 GOI 1064 GoldHand 1079, 1090 Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072, 1077 Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Gradiente 1023 Graetz 1073 Granada 1078 Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Grundig 1078, 1079 Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091 Harley Davidson 1023 Harman/Kardon 1018 Harwood 1090 HCM 1079, 1090 Headquarter 1019 Hewlett Packard 1066 Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090, 1091 Hisawa 1074 Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078, 1089, 1108, 1124 HNS 1060 Howard Computers 1066 HP 1066 HTS 1064 Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061 Hughes Network Systems 1038, 1060 Humax 1035, 1060, 1094 Hush 1066 Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090, 1091 iv iBUYPOWER Impego Imperial Inno Hit 1066 1076 1072 1075, 1076, 1078, 1079, 1090, 1091 Innovation 1074 Instant Replay 1022 Interbuy 1077, 1090 Interfunk 1078 Intervision 1072, 1091 Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090 ITT 1073 ITV 1075, 1077, 1091 JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022 JCL 1022 JVC 1011, 1012, 1013, 1014, 1015, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1019, 1028, 1035, 1064, 1073, 1085, 1117, 1130, 1131, 1133, 1134, 1135, 1136 Kaisui 1079, 1090 Karcher 1078 Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076, 1090 Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073 Kodak 1021, 1022 Korpel 1079, 1090 Kyoto 1090 Lenco 1075 Leyco 1079, 1090 LG 1021, 1053, 1072, 1077, 1088, 1100, 1106, 1125, 1143 Lifetec 1074 Linksys 1066 Lloyd’s 1023 Loewe Opta 1077, 1078 Logik 1079, 1090 Lumatron 1075, 1091 Luxor 1090 LXI 1021 M Electronic 1072 Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044, 1070 Magnin 1021 Manesth 1079, 1090 Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022, 1078 Mark 1091 Marta 1021 Matsui 1074, 1077 Matsushita 1022 Media Center PC 1066 Mediator 1078 Medion 1074 MEI 1022 Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023, 1032, 1048, 1069, 1072, 1077 Memphis 1079, 1090 MGN Technology 1020 Micromaxx 1074 Microsoft 1066 Microstar 1074 Migros 1072 Mind 1066 Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078 Motorola 1022 MTC 1020 v Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072, 1076, 1078, 1079, 1090 Murphy 1072 NEC 1018, 1019, 1073 Neckermann 1073, 1078 NEI 1078 Nesco 1079, 1090 Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091 Nikko 1021 Niveus Media 1066 Noblex 1020 Nokia 1073, 1091 Nordmende 1073 Northgate 1066 Oceanic 1072, 1073 Okano 1074, 1090, 1091 Olympus 1022 Optimus 1021 Orion 1033, 1069, 1074, 1097, 1139 Orson 1072 Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079, 1090 Otto Versand 1078 Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079, 1090 Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009, 1022, 1026, 1042, 1043, 1068, 1082, 1101, 1126, 1132 Pathe Marconi 1073 Perdio 1072 Philco 1022, 1090 Philips 1022, 1030, 1035, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1044, 1055, 1060, 1078, 1084, 1095, 1096, 1104, 1105, 1111, 1113, 1122, 1124, 1127, 1128, 1129 Philips Magnavox 1030 Phonola 1078 Pilot 1021 Pioneer 1078, 1118 Polaroid 1010, 1049 Portland 1075, 1076, 1091 Prinz 1072 Profex 1079 Proline 1072 Proscan 1065 Prosonic 1074, 1091 Pulsar 1032 Pye 1052, 1078 Quarter 1019 Quartz 1019 Quasar 1022 Quelle 1072, 1078 Radialva 1090 RadioShack 1021 RadioShack/Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Radiola 1078 Radix 1021 Randex 1021 RCA 1020, 1022, 1025, 1035, 1040, 1047, 1060, 1065 Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 ReplayTV 1041, 1068 Rex 1073 RFT 1076, 1078, 1090 Ricavision Roadstar 1066 1075, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Royal 1090 Runco 1032 Saba 1073 Saisho 1074, 1079 Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038, 1040, 1046, 1060, 1080, 1107, 1110, 1112, 1121, 1123, 1140, 1142 Samurai 1076, 1090 Sanky 1032 Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069, 1073 Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114 Saville 1091 SBR 1078 Schaub Lorenz 1072, 1073 Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1078, 1079, 1090, 1091 Sears 1019, 1021, 1022 SEG 1079, 1090, 1091 SEI-Sinudyne 1078 Seleco 1073 Sentra 1076, 1090 Sentron 1079, 1090 Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057, 1081, 1115, 1137 Shintom 1079, 1090 Shivaki 1077 Shogun 1020 Siemens 1077 Silva 1077 Silver 1091 Singer 1022 Sinudyne 1078 Solavox 1076 Sonic Blue 1041, 1068 Sonneclair 1090 Sonoko 1075, 1091 Sontec 1077 Sony 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1024, 1027, 1036, 1062, 1066, 1083, 1098, 1103, 1138 Stack 1066 Stack 9 1066 Standard 1075, 1091 Stern 1091 STS 1022 Sunkai 1074 Sunstar 1072 Suntronic 1072 Sunwood 1079, 1090 Superscan 1070 Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044, 1052, 1070 Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090 Systemax 1066 Tagar Systems 1066 Taisho 1074 Tandberg 1091 Tandy 1019 Tashiko 1021, 1072 Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078 TCM 1074, 1093, 1120 Teac 1023, 1091 Tec 1076, 1090, 1091 Technics 1022 Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023 Teleavia 1073 Telefunken Teletech Tenosal Tensai 1073 1090, 1091 1079, 1090 1072, 1077, 1079, 1090 Tevion 1074 Thomson 1073, 1087 Thorn 1073 Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037, 1039, 1040, 1060, 1061, 1062 TMK 1020 Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090 Tonsai 1079 Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034, 1051, 1063, 1066, 1073, 1078, 1086, 1099, 1102, 1119, 1144 Totevision 1020, 1021 Touch 1066 Towada 1079, 1090 Towika 1079, 1090 TVA 1076 Uher 1077 UltimateTV 1065 Ultravox 1091 Unitech 1020 United Quick Star 1075, 1091 Universum 1072, 1077, 1078 Vector Research 1018 Video Concepts 1018 Videon 1074 Videosonic 1020 Viewsonic 1066 Voodoo 1066 Wards 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Weltblick 1077 XR-1000 1022, 1023 Yamaha 1018, 1019 Yamishi 1079, 1090 Yokan 1079, 1090 Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090 Zenith 1032 ZT Group 1066 DVD 4Kus Accurian Advent AEG Airis Aiwa Akai 2097 2220 2169, 2201 2312 2318 2272 2170, 2195, 2225, 2227 Akura 2310 Alba 2018, 2232, 2247, 2259, 2264 Alco 2199 Alize 2315 Allegro 2215 Amitech 2312 Amphion MediaWorks 2145 AMW 2145, 2313 Apex 2044, 2045, 2046, 2047, 2076, 2208, 2209 Apple 2163 Arrgo 2216 Asono 2318 Aspire 2140, 2202 Astar 2162 ATACOM Audiovox Avious Awa Axion Bang & Olufsen Baze BBK Bellagio Best Buy Blaupunkt Blue Parade Boghe Brainwave Brandt Broksonic Bush 2318 2111, 2199 2317 2313 2171 2210 2317 2318 2313 2309 2209 2207 2300 2312 2198, 2238 2192, 2195 2018, 2060, 2248, 2264, 2301, 2308, 2317, 2350, 2368 California Audio Labs 2197 Cambridge Audio 2304 CAT 2306, 2307 CAVS 2146 Centrum 2307 CGV 2304, 2312 Changhong 2222 Cinetec 2313 CineVision 2191, 2215 Clatronic 2308, 2317 Coby 2077, 2124, 2314 Conia 2301 Continental Edison 2313 Crown 2312 C-Tech 2305 Curtis Mathes 2217 CVG 2299 CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216, 2233, 2258 Cytron 2166 Daenyx 2313 Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280, 2299, 2312, 2313, 2326, 2376 Daewoo International 2313 Dalton 2311 Dansai 2303, 2312 Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313 Dayton 2313 DEC 2308 Decca 2312 Denon 2105, 2147, 2197, 2286 Denver 2288, 2308, 2310, 2314 Denzel 2302 Desay 2159 Diamond 2304, 2305 DiamondVision 2179, 2186 Disney 2078, 2088 DK Digital 2257 Dmtech 2226 Dual 2302 Durabrand 2218 DVX 2305 Easy Home 2309 Eclipse 2304 E-Dem 2318 Electrohome 2312 Elin 2312 Elta 2263, 2312, 2315 Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219 Enterprise 2211 Enzer Epson ESA Finlux Fintec Fisher Funai Gateway GE Gericom GFM Giec Global Solutions Global Sphere Go Video Goodmans 2302 2165 2219 2304, 2312, 2317 2299 2212 2219 2097 2079, 2206, 2209 2269 2176 2300 2305 2305 2135, 2215 2247, 2289, 2298, 2300, 2308, 2330, 2369 GPX 2177 Gradiente 2197 Graetz 2302 Greenhill 2209 Grundig 2271 Grunkel 2312, 2316 GVG 2299 H&B 2308 H_her 2318 Haaz 2304, 2305 Haier 2172 Harman/Kardon 2125, 2213 HiMAX 2309 Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108, 2302, 2309, 2320, 2366 Hiteker 2208 Home Tech Industries 2318 Hyundai 2316 Ilo 2167 Initial 2167, 2209 Innovation 2228 Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219 Integra 2207 Irradio 2103 iSymphony 2164 JBL 2213 JVC 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052, 2053, 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057, 2070, 2242, 2261, 2275, 2276, 2277, 2278, 2339, 2340, 2341, 2342, 2386, 2387, 2389, 2390, 2391 Jwin 2148 Kansai 2314 Kawasaki 2199 Kennex 2312 Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270 KeyPlug 2312 Kiiro 2312 Kingavon 2308 Kiss 2302 KLH 2199, 2209 Koda 2308 Koss 2095, 2198, 2204 KXD 2309 Landel 2221 Lasonic 2214 Lawson 2305 Lecson 2303 Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317 Lenoxx 2203, 2218 LG Life Lifetec Limit Liquid Video Liteon Loewe LogicLab Magnavox Magnex Majestic Marantz Marquant Matsui McIntosh Mecotek Medion Memorex MiCO Micromaxx Microsoft Microstar Minoka Minowa Mintek Mitsubishi Mizuda Monyka Mustek Mx Onda Mystral Naiko Nesa Neufunk Nevir Next Base Nexxtech NU-TEC Onkyo Oopla Oppo Optim Optimus Orava Orbit Orion Oritron P&B Pacific Panasonic Parasound peeKTON Philips 2080, 2107, 2115, 2116, 2141, 2188, 2211, 2215, 2237, 2239, 2285, 2293, 2295, 2348, 2370 2228 2228 2305 2204 2097, 2121, 2220 2274 2305 2075, 2096, 2178, 2180, 2196, 2205, 2219, 2308 2317 2314 2282 2312 2198, 2296 2149 2312 2228 2078, 2184, 2195 2300, 2304 2228 2206 2228 2312 2317 2167, 2209 2081 2308, 2309 2302 2232 2304 2316 2312 2209 2302 2312 2221 2161 2301 2205, 2290 2097 2150, 2173 2303 2230 2308 2313 2027, 2060 2198, 2204 2308 2305 2015, 2016, 2017, 2036, 2037, 2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2043, 2074, 2089, 2104, 2108, 2112, 2120, 2131, 2132, 2197, 2205, 2244, 2245, 2246, 2253, 2254, 2255, 2292, 2321, 2324, 2327, 2328, 2329, 2331, 2383, 2388 2151 2318 2026, 2061, 2062, 2075, 2090, 2094, 2096, 2097, 2103, 2110, 2126, 2180, 2193, 2205, 2231, 2235, 2241, 2251, Phonotrend Pioneer Pointer Polaroid Portland Powerpoint Prima Proceed Proscan Prosonic Protron Provision Pye Qwestar Raite RCA RedStar Regent Reoc Rimax Rio Roadstar Ronin Rotel Rowa Rownsonic Saba Sabaki Saivod Sampo Samsung Sansui Sanyo ScanMagic Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scientific Labs Scott Seeltech SEG Sharp Shinsonic Sigmatek Silva Singer Skymaster 2252, 2256, 2260, 2268, 2282, 2332, 2333, 2343, 2344, 2345, 2367, 2371, 2373, 2380, 2382, 2385 2317 2012, 2013, 2014, 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067, 2113, 2134, 2207, 2230, 2236, 2265, 2266, 2267, 2297, 2322, 2351, 2352, 2353, 2354, 2355, 2356, 2357, 2358, 2359, 2377 2312 2047, 2133, 2185 2312 2313 2174 2208 2206 2299, 2314 2152 2308 2194 2198 2302 2058, 2059, 2071, 2079, 2183, 2199, 2206, 2207, 2209 2310, 2312, 2314 2203 2305 2315 2215 2281, 2308 2313 2153 2200, 2301 2307 2198, 2238 2305 2312 2223 2031, 2032, 2033, 2034, 2035, 2082, 2127, 2137, 2138, 2154, 2182, 2197, 2283, 2319, 2325, 2346, 2347, 2349, 2372, 2381 2027, 2195, 2304, 2305, 2312 2139, 2195, 2212, 2374 2232 2312 2226 2305 2243, 2311 2318 2240, 2302, 2305, 2313 2009, 2010, 2084, 2122, 2142, 2143, 2144, 2181, 2190, 2228, 2262, 2375 2167 2309, 2318 2310 2304, 2305 2279, 2305 vi Skyworth Slim Art SM Electronic Sonic Blue Sontech Sony 2310 2312 2305 2215 2316 2005, 2006, 2007, 2020, 2021, 2022, 2023, 2024, 2025, 2069, 2072, 2073, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2091, 2092, 2093, 2102, 2128, 2129, 2130, 2249, 2250, 2323, 2334, 2335, 2336, 2360, 2361, 2362, 2363, 2364, 2365, 2384 Soundmaster 2305 Soundmax 2305 Spectra 2313 Spectroniq 2155 Standard 2305 Star Cluster 2305 Starmedia 2308, 2318 Sungale 2158 Sunkai 2312 Superscan 2196 Supervision 2305 Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189, 2196, 2219, 2224 Symphonic 2062, 2180 Synn 2305 T.D.E. Systems 2316 Tatung 2083, 2312 TCM 2228, 2379 Teac 2199, 2287, 2301, 2305 Tec 2310 Technics 2197 Technika 2312, 2317 Telefunken 2307 Tensai 2312 Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311 Theta Digital 2207 Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284, 2294 Tokai 2302, 2310 Top Suxess 2318 Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027, 2028, 2029, 2030, 2098, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2114, 2117, 2118, 2119, 2136, 2187, 2195, 2205, 2291, 2337, 2338, 2378 TRANScontinents 2313, 2317 Transonic 2317 Trio 2312 Trutech 2160 TruVision 2309 TSM 2318 Umax 2315 United 2317 Urban Concepts 2205 US Logic 2167 Venturer 2199 Viewmaster 2318 Vocopro 2156 VocoStar 2157 Waitec 2318 Welltech 2300 Westinghouse 2109, 2168 Wharfedale 2304, 2305 vii Woxter Xbox Xlogic XMS Xoro Yamada Yamaha Yamakawa Yukai Zenith 2315, 2318 2206, 2229 2305, 2312 2312 2300 2097, 2313, 2315 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2011, 2018, 2019, 2036, 2106, 2197, 2273 2302, 2313 2232 2080, 2141, 2205, 2211, 2215 Blu-ray Disc LG Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Sharp Sony Yamaha 2115 2089, 2131, 2132 2134 2035, 2127 2142, 2143, 2144 2025 2018 DVR Bush Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Samsung Yamaha 2060 2037, 2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042 2061, 2062 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067 2059 2035 2036 DVD Recorder Aspire Astar Broksonic Go Video Hitachi Insignia Irradio JVC LG Liteon Panasonic Philips Pioneer Pye Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sony Sylvania Toshiba Yamaha 2140 2162 2192 2135 2108 2080 2103 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057 2107, 2115, 2141, 2188 2121 2037, 2038, 2039, 2041, 2042, 2043, 2089, 2104, 2108, 2112 2090, 2096, 2097, 2126, 2193 2067, 2113 2194 2034, 2082, 2138 2027 2139 2022, 2023, 2024, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2102, 2128, 2129, 2130 2189 2030, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2114, 2117, 2118, 2119 2106 Cable ABC ADB Adelphia 3004, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3037, 3040, 3067, 3080, 3081 3070 3003 Alcatel 3066 Americast 3046 Amstrad 3048, 3068 Antronix 3019, 3020 Archer 3020 Arcon 3048 AT&T 3013 Axis 3048 Bell South 3046 Cable Vision 3014 Cabletenna 3019 Cabletime 3058 Cableview 3005 Clearmaster 3045 ClearMax 3045 Clyde Cablevision 3059 Colour Voice 3022 Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039 Comcrypt 3057 Comtronics 3023 Contec 3024 Coolmax 3045 COX 3006 Cryptovision 3060 Director 3006 Eastern 3025 Everquest 3041 Fidelity 3048 Filmnet 3057 Filmnet Cablecrypt 3061 Filmnet Comcrypt 3061 Finlux 3051 Focus 3044 Foxtel 3068 France Telecom 3054, 3055 Freebox 3069 GC Electronics 3020 GE 3015, 3016 GEC 3059 Gemini 3026, 3041 General Instrument 3006, 3008, 3016, 3039, 3050, 3067, 3075 Goldstar 3042 Gooding 3049 Grundig 3048, 3049 Hamlin 3027, 3028 Hirschmann 3051 Hitachi 3016 HomeChoice 3056 Humax 3001, 3002, 3071 ITT Nokia 3051 Jasco 3041 Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016, 3026, 3037, 3041, 3050, 3064, 3067, 3075 JVC 3049 Kabel Deutschland 3043, 3073, 3074 Macab 3055 Magnavox 3029 Maspro 3049 Matsui 3049 MegaCable 3039 Memorex 3030, 3040 Minerva 3049 Mnet 3057 Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010, 3013, 3039, 3072, 3075 Movie Time Mr Zapp Multichoice Multitech NEC NET Brazil Nokia Noos NSC Oak Pace Palladium Panasonic Paragon Philips 3031, 3063 3055 3057 3045 3018 3007 3051 3055 3031 3024 3011, 3043, 3084 3049 3034, 3036, 3040 3040 3021, 3022, 3029, 3049, 3053, 3054, 3055 Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038, 3042, 3048, 3083, 3084 Popular Mechanics 3044 Proscan 3015, 3016 Pulsar 3040 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 3064 Quasar 3040 RadioShack 3041, 3045 RCA 3005, 3036, 3076, 3077 Realistic 3020 Recoton 3044 Regal 3028 Regency 3025 Rembrandt 3016 Runco 3040 Sagem 3055 Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032, 3042 SAT 3048 Scientific Atlanta 3003, 3004, 3011, 3012, 3013, 3062, 3078, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3083, 3084 Signal 3026, 3041 Signature 3016 Sony 3014, 3047 Sprucer 3036 Standard Component 3033 Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041, 3067 Stargate 3026, 3041 Starquest 3026, 3041 Supercable 3008 Supermax 3045 Tele+1 3057, 3061 Telepiu 3057 Thomson 3000, 3009 TIME WARNER 3006 Tocom 3017 Torx 3067 Toshiba 3040 Tristar 3045 Tudi 3052 Tusa 3026, 3041 TV86 3031 Unika 3019, 3020 United Cable 3037, 3064 Universal 3019, 3020 Universum 3049, 3051 V2 3045 Videoway 3065 View Star 3024, 3029, 3031 Viewmaster Vision Visiopass Vortex View Wittenberg Zenith Zentek 3045 3045 3051, 3054, 3055 3045 3048 3035, 3040, 3046 3044 Sattelite AB Sat AccessHD ADB AGS Akai Alba 4138, 4139 4058 4142 4138 4101, 4103 4083, 4084, 4085, 4086, 4108, 4139 Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088 Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103 Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090 Alltech 4139 Alpha 4103 Alpha Digital 4058 Alphastar 4031 Amitronica 4139 Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136, 4139 Anglo 4139 Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090, 4139 Anttron 4083, 4086 Apollo 4083 Armstrong 4089, 4103 Artec 4054 Asat 4101, 4103 ASLF 4139 Astacom 4138 Astra 4089, 4091, 4100, 4137, 4139 Astro 4074, 4086, 4088, 4090, 4093, 4135, 4136, 4137 AudioTon 4086, 4098 Aurora 4140 Austar 4140 Axiel 4138 Axis 4074, 4090, 4091, 4096 Best 4074, 4090 Blaupunkt 4093 Blue Sky 4139 Boca 4089, 4100, 4105, 4139 Boston 4138 Brain Wave 4095 Broadcast 4094 Broco 4139 BSkyB 4113, 4123 BT 4138 Bubu Sat 4139 Bush 4084, 4127 Cambridge 4136 Canal Satellite 4135 Canal+ 4135 CaptiveWorks 4049 Channel Master 4060, 4085 Chaparral 4025 CHEROKEE 4138 Chess 4134, 4139 CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137 Clatronic 4095 CNT 4088 Comag 4000, 4001, 4002, 4003, 4004 Commlink 4087 Comtech 4096 Condor Connexions Conrad 4074, 4090, 4137 4074, 4092 4074, 4133, 4136, 4137 Conrad Electronic 4137, 4139 Contec 4096 Coolsat 4050 Cosat 4098 Coship 4063 Crown 4089 Daeryung 4092 Daewoo 4107, 4139 DDC 4085 Delega 4085 Dew 4096 Diamond 4097 Digiality 4137 Digital Stream 4059 DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020, 4021, 4022, 4024, 4037, 4038, 4040, 4041, 4043, 4045, 4057, 4106, 4143, 4144, 4145, 4146, 4147, 4148, 4149, 4150, 4151, 4152, 4153, 4154, 4155, 4156, 4157 Discoverer 4134 Discovery 4138 Diseqc 4138 Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013, 4014, 4019, 4039, 4064 Dishpro 4039, 4064 Distrisat 4103 Ditristrad 4098 DNT 4092, 4101, 4103 Drake 4026 DStv 4140 Dune 4074 Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039, 4064, 4092, 4139 Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089, 4136, 4139 Elap 4138, 4139 Elekta 4088 Elsat 4139 Elta 4074, 4083, 4090, 4098, 4101, 4103 Emanon 4083 Emme Esse 4074, 4090 Engel 4139 Ep Sat 4084 EURIEULT 4077 Eurodec 4102 Europa 4103, 4136, 4137 Europhon 4137 Eurosat 4089 Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090, 4133, 4136, 4137 Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137 Eutelsat 4139 Exator 4083, 4086 Expressvu 4039 Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139 Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132 Fidelity 4136 Finlandia 4084 Finlux 4084 FinnSat 4096, 4102 Flair Mate 4139 Foxtel 4140 Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136 FTEmaximal 4074, 4139 Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090, 4092, 4093, 4101, 4133 Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090, 4091, 4096, 4098, 4133, 4140 GE 4015, 4016, 4061, 4151 General Instrument 4027, 4065 GMI 4089 GOI 4039 Goldbox 4135 GoldStar 4099 Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084 Goodmind 4061 Grandin 4077 Grothusen 4083, 4099 Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093, 4113, 4129, 4136, 4140 Hänsel & Gretel 4137 Hantor 4083, 4095 Hanuri 4088 Hauppauge 4126 Heliocom 4137 Helium 4137 Hinari 4085 Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128, 4136, 4137, 4138 Hisawa 4095 Hisense 4066 Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149, 4153 Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007 Houston 4098 HTS 4039 Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144, 4146, 4150, 4152 Hughes Network Systems 4021 Humax 4051, 4075, 4076, 4110 Huth 4087, 4089, 4094, 4095, 4096, 4098, 4137, 4141 Hypson 4077 Ilo 4066 Imex 4077 Innovation 4090 Insignia 4057 Intertronic 4089 Intervision 4098, 4137 ITT Nokia 4084 Jerrold 4065 Johansson 4095 JOK 4138 JSR 4098 JVC 4011, 4019, 4039, 4079 Kamm 4139 Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103, 4109, 4112, 4120, 4133, 4138, 4139 Kathrein Eurostar 4133 Klap 4138 Konig 4137 Kosmos 4099 KR 4086 Kreiselmeyer 4093 K-SAT 4139 Kyostar 4083 L&S Electronic 4074 Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090, 4100, 4133, 4134, 4137 Lasonic 4062 Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099, 4133, 4137, 4139 Leng 4095 Lennox 4098 Lenson 4136 Lexus 4103 LG 4053, 4057, 4099 Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134, 4139 Lifetec 4090 Lorenzen 4137 Lorraine 4099 Lupus 4074, 4090 Luxor 4136 Lyonnaise 4102 Macab 4102 Magnavox 4045, 4055 Manata 4077, 4138, 4139 Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098, 4138 Marantz 4101 Mascom 4088 Maspro 4084, 4139 Matsui 4138 Max 4137 Mediabox 4135 Mediamarkt 4089 Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136 Medion 4074, 4090, 4139 Medison 4139 Mega 4101, 4103 Memorex 4045 Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083, 4086, 4087, 4088, 4139 Metz 4093 Micro electronic 4136, 4137, 4139 Micro Technology 4139 MicroGem 4056 Micromaxx 4074, 4090 Microstar 4090 Microtec 4139 Minerva 4093 Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152 Mitsumi 4100 Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101, 4103, 4139 Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010, 4065 Multichoice 4140 Multitec 4134 Muratto 4099 Mysat 4139 Navex 4095 Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136, 4137, 4139 Neusat 4139 Next Level 4065 NextWave 4141 Nikko 4089, 4139 Nokia 4084, 4122 Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085, 4088, 4102 Nova 4140 Novis 4095 Oceanic 4097 Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096 Okano 4089 Optex 4098 Optus 4135, 4140, 4141 viii Orbitech OSat Otto Versand Pace Pacific Packsat Palcom Palladium Palsat Panasat Panasonic Panda Pansat Patriot Paysat PCT Philco Philips Phoenix Phonotrend Pioneer Polsat Predki Premiere Priesner Primestar Profile Promax Prosat Proscan Protek Proton Provision Quadral Quelle Quiero RadioShack Radiola Radix Rainbow RCA Realistic Redpoint Redstar RFT Roadstar Roch Rover Saba Sabre Sagem Sakura Samsung SAT Sat Cruiser Sat Partner Sat Team ix 4083, 4134, 4135, 4136 4086 4093 4084, 4093, 4113, 4121, 4125, 4138 4097 4138 4085 4089, 4136 4134, 4136 4140 4043, 4044, 4046, 4084, 4113, 4118, 4143, 4148 4084, 4137 4047 4138 4045 4060 4055 4021, 4022, 4045, 4084, 4101, 4103, 4111, 4115, 4135, 4138, 4150, 4152, 4153, 4155, 4156 4096 4084, 4087, 4098 4124, 4135 4102 4095 4098, 4135 4089 4030 4138 4084 4085, 4087 4015, 4016, 4040, 4151 4097 4066 4088 4074, 4085, 4087, 4090, 4138 4093, 4133, 4137 4102 4065 4101, 4103 4092, 4119 4086 4015, 4016, 4034, 4035, 4036, 4037, 4038, 4040, 4151, 4157 4028 4091 4074, 4090 4087, 4101, 4103 4139 4077 4074, 4139 4088, 4133, 4137, 4138 4084 4069, 4102 4096 4018, 4021, 4023, 4041, 4042, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4114, 4150, 4154 4085, 4136 4141 4083, 4086, 4088, 4095, 4099, 4136 4139 Satcom Satec Satelco Satford Satmaster Satplus Schneider Schwaiger SCS Seemann SEG 4094, 4137 4139 4074 4094 4094 4134 4090, 4134, 4138 4097, 4134, 4137 4133 4089, 4091, 4092 4074, 4083, 4090, 4095 Seleco 4098 Servi Sat 4077, 4139 Siemens 4093 Silva 4099 Skantin 4139 Skardin 4091 Skinsat 4136 SKR 4139 Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087, 4134, 4139 Skymax 4101, 4103 SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137, 4139 Skyvision 4098 SM Electronic 4134, 4139 Smart 4133, 4139 Sony 4017, 4020, 4135 SR 4089, 4100 Star Choice 4065 Starland 4139 Starring 4095 Start Trak 4083 Strong 4074, 4083, 4086, 4090, 4099, 4140 STS 4033 STVI 4077 Sumida 4089 Sunny Sound 4074 Sunsat 4139 Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100 Supermax 4141 Tandberg 4102 Tandy 4086 Tantec 4084 TCM 4090 Techniland 4094 TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073, 4092, 4103, 4116, 4117, 4134, 4135, 4136 Technology 4140 Technosat 4141 Technowelt 4137 Teco 4089, 4100 Telanor 4085 Telasat 4133, 4137 Telecom 4139 Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138 Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092, 4136, 4137 Telemaster 4088 Telesat 4137 Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136 Televes 4084, 4136 Telewire 4098 Tempo 4141 Tevion 4090, 4139 Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102, 4104, 4130, 4133, 4135, 4137, 4138, 4139 Thorens 4097 Thorn 4084 Tivax Tivo Tokai Tonna Toshiba Triad Triasat Triax Turnsat Tvonics Twinner UEC Uher UltimateTV Uniden Unisat Unitor Universum US Digital Variosat Vega Ventana Viewsat Visiosat Voom Vortec Welltech WeTeKom Wevasat Wewa Winersat Wisi Woorisat Worldsat Xrypton XSat Zehnder Zenith Zodiac 4058 4150 4103 4084, 4094, 4098, 4136, 4139 4144, 4152, 4153 4099 4136 4093, 4133, 4136, 4139 4139 4132 4077, 4139 4140 4134 4020 4029, 4045 4089, 4096, 4103 4095 4093, 4133, 4137 4066 4093 4074 4101, 4103 4048 4095, 4098, 4138, 4139 4065 4083 4134 4134, 4136 4084 4084 4095 4084, 4092, 4093, 4136, 4137 4088 4138 4074 4139 4074, 4088, 4090, 4131, 4133 4052, 4057, 4145 4086 CD Yamaha 5000, 5013 CD Recoder Yamaha 5001 MD Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004 Tape Yamaha 5005, 5006 Tuner Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5014, 5015, 5016, 5017, 5018 USB Yamaha 5012, 5021 DOCK Yamaha 5011, 5022 LD Yamaha 2002 Information about software About FLAC codec library Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: – Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. – Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. – Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. About Vorbis library Copyright (c) 2001, Xiphophorus Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: – Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. – Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. – Neither the name of the Xiphophorus nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. x 00_HTR-6280_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 31, 2009 10:52 AM U HTR-6280 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Printed in Malaysia WR37660 U HTR-6280 The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual. ■ Front panel A BC D E F G H I J HDMI THROUGH VOLUME ZONE2 ON/OFF ZONE2 CONTROL INFO l MEMORY PRESET FM l h AM CATEGORY h l TUNING/CH h SCENE BD/DVD TV RADIO CD INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE PHONES TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT STRAIGHT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC USB ON/OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA K L M N O P Q R S VIDEO AUDIO T U V ■ Remote control a n MAIN ZONE2 c CODE SET TRANSMIT b POWER SOURCE POWER SLEEP o p HDMI 1 2 3 4 4 q AV d 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 V-AUX PHONO USB DOCK TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI PRESET TUN./CH AUDIO e CATEGORY FM AM f INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE g STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE h i BD DVD TV CD ON SCREEN j VOLUME ENTER s DISPLAY t TOP MENU MENU MUTE REC TAG l r OPTION RETURN k RADIO PRG SELECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 u v ENT TV INPUT m POWER TV VOL TV CH MUTE Printed in Malaysia WR37670